Application Server Group Web Interface

Administration Guide – Part 1

(Group and Department Administration Procedures)

Release 21.0
Document Version 2

9737 Washingtonian Boulevard, Suite 350

Gaithersburg, MD 20878
Tel +1 301.977.9440
[Link]
 BroadWorks® Guide

Copyright Notice
Copyright© 2015 BroadSoft, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Any technical documentation that is made available by BroadSoft, Inc. is proprietary and
confidential and is considered the copyrighted work of BroadSoft, Inc.
This publication is for distribution under BroadSoft non-disclosure agreement only. No
part of this publication may be duplicated without the express written permission of
BroadSoft, Inc., 9737 Washingtonian Boulevard, Suite 350, Gaithersburg, MD 20878.
BroadSoft reserves the right to make changes without prior notice.
Trademarks
Any product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered
trademarks of BroadSoft or their respective companies and are hereby acknowledged.
This document is printed in the United States of America.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 2 OF 314
 Document Revision History

Release Version Reason for Change Date Author

14.0 1 Updated document for re-branding. January 3, 2006 Roberta Boyle

14.0 1 Updated for EV 30084, EV 26514, March 13, 2006 Robb Surridge
EV 26386, 30015; corrected user ID
requirements, browser requirements,
voice portal configuration, and trunking
call configuration.

14.0 1 Deleted custom features. May 22, 2006 Patricia Renaud

14.0 1 Updated for new logo, new features, July 13, 2006 Gillian Horgan
EV 33913 (no Voice Portal Routing for
group administrator), EV 33760 (no
Back button), EV 31729 (default setting
for Custom Ringback), EV 31881
(maximum length for .wav and .mov
files), EV 33451 (change FAC names).
Split guide into Part 1(this guide for
group and department tasks) and Part
2 (user tasks).

14.0 1 Updated for IMS Public Identities August 23, 2006 Robb Surridge
feature.

14.0 1 Edited document. September 1, 2006 Patricia Renaud

14.0 2 Added clarification on Custom September 7, 2006 Robb Surridge

Ringback Group default behavior
(EV 31729).

14.0 2 Updated document with minor October 16, 2006 Margot Hovey
modifications, including EV 37673.

14.0 3 Updated document for Client March 13, 2007 Leif R. Montin
Management System (CMS) feature.

14.0 3 Edited changes. March 16, 2007 Patricia Renaud

14.0 4 Updated acronyms for CS-AS and CS- May 15, 2007 Robb Surridge
MS in acronym table.

14.0 4 Added information for EV 48352. June 1, 2007 Robb Surridge

14.0 5 Updated document for EV 58151. April 29, 2008 Roberta Boyle

14.0 5 Edited changes and published May 1, 2008 Andrea Fitzwilliam

document.

14.0 6 Updated document for Releases 14.sp1 May 31, 2008 Patricia Renaud
through 14.sp6. Also removed
information related to the Client
Management System (CMS).

14.0 6 Edited changes and published May 31, 2008 Patricia Renaud
document.

15.0 1 Updated document for Release 15.0. June 22, 2008 Roberta Boyle

15.0 1 Reviewed document. July 26, 2008 Patricia Renaud

15.0 1 Updated sections 12.5.1 List, Add, September 4, 2008 Roberta Boyle
Modify, or Delete Feature Access
Codes or Speed Dial 100 Prefix for
EV 67093.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 3 OF 314
 Release Version Reason for Change Date Author

15.0 1 Updated sections 5.5.2 Add September 27, 2008 Roberta Boyle
Identity/Device Profile and 5.5.3 Modify
Identity/Device Profile for EV 67117.

15.0 1 Edited changes and published September 29, 2008 Andrea Fitzwilliam
document.

15.0 2 Updated section [Link] General October 7, 2008 Roberta Boyle

Settings and section [Link] Internal
Calls Settings for EV 68745.

15.0 2 Updated section 12.5.1 List, Add, October 9, 2008 Roberta Boyle
Modify, or Delete Feature Access
Codes or Speed Dial 100 Prefix for
EV 67093.

15.0 2 Edited changes and published October 9, 2008 Andrea Fitzwilliam

document.

15.0 3 Updated section 10.7.1 View and November 3, 2008 Goska Auerbach
Configure Outgoing Calling Plan for
Group and Departments for EV 61621.

15.0 3 Updated section 12.8.1 Generate December 17, 2008 Roberta Boyle
Inventory Report for Group for
EV 69617. Document was not listed in
EV, but help page was changed and
this document reflects the same
changes.

15.0 3 Edited changes and published December 17, 2008 Andrea Fitzwilliam
document.

16.0 1 Updated document for Release 16.0. December 30, 2008 Goska Auerbach

16.0 1 Made minor change to section 4.4.4 May 13, 2009 Goska Auerbach
Set or Modify Policies for Group
Administrator for EV 88656.

16.0 1 Updated with additional Release 16.0 July 12, 2009 Goska Auerbach
functionality.

16.0 1 Edited changes for EV 88656 only. August 13, 2009 Andrea Fitzwilliam

16.0 1 Edited and published document. August 28, 2009 Margot Hovey-
Ritter

17.0 1 Updated document for Release 17.0 September 14, 2009 Goska Auerbach

17.0 1 Updated section 6.8 Voice Messaging February 12, 2010 Goska Auerbach
for EV 105948.

17.0 1 Updated section 12.8.1 Generate February 23, 2010 Goska Auerbach
Inventory Report for Group for
EV 107334.

17.0 1 Updated sections 4.11 Virtual On-Net April 14, 2010 Goska Auerbach
Enterprise Extensions and 12.4 Custom
Contact Directories for EV 110253.

17.0 1 Edited changes and published April 28, 2010 Andrea Fitzwilliam
document.

17.0 2 Updated section [Link] Manage May 21, 2010 Goska Auerbach
Configurable Device Files for
EV 112223.

17.0 2 Edited changes and published June 3, 2010 Andrea Fitzwilliam

document.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 4 OF 314
 Release Version Reason for Change Date Author

18.0 1 Updated document for Release 18.0. June 3, 2010 Goska Auerbach

18.0 1 Updated document for EV 155935. December 13, 2011 Goska Auerbach

18.0 1 Updated section 6.9.1 Configure Voice December 20, 2011 Goska Auerbach
Portal for EV 156444.

18.0 1 Updated section 12.5.1 List, Add, December 20, 2011 Goska Auerbach
Modify, or Delete Feature Access
Codes or Speed Dial 100 Prefix for
EV 156542.

18.0 1 Edited changes and published December 22, 2011 Andrea Fitzwilliam
document.

19.0 1 Updated document for Release 19.0. February 3, 2012 Goska Auerbach

19.0 1 Updated section [Link] Users Tab (All November 28, 2012 Goska Auerbach
Devices) for EV 179998.

19.0 1 Updated section 5.13.1 View Trunking December 3, 2012 Goska Auerbach
Call Capacity for EV 180387.

19.0 1 Edited changes and published December 12, 2012 Patricia Renaud
document.

19.0 2 Corrected section numbering. December 20, 2012 Goska Auerbach

19.0 2 Edited changes and published January 7, 2013 Patricia Renaud

document.

20.0 1 Updated document for Release 20.0. January 8, 2013 Goska Auerbach

20.0 1 Edited changes and published December , 2013 Joan Renaud

document.

21.0 1 Updated document for Release 21.0. January 3, 2014 Goska Auerbach

21.0 1 Updated the BroadSoft legal notice. October 15, 2014 Goska Auerbach

21.0 1 Edited changes. December 15, 2014 Joan Renaud

21.0 1 Rebranded and published document. December 22, 2014 Joan Renaud

21.0 2 Made editorial changes. January 16, 2015 Goska Auerbach

21.0 2 Edited changes and published February 18, 2015 Andrea Fitzwilliam
document.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 5 OF 314
 Table of Contents

INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................................................... 18
1 Summary of Changes ................................................................................................................ 19
1.1 Changes for Release 21.0, Document Version 2 .................................................................... 19
1.2 Changes for Release 21.0, Document Version 1 .................................................................... 19
1.3 Changes for Release 20.0, Document Version 1 .................................................................... 19
1.4 Changes for Release 19.0, Document Version 2 .................................................................... 20
1.5 Changes for Release 19.0, Document Version 1 .................................................................... 20
1.6 Changes for Release 18.0, Document Version 1 .................................................................... 21
1.7 Changes for Release 17.0, Document Version 2 .................................................................... 22
1.8 Changes for Release 17.0, Document Version 1 .................................................................... 22
1.9 Changes for Release 16.0, Document Version 1 .................................................................... 23
1.10 Changes for Release 15.0, Document Version 3 .................................................................... 23
1.11 Changes for Release 15.0, Document Version 2 .................................................................... 24
1.12 Changes for Release 15.0, Document Version 1 .................................................................... 24
1.13 Changes for Releases 14.sp1 through 14.sp6, Document Version 6 .................................... 24
2 About This Guide ........................................................................................................................ 26
3 Group Administrator Tasks and Responsibilities ................................................................ 27
GROUP ADMINISTRATION.................................................................................................................... 28
4 Profile Menu................................................................................................................................. 29
4.1 Access Group – Profile Menu ................................................................................................... 30
4.2 Profile ......................................................................................................................................... 31
4.2.1 Modify Group Profile ......................................................................................................... 31
4.3 Change Password ..................................................................................................................... 33
4.3.1 Change Your Password ................................................................................................... 33
4.4 Administrators ............................................................................................................................ 34
4.4.1 List Administrators ............................................................................................................ 34
4.4.2 Add Administrators ........................................................................................................... 35
4.4.3 Modify or Delete Administrator......................................................................................... 37
4.4.4 Set or Modify Policies for Group Administrator ............................................................... 38
4.5 Announcement Repository ....................................................................................................... 42
4.5.1 List Announcements ......................................................................................................... 42
4.5.2 Add Announcements ........................................................................................................ 43
4.5.3 Modify Announcements.................................................................................................... 44
4.5.4 Delete Announcements .................................................................................................... 45
4.6 Departments .............................................................................................................................. 46
4.6.1 List Departments............................................................................................................... 46
4.6.2 Add Departments.............................................................................................................. 47
4.6.3 Modify or Delete Department ........................................................................................... 48
4.7 Schedules .................................................................................................................................. 49

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 6 OF 314
 4.7.1 List and Delete Schedules ............................................................................................... 49
4.7.2 View Schedule .................................................................................................................. 50
4.7.3 Add Schedule ................................................................................................................... 51
4.7.4 Add Event.......................................................................................................................... 52
4.7.5 Modify Schedule ............................................................................................................... 54
4.8 Call Processing Policies ............................................................................................................ 56
4.9 Communication Barring Authorization Codes .......................................................................... 59
4.9.1 List Communication Barring Auth Codes ........................................................................ 59
4.9.2 Add Authorization Code ................................................................................................... 60
4.9.3 Delete Communication Barring Authorization Code ....................................................... 60
4.10 Dian Plan Policy......................................................................................................................... 61
4.10.1 Add Dial Plan Policy Access Code .................................................................................. 63
4.10.2 Modify Dial Plan Policy Access Code.............................................................................. 64
4.11 Virtual On-Net Enterprise Extensions ....................................................................................... 65
4.11.1 List Virtual On-Net Users.................................................................................................. 66
4.11.2 Add Virtual On-Net User .................................................................................................. 67
4.11.3 Add Range of Virtual On-Net Users ................................................................................ 68
4.11.4 Modify or Delete Virtual On-Net User .............................................................................. 69
4.12 Dialable Caller ID ....................................................................................................................... 69
4.12.1 View Dialable Caller ID Settings ...................................................................................... 70
4.12.2 Configure Dialable Caller ID Settings and Prioritize Entries........................................... 71
4.12.3 Add Dialable Caller ID Criteria Entry ............................................................................... 72
4.12.4 Modify or Delete Dialable Caller ID Entry ........................................................................ 74
5 Resources Menu ......................................................................................................................... 75
5.1 Access the Group – Resources Menu ..................................................................................... 76
5.2 Call Recording Platform ............................................................................................................ 76
5.2.1 Select Call Recording Platform ........................................................................................ 76
5.3 Group Paging Targets Capacity ............................................................................................... 77
5.3.1 View Group Paging Targets Capacity ............................................................................. 77
5.4 Identity/Device Endpoints.......................................................................................................... 78
5.4.1 List Identity/Device Endpoints .......................................................................................... 78
5.5 Identity/Device Profiles .............................................................................................................. 78
5.5.1 List Identity/Device Profile ................................................................................................ 78
5.5.2 Add Identity/Device Profile ............................................................................................... 80
5.5.3 Modify Identity/Device Profile ........................................................................................... 82
5.5.4 Delete Identity/Device Profile ........................................................................................... 95
5.6 Domains ..................................................................................................................................... 96
5.6.1 List Domains ..................................................................................................................... 96
5.6.2 List Users Assigned to Domain........................................................................................ 97
5.7 Network Classes of Service ...................................................................................................... 98
5.7.1 List Network Classes of Service ...................................................................................... 98
5.7.2 List Assigned Users .......................................................................................................... 98
5.8 Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges............................................................................................ 99
APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00
©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 7 OF 314
 5.8.1 Display Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges ..................................................................... 99
5.9 Office Zones............................................................................................................................. 100
5.9.1 List Office Zones ............................................................................................................. 100
5.9.2 List Assigned Users ........................................................................................................ 101
5.10 Numbers................................................................................................................................... 101
5.10.1 List Assigned Numbers .................................................................................................. 101
5.10.2 Change Department Assignments of Numbers ............................................................ 103
5.11 Route Point External Systems ................................................................................................ 103
5.11.1 List Route Point External Systems ................................................................................ 103
5.11.2 View Route Point External System Usage.................................................................... 104
5.12 Services.................................................................................................................................... 105
5.12.1 List Services .................................................................................................................... 105
5.12.2 List Service Pack Details ................................................................................................ 106
5.13 Trunking Call Capacity ............................................................................................................ 106
5.13.1 View Trunking Call Capacity .......................................................................................... 106
5.14 Session Admission Control Capacity ..................................................................................... 108
5.15 Activate Numbers .................................................................................................................... 109
5.15.1 List Assigned Phone Numbers ...................................................................................... 109
5.15.2 Activate or Deactivate Assigned Phone Numbers........................................................ 109
5.16 Assign Group Services ............................................................................................................ 110
5.16.1 List Assigned Group Services ........................................................................................ 110
5.16.2 Assign or Unassign Group Services.............................................................................. 111
5.17 New User Services Template ................................................................................................. 112
5.17.1 Define Service Set Assigned to New Users .................................................................. 112
5.18 Existing User Services ............................................................................................................ 114
5.18.1 Assign or Unassign Service Packs or User Services ................................................... 114
5.18.2 View Service Usage ....................................................................................................... 115
5.19 IMRNs ...................................................................................................................................... 116
5.19.1 List IMRNs....................................................................................................................... 116
5.19.2 Assign IMRNs ................................................................................................................. 116
5.19.3 Unassign IMRNs............................................................................................................. 117
5.20 Mobile Subscriber Directory Numbers.................................................................................... 119
6 Services Menu ........................................................................................................................... 120
6.1 Access the Group – Services Menu ....................................................................................... 121
6.2 CommPilot Call Manager ........................................................................................................ 121
6.2.1 Configure Group Directory Display ................................................................................ 122
6.2.2 Configure Enterprise Directory Display ......................................................................... 123
6.3 Integrated IM&P ....................................................................................................................... 124
6.4 LDAP Integration ..................................................................................................................... 124
6.4.1 Turn On or Off ................................................................................................................. 124
6.5 Music/Video On Hold............................................................................................................... 125
6.5.1 List Music/Video On Hold Settings Entries.................................................................... 125
6.5.2 Add Music/Video On Hold Settings for Department ..................................................... 126
APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00
©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 8 OF 314
 6.5.3 Modify Music/Video On Hold Settings for Group or Department ................................. 128
6.5.4 Delete Music/Video On Hold Settings for Department ................................................. 132
6.6 Pre-alerting Announcement .................................................................................................... 133
6.7 Exchange Integration .............................................................................................................. 134
6.8 Voice Messaging ..................................................................................................................... 135
6.8.1 Configure Voice Messaging ........................................................................................... 135
6.9 Voice Portal .............................................................................................................................. 137
6.9.1 Configure Voice Portal ................................................................................................... 137
6.10 Advice Of Charge .................................................................................................................... 141
6.11 BroadWorks Mobility ............................................................................................................... 141
6.12 Custom Ringback Group......................................................................................................... 142
6.12.1 Configure Custom Ringback Group .............................................................................. 143
6.13 Enterprise Trunk ...................................................................................................................... 144
6.13.1 View Enterprise Trunks .................................................................................................. 145
6.13.2 Create Enterprise Trunk ................................................................................................. 145
6.13.3 Assigned Users............................................................................................................... 153
6.13.4 Modify Enterprise Trunk ................................................................................................. 155
6.13.5 Delete Enterprise Trunk ................................................................................................. 157
6.14 Group Night Forwarding .......................................................................................................... 157
6.15 MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint ........................................................................................... 158
6.15.1 View and Enable SMS Templates and Configure Sender Tag ................................... 158
6.15.2 Add MWI Delivery Custom Template ............................................................................ 159
6.15.3 Modify MWI Delivery Custom Template........................................................................ 162
6.16 Polycom Phone Services ........................................................................................................ 163
6.17 Preferred Carrier Group .......................................................................................................... 163
6.17.1 List Preferred IntraLATA, InterLATA, and International Carriers for Group................. 163
6.18 Series Completion ................................................................................................................... 164
6.18.1 List Series Completion Groups ...................................................................................... 164
6.18.2 Add Series Completion Group ....................................................................................... 165
6.18.3 Modify or Delete Series Completion Group .................................................................. 166
6.19 Third-Party Voice Mail Support ............................................................................................... 167
6.19.1 Turn On or Off ................................................................................................................. 167
6.20 Session Admission Control Group ......................................................................................... 167
6.20.1 View Session Admission Control Group ....................................................................... 168
6.20.2 Add Session Admission Control Group ......................................................................... 169
6.20.3 Modify or Delete Session Admission Control Group .................................................... 171
6.20.4 Delete Session Admission Control Groups ................................................................... 172
7 Service Scripts Menu ............................................................................................................... 174
7.1 Access the Group – Service Scripts Menu ............................................................................ 174
7.2 Configuration............................................................................................................................ 175
7.2.1 Enable or Disable Use of Script ..................................................................................... 175
7.3 Load.......................................................................................................................................... 176
7.3.1 Load CPL Script.............................................................................................................. 176
APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00
©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 9 OF 314
 7.4 Logs .......................................................................................................................................... 177
7.4.1 View or Clear Logs from CPL Script .............................................................................. 177
8 Account/Authorization Codes Menu ..................................................................................... 178
8.1 Access Group – Account/Authorization Codes Menu ........................................................... 178
8.2 Administration .......................................................................................................................... 178
8.2.1 Identify Users for Account Code Usage ........................................................................ 178
8.2.2 Identify Users for Authorization Code Usage ................................................................ 180
8.3 Codes Management ................................................................................................................ 182
8.3.1 View or Delete Account and Authorization Codes ........................................................ 182
8.3.2 Add Account and Authorization Codes ......................................................................... 183
9 Call Center Menu ...................................................................................................................... 184
10 Calling Plan Menu ..................................................................................................................... 185
10.1 Access Group – Calling Plan Menu........................................................................................ 185
10.2 Codes Management ................................................................................................................ 186
10.2.1 List Codes for Group and Departments ........................................................................ 186
10.2.2 Add or Delete Code for Group or Department .............................................................. 186
10.3 Digit Strings .............................................................................................................................. 187
10.3.1 List or Delete Digit Strings .............................................................................................. 188
10.3.2 Add Digit String ............................................................................................................... 188
10.3.3 Modify Digit String........................................................................................................... 190
10.4 Pinhole Digit Strings ................................................................................................................ 190
10.4.1 List or Delete Pinhole Digit Strings ................................................................................ 191
10.4.2 Add Pinhole Digit String ................................................................................................. 191
10.4.3 Modify Pinhole Digit String ............................................................................................. 192
10.5 Transfer Numbers.................................................................................................................... 193
10.5.1 List and Configure Transfer Numbers for Group and Departments ............................ 193
10.6 Incoming Calling Plan.............................................................................................................. 194
10.6.1 View and Configure Incoming Calling Plan for Group and Departments .................... 194
10.7 Outgoing Calling Plan.............................................................................................................. 196
10.7.1 View and Configure Outgoing Calling Plan for Group and Departments .................... 196
10.8 Outgoing Digit Plan.................................................................................................................. 200
10.8.1 View and Configure Outgoing Digit Plan for Group and Departments ........................ 200
10.9 Outgoing Pinhole Digit Plan .................................................................................................... 203
10.9.1 View and Configure Outgoing Pinhole Digit Plan for Group and Departments .......... 203
11 Meet-Me Conferencing............................................................................................................. 207
12 Utilities Menu ............................................................................................................................. 208
12.1 Access Group – Utilities Menu................................................................................................ 209
12.2 BroadWorks Anywhere Number Lookup ............................................................................... 209
12.3 Common Phone List................................................................................................................ 210
12.3.1 List and Delete Common Phone Numbers ................................................................... 210
12.3.2 Add Common Phone Number ....................................................................................... 211
12.3.3 Modify Common Phone Number ................................................................................... 211
APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00
©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 10 OF 314
 12.3.4 Import Phone List............................................................................................................ 212
12.4 Custom Contact Directories .................................................................................................... 212
12.4.1 Add Custom Contact Directory ...................................................................................... 214
12.4.2 Modify Custom Contact Directory .................................................................................. 215
12.5 Feature Access Codes ............................................................................................................ 216
12.5.1 List, Add, Modify, or Delete Feature Access Codes or Speed Dial 100 Prefix ........... 216
12.6 Group Directory ....................................................................................................................... 227
12.6.1 List and Display Information for Phone Numbers in Group.......................................... 227
12.7 Enterprise Directory ................................................................................................................. 230
12.7.1 List and Display Information for Phone Numbers in Enterprise ................................... 230
12.8 Inventory Report ...................................................................................................................... 233
12.8.1 Generate Inventory Report for Group............................................................................ 233
12.9 Password Rules ....................................................................................................................... 235
12.9.1 List or Set Password Rules for Users ............................................................................ 235
12.10 Passcode Rules ....................................................................................................................... 238
12.10.1 List or Set Passcode Rules for Users ....................................................................... 238
12.11 Device Configuration ............................................................................................................... 240
12.11.1 List Configurable Devices.......................................................................................... 240
12.11.2 Modify Configuration of Configurable Devices ......................................................... 240
12.12 Device Management Event Queues ...................................................................................... 248
12.12.1 View or Cancel In Progress and Pending Events .................................................... 248
12.12.2 View Completed Events ............................................................................................ 249
12.13 Extension Dialing ..................................................................................................................... 250
12.13.1 Configure Extension Length...................................................................................... 250
12.14 Intercept Group ........................................................................................................................ 251
12.14.1 List Intercept Group Settings..................................................................................... 251
12.15 LDAP Directory ........................................................................................................................ 253
12.15.1 Configure Group LDAP Directory ............................................................................. 253
12.16 Verify Translation and Routing................................................................................................ 255
12.16.1 Run Test Calls ........................................................................................................... 255
12.17 Voice Portal Branding.............................................................................................................. 257
12.17.1 Select Greetings ........................................................................................................ 257
DEPARTMENT ADMINISTRATION ..................................................................................................... 258
13 Department Administrator Tasks and Responsibilities .................................................... 259
14 Profile Menu............................................................................................................................... 260
14.1 Access Group – Profile Menu ................................................................................................. 260
14.2 Access Procedures for Profile Menu Tasks ........................................................................... 260
15 Group Services Menu .............................................................................................................. 261
15.1 Access Group – Group Services Menu.................................................................................. 262
15.2 Access Procedures for Group Services Menu Tasks............................................................ 262
16 Utilities Menu ............................................................................................................................. 263
16.1 Access Group – Utilities Menu................................................................................................ 263
APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00
©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 11 OF 314
 16.2 Access Procedures for Utilities Menu Tasks.......................................................................... 263
Acronyms and Abbreviations ............................................................................................................. 264
Index ...................................................................................................................................................... 309

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 12 OF 314
 Table of Figures

Figure 1 Group – Profile Menu................................................................................................................. 29

Figure 2 Group – Profile Menu................................................................................................................. 30
Figure 3 Group – Profile ........................................................................................................................... 31
Figure 4 Group – Change Password ....................................................................................................... 33
Figure 5 Group – Administrators.............................................................................................................. 34
Figure 6 Group – Administrators Add ...................................................................................................... 35
Figure 7 Group – Administrators Modify.................................................................................................. 37
Figure 8 Group (Enterprise) – Group Administrator Policies.................................................................. 39
Figure 9 Group – Announcement Repository ......................................................................................... 43
Figure 10 Group – Announcement Repository Add................................................................................ 43
Figure 11 Group – Announcement Repository Modify ........................................................................... 44
Figure 12 Group – Announcement Repository ....................................................................................... 45
Figure 13 Group – Departments .............................................................................................................. 46
Figure 14 Group – Departments Add ...................................................................................................... 47
Figure 15 Group – Departments Modify .................................................................................................. 48
Figure 16 Group (Enterprise) – Schedules ............................................................................................. 49
Figure 17 Group – Schedule View ........................................................................................................... 50
Figure 18 Group – Event View ................................................................................................................. 50
Figure 19 Group – Schedule Add ............................................................................................................ 51
Figure 20 Group – Event Add .................................................................................................................. 52
Figure 21 Daily Recurrence Pattern ........................................................................................................ 53
Figure 22 Weekly Recurrence Pattern .................................................................................................... 53
Figure 23 Monthly Recurrence Pattern ................................................................................................... 53
Figure 24 Yearly Recurrence Pattern ...................................................................................................... 53
Figure 25 Recurrence Range................................................................................................................... 54
Figure 26 Group – Schedule Modify ........................................................................................................ 54
Figure 27 Group – Event Modify .............................................................................................................. 55
Figure 28 Group (Service Provider) – Call Processing Policies............................................................. 56
Figure 29 Group (Enterprise) – Call Processing Policies ....................................................................... 57
Figure 30 Group – Communication Barring Auth Codes ........................................................................ 59
Figure 31 Group – Communication Barring Auth Code Add .................................................................. 60
Figure 32 Group – Communication Barring Auth Codes (Delete) ......................................................... 60
Figure 33 Group – Dial Plan Policy.......................................................................................................... 61
Figure 34 Group – Dial Plan Policy Add .................................................................................................. 63
Figure 35 Group – Dial Plan Policy Modify ............................................................................................. 64
Figure 36 Group – Virtual On-Net Users ................................................................................................. 66
Figure 37 Group – Virtual On-Net Users Add ......................................................................................... 67
Figure 38 Group – Virtual On-Net Users Range Add ............................................................................. 68
Figure 39 Group – Virtual On-Net Users Modify ..................................................................................... 69
Figure 40 Group – Dialable Caller ID (Read-only) .................................................................................. 70
Figure 41 Group – Dialable Caller ID ....................................................................................................... 71
Figure 42 Group – Dialable Caller ID Criteria Add .................................................................................. 73
Figure 43 Group – Dialable Caller ID Criteria Modify (Top of Page)...................................................... 74
Figure 44 Group – Resources Menu (Top of Page) ............................................................................... 75
Figure 45 Group – Call Recording Platform ............................................................................................ 76
Figure 46 Group – Group Paging Targets Capacity ............................................................................... 77
Figure 47 Group – Identity/Device Endpoints ......................................................................................... 78
Figure 48 Group – Identity/Device Profiles.............................................................................................. 79
Figure 49 Group – Identity/Device Profile Add (Managed Device) ........................................................ 80
Figure 50 Group – Identity/Device Profile Add (IMS Deployment) ........................................................ 80
Figure 51 Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Profile (Managed Device) ..................................... 83

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 13 OF 314
 Figure 52 Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Profile (Legacy Device) ......................................... 84
Figure 53 Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Profile (Unmanaged Device) ................................ 84
Figure 54 Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Profile
(Unmanaged Device – IMS Deployments) ........................................................................................ 85
Figure 55 Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Configure ............................................................... 86
Figure 56 Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Users (AS Mode) .................................................. 88
Figure 57 Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Users (XS Mode) .................................................. 88
Figure 58 Group – Devices Modify – Reorder Users (AS Mode) .......................................................... 89
Figure 59 Group – Devices Modify – Reorder Users (XS Mode) .......................................................... 90
Figure 60 Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Files ....................................................................... 91
Figure 61 Group – Identity/Device Profile File Modify ............................................................................ 92
Figure 62 Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Custom Tags (same in IMS Deployments) ......... 93
Figure 63 Group – Identity/Device Profile Custom Tag Add (same in IMS Deployments)................... 94
Figure 64 Group – Identity/Device Profile Custom Tag Modify (same in IMS Deployments) ............. 94
Figure 65 Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify ................................................................................... 95
Figure 66 Group – Domains..................................................................................................................... 96
Figure 67 Group – Domain Users............................................................................................................ 97
Figure 68 Group – Network Classes of Service ...................................................................................... 98
Figure 69 Group – Network Classes of Service ...................................................................................... 98
Figure 70 Enterprise – Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges ..................................................................... 99
Figure 71 Group – Office Zones ............................................................................................................ 100
Figure 72 Group – Office Zone Usage .................................................................................................. 101
Figure 73 Group – Numbers .................................................................................................................. 102
Figure 74 Group – Assign Numbers Modify.......................................................................................... 103
Figure 75 Group – Route Point External Systems ................................................................................ 104
Figure 76 Group – Route Point External System Usage ...................................................................... 104
Figure 77 Group – Services (Top of Page) ........................................................................................... 105
Figure 78 Group – Service Pack Detail (Top of Page) ......................................................................... 106
Figure 79 Group (Enterprise) – Trunking Call Capacity ....................................................................... 106
Figure 80 Group (Service Provider) – Trunking Call Capacity ............................................................. 107
Figure 81 Group – Session Admission Control Capacity ..................................................................... 108
Figure 82 Group – Activate Numbers .................................................................................................... 109
Figure 83 Group – Activate Numbers Modify ........................................................................................ 110
Figure 84 Group – Assign Group Services ........................................................................................... 111
Figure 85 Group – Assign Group Services ........................................................................................... 111
Figure 86 Group – New User Services Template ................................................................................. 113
Figure 87 Group – Existing User Services (Top of Page) .................................................................... 114
Figure 88 Group – Service Usage (Fax Messaging Service) .............................................................. 115
Figure 89 Group – IMRNs ...................................................................................................................... 116
Figure 90 Group – Assign IMRNs .......................................................................................................... 116
Figure 91 Group – IMRNs (Unassign IMRN Range) ............................................................................ 117
Figure 92 Group – Unassign IMRNs ..................................................................................................... 118
Figure 93 Group – Mobile Subscriber Directory Numbers ................................................................... 119
Figure 94 Group – Services Menu (Top of Page)................................................................................. 120
Figure 95 Group – CommPilot Call Manager........................................................................................ 122
Figure 96 Group – CommPilot Call Manager........................................................................................ 123
Figure 97 Group – Integrated IM&P....................................................................................................... 124
Figure 98 Group – LDAP Integration ..................................................................................................... 125
Figure 99 Group – Music/Video On Hold .............................................................................................. 126
Figure 100 Group – Music/Video On Hold Add (Department) ............................................................. 126
Figure 101 Music/Video On Hold Modify – Identity/Device Profile Option........................................... 127
Figure 102 Group – Music/Video On Hold Modify – General Settings ................................................ 129
Figure 103 Music/Video On Hold Modify – Identity/Device Profile Option........................................... 130
Figure 104 Group – Music/Video On Hold Modify – Internal Calls Settings ........................................ 131

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 14 OF 314
 Figure 105 Group – Music/Video On Hold Modify – General Settings ................................................ 132
Figure 106 Group – Pre-alerting Announcement .................................................................................. 133
Figure 107 Group – Exchange Integration ............................................................................................ 134
Figure 108 Group – Voice Messaging ................................................................................................... 135
Figure 109 Group – Voice Portal ........................................................................................................... 138
Figure 110 Group – Voice Portal (XS Mode) ........................................................................................ 138
Figure 111 Group – Advice Of Charge .................................................................................................. 141
Figure 112 Group – BroadWorks Mobility ............................................................................................. 141
Figure 113 Group – Custom Ringback Group ...................................................................................... 143
Figure 114 Group – Enterprise Trunk .................................................................................................... 145
Figure 115 Group – Add Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing ................................................... 147
Figure 116 Group – Add Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing ..................................................... 148
Figure 117 Group – Add Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing – Assign Trunk Groups ............ 150
Figure 118 Group – Enterprise Trunk – Assign Trunk Group Priorities ............................................... 152
Figure 119 Group – Enterprise Trunk – Assign Users .......................................................................... 152
Figure 120 Group – Enterprise Trunk – Assigned Users...................................................................... 153
Figure 121 Group – Modify Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing............................................... 155
Figure 122 Group – Modify Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing ................................................. 156
Figure 123 Group – Group Night Forwarding........................................................................................ 157
Figure 124 Group – MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint ......................................................................... 159
Figure 125 Group – MWI Delivery Custom Template – Add................................................................ 160
Figure 126 Group – MWI Delivery Custom Template – Modify ........................................................... 162
Figure 127 Group – Polycom Phone Services ...................................................................................... 163
Figure 128 Group – Preferred Carrier Group ........................................................................................ 163
Figure 129 Group – Series Completion ................................................................................................. 164
Figure 130 Group – Series Completion Add ......................................................................................... 165
Figure 131 Group – Series Completion Modify..................................................................................... 166
Figure 132 Group – Third-Party Voice Mail Support ............................................................................ 167
Figure 133 Group – Session Admission Control Group ....................................................................... 168
Figure 134 Group – Session Admission Control Group (Read-only) .................................................. 168
Figure 135 Group – Session Admission Control Group Add ............................................................... 169
Figure 136 Group – Session Admission Control Group Modify ........................................................... 171
Figure 137 Group – Session Admission Control Group Modify (Read-only) ...................................... 172
Figure 138 Group – Session Admission Control Group (Delete) ......................................................... 172
Figure 139 Group – Service Scripts Menu ............................................................................................ 174
Figure 140 Group – Configuration ......................................................................................................... 175
Figure 141 Group – Load ....................................................................................................................... 176
Figure 142 Group – Logs ....................................................................................................................... 177
Figure 143 Group – Acct/Auth Codes Menu ......................................................................................... 178
Figure 144 Group – Administration (Account Codes)........................................................................... 179
Figure 145 Group – Administration (Authorization Codes) .................................................................. 180
Figure 146 Group – Codes Management ............................................................................................. 182
Figure 147 Group – Codes Management Add...................................................................................... 183
Figure 148 Group – Call Center Menu .................................................................................................. 184
Figure 149 Group – Calling Plan Menu ................................................................................................. 185
Figure 150 Group – Codes Management ............................................................................................. 186
Figure 151 Group – Codes Management Modify (Department) .......................................................... 187
Figure 152 Group – Codes Management Add (Department) .............................................................. 187
Figure 153 Group – Digit Strings ........................................................................................................... 188
Figure 154 Group – Digit Strings Add.................................................................................................... 189
Figure 155 Group – Digit Strings Modify ............................................................................................... 190
Figure 156 Group – Pinhole Digit Strings .............................................................................................. 191
Figure 157 Group – Pinhole Digit Strings Add ...................................................................................... 191
Figure 158 Group – Pinhole Digit Strings Modify.................................................................................. 192

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 15 OF 314
 Figure 159 Group – Transfer Numbers ................................................................................................. 193
Figure 160 Group – Incoming Calling Plan ........................................................................................... 195
Figure 161 Group – (Enhanced) Outgoing Calling Plan – Originating Calls ....................................... 197
Figure 162 Group – Outgoing Calling Plan – Originating Calls ............................................................ 197
Figure 163 Group – Outgoing Calling Plan – Initiating Call Forwards/Transfers ................................ 198
Figure 164 Group – Outgoing Calling Plan – Being Forwarded/Transferred Calls ............................. 199
Figure 165 Group – Outgoing Calling Plan – Call Me Now Calls ......................................................... 199
Figure 166 Group – (Enhanced) Outgoing Digit Plan – Originating Calls ........................................... 201
Figure 167 Group – Outgoing Digit Plan – Originating Calls ................................................................ 201
Figure 168 Group – Outgoing Digit Plan – Initiating Call Forwards/Transfers .................................... 202
Figure 169 Group – Outgoing Digit Plan – Call Me Now Calls ............................................................. 202
Figure 170 Group – Outgoing Pinhole Digit Plan – Originating Calls ................................................... 204
Figure 171 Group – Outgoing Pinhole Digit Plan – Initiating Call Forwards/Transfers ....................... 205
Figure 172 Group – Outgoing Pinhole Digit Plan – Call Me Now Calls ............................................... 205
Figure 173 Group – Meet-Me Conferencing Menu ............................................................................... 207
Figure 174 Group – Utilities Menu ......................................................................................................... 208
Figure 175 Group – BroadWorks Anywhere Number Lookup ............................................................. 209
Figure 176 Group – Common Phone List ............................................................................................. 210
Figure 177 Group – Common Phone List Add ..................................................................................... 211
Figure 178 Group – Common Phone List Modify ................................................................................. 211
Figure 179 Group – Common Phone List Import.................................................................................. 212
Figure 180 Group – Custom Contact Directory .................................................................................... 213
Figure 181 Group – Custom Contact Directory Add............................................................................. 214
Figure 182 Group – Custom Contact Directory Modify ........................................................................ 215
Figure 183 Group – Feature Access Codes (Top of Page) Use Service Provider FAC Codes
Option ................................................................................................................................................. 217
Figure 184 Group – Feature Access Codes (Top of Page) Use Group FAC Codes Option ............. 218
Figure 185 Group – Group Directory ..................................................................................................... 227
Figure 186 Group – Group Directory Summary .................................................................................... 228
Figure 187 Group – Group Directory Details ......................................................................................... 229
Figure 188 Group – Enterprise Directory .............................................................................................. 230
Figure 189 Group – Enterprise Directory Summary ............................................................................. 231
Figure 190 Group – Enterprise Directory Details .................................................................................. 232
Figure 191 Group – Inventory Report.................................................................................................... 233
Figure 192 Sample Inventory Report (Beginning of Report; All Items Selected Except Service) ...... 233
Figure 193 Group – Password Rules .................................................................................................... 235
Figure 194 Group – Password Rules (Read-only)................................................................................ 236
Figure 195 Group – Portal Passcode Rules ......................................................................................... 238
Figure 196 Group – Device Configuration............................................................................................. 240
Figure 197 Group – Configure Device Files .......................................................................................... 241
Figure 198 Group – Configure Device File Modify................................................................................ 242
Figure 199 Group – Configure Device Custom Tags ........................................................................... 243
Figure 200 Group – Configure Device Custom Tag Add ..................................................................... 244
Figure 201 Group – Identity/Device Profile Custom Tag Modify .......................................................... 245
Figure 202 Group – Configure Device Custom Tags (Delete) ............................................................. 246
Figure 203 Group – Device Configuration Modify................................................................................. 247
Figure 204 Group – Device Management Event Queues – In Progress/Pending .............................. 248
Figure 205 Group – Device Management Event Queues – Completed .............................................. 249
Figure 206 Group – Extension Dialing .................................................................................................. 250
Figure 207 Utilities – Intercept Group .................................................................................................... 251
Figure 208 Group – LDAP Directory ..................................................................................................... 253
Figure 209 Group – Verify Translation and Routing (Parameters) ...................................................... 255
Figure 210 Enterprise – Verify Translation and Routing (SIP Message)............................................. 256
Figure 211 Group – Voice Portal Branding ........................................................................................... 257

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 16 OF 314
 Figure 212 Group – Profile Menu .......................................................................................................... 260
Figure 213 Group – Group Services Menu ........................................................................................... 261
Figure 214 Group – Utilities Menu ......................................................................................................... 263

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 17 OF 314
 INTRODUCTION

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 18 OF 314
 1 Summary of Changes

This section describes the changes to this document for each release and document
version.

1.1 Changes for Release 21.0, Document Version 2

This version of the document includes editorial changes.

1.2 Changes for Release 21.0, Document Version 1

This version of the document includes the following changes:
 Updated section 12.5 Feature Access Codes for the Support for Number Portability
Feature Description (EV 193116), Disabling of Feature Access Codes Feature
Description (EV 173606), and the BroadWorks Mobility Persona Management
Feature Description (EVs 203930).
 Added allowed values for most settings and revised indexing.
 Updated sections [Link] Files Tab (Managed Devices) and 12.11.2 Modify
Configuration of Configurable Devices for the DM General Usability Enhancements
Feature Description (EV 210524).
 Updated section 4.5 Announcement Repository for the Retrieving Custom Media Files
Feature Description (EV 178326).
 Added section 6.10 Advice Of Charge for the AoC Tariff Information from OCS
Support (EV 194162).
 Added section 6.15 MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint for the Customized Message
Waiting Indication for Mobile Handset Feature Description (EV 179793).
 Added section 5.8 Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges and updated section 6.13.3
Assigned Users for the Enterprise Trunk Enhancements Feature Description
(EVs 198534, 220706, and 221238).
 Updated section 12 Utilities Menu and added section 12.2 BroadWorks Anywhere
Number Lookup for the Query Find-Me Follow-Me Numbers Feature Description
(EV 194287).
 Updated sections [Link] Users Tab (All Devices) and [Link].1 Change Order of
Line/Ports for the Support for SIP Instance Tag to Identify Device Feature Description
(EV 227867).
 Updated sections [Link].1 Add Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing,
[Link].2 Add Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing, [Link] Configure Capacity
Management and Assign Trunk Groups, and 6.13.4 Modify Enterprise Trunk for the
Enterprise Trunk and Trunk Group Capacity Management Enhancements Feature
Description (EV 231974).

1.3 Changes for Release 20.0, Document Version 1

This version of the document includes the following changes:
 Updated section 4.4.4 Set or Modify Policies for Group Administrator for the
Hierarchical Communication Barring Enhancements Feature Description
(EV 156691).

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 19 OF 314
  Updated section 12.5 Feature Access Codes for the Executive and Assistant Services
Feature Description (EV 160554) and Call Recording - Start/Stop/Pause/Resume
User Control Feature Description (EV 170972).
 Updated sections 12 Utilities Menu and 4.4.4 Set or Modify Policies for Group
Administrator for the Application Server VTR Enhancement for Web Triggers Feature
Description (EV 176191).
 Updated section 6.20 Session Admission Control Group for the Access Link Counting
Enhancements Feature Description (EV 166936).
 Updated section 4.8 Call Processing Policies for the Internal Call CLID Policy Feature
Description (EV 178401).
 Added section 6.3 Integrated IM&P for the Support Group Domain for Integrated
Instant Messaging and Presence Feature Description (EV 192516).
 Added section 12.12 Device Management Event Queues and updated section
[Link] Manage Configurable Device Files for the Device Management Rebuild /
Reset Queue Enhancements Feature Description (EV 173602).
 Moved the BroadWorks Anywhere section to the BroadWorks Application Server
Group Web Interface Administration Guide – Part 2.
 Updated section 6.9 Voice Portal for the Call Processing Control Enhancements
Feature Description (EV 178322).
 Added sections 5.19 IMRNs, 5.20 Mobile Subscriber Directory Numbers, and 6.11
BroadWorks Mobility for the Mobility Service Enhancement Feature Description
(EV 181182).
 Updated section 12.5 Feature Access Codes for the Flexible Seating Feature
Description (EV 114601) and Hunt Group Call Busy Feature Description (EV 173577).
 Added section 4.5 Announcement Repository and updated sections 6.12.1 Configure
Custom Ringback Group, 6.5 Music/Video On Hold, 6.6 Pre-alerting Announcement,
and 12.17 Voice Portal Branding for the Announcement Repository Feature
Description (EV 179248).
 Updated section 5.5.3 Modify Identity/Device Profile for the Device Management
Extended File Capture Mode Feature Description (178321).

1.4 Changes for Release 19.0, Document Version 2

This version of the document includes the following change:
 Corrected section numbering.

1.5 Changes for Release 19.0, Document Version 1

This version of the document includes the following changes:
 Modified section 12.5 Feature Access Codes for the Find-me/Follow-me Service
Feature Description (EV 125258) and the Hunt Group Call Busy Feature Description
(EV 146324).
 Updated section 4.8 Call Processing Policies for the Unicode Character Support
for Calling Line ID Feature Description (EV 118760).
 Added section 6.14 Group Night Forwarding for the Group Night Forwarding Service
Feature Description (EV 155570).
 Added section 6.7 Exchange Integration for the Calendar Presence Integration
Feature Description (EV 142625).

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 20 OF 314
  Updated section 5.5.3 Modify Identity/Device Profile for the Device Management
LinePort Ordering Enhancement Feature Description (EV 152312) and User Agent
Header Enhancements Feature Description (EVs 151841, 149943).
 Updated section 12.10 Passcode Rules for the Voice Portal Passcode Security Rule
Enhancements Feature Description (EV 46840).
 Updated section 4.7 Schedules for the Schedule User Interface Improvements
Feature Description (EV 158330) and for EV 180937.
 Updated section 6.5 Music/Video On Hold for the Device Management LinePort
Ordering Enhancement Feature Description (EV 152312).
 Updated section 5.13 Trunking Call Capacity for the Business Trunking License
Utilization Reports Feature Description (EV 160255).
 Corrected the capitalization of "voice portal".
 Updated section [Link] Users Tab (All Devices) for EV 179998.
 Updated section 5.13.1 View Trunking Call Capacity for EV 180387.

1.6 Changes for Release 18.0, Document Version 1

This version of the document includes the following changes:
 Added section 5.3 Group Paging Targets Capacity for the Group Paging Feature
Description (EV 92408).
 Updated section 12.5 Feature Access Codes for the Interrogation FACs for
CW/SCR/ACR/CLIR/COLR Feature Description (EV 97685) and Call Recording
Interface Feature Description (EV 46941).
 Added section 9 Call Center Menu for the Call Center Reporting Feature Description
(EV 98107).
 Added section 4.12 Dialable Caller ID and updated sections 4.8 Call Processing
Policies and 4.4.4 Set or Modify Policies for Group Administrator for the Dialable
Caller ID Feature Description (EV 100929).
 Modified section 4.7 Schedules for the Service Provider Schedules Feature
Description (EV 108949).
 Updated section 10 Calling Plan Menu for the Outgoing Calling Plan Dial Restriction
Override Patterns Feature Description (EV 115681) and Call Me Now Feature
Description (EV 97691).
 Updated section 6.5 Music/Video On Hold for the G.722 Codec Support Feature
Description (EV 116829).
 Added section 5.4 Identity/Device Endpoints for the Search Endpoints at Higher
Levels Feature Description (EV 113345).
 Updated section 12.5 Feature Access Codes and added section 5.2 Call Recording
Platform for the Call Recording Interface Feature Description (EV 46941).
 Updated sections 5.7.2 List Assigned Users, 5.10.1 List Assigned Numbers, 6.13.3
Assigned Users, 12.6 Group Directory, and 12.7 Enterprise Directory for the Search
by Extension and User ID Feature Description (EV 57599).
 Added section 11 Meet-Me Conferencing for the Meet-Me Conferencing, Part 1
Feature Description (EV 110764) and Meet-Me Conference Delegates and DTMF
Support Feature Description (EV 142877).

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 21 OF 314
  Updated section 6.9 Voice Portal for the System-wide Voice Portal Support Without
Provisioning Impact on IMS Core Feature Description (EV 130578).
 Updated section 5 Resources Menu and added section 5.15 Activate Numbers for the
Telephone Number Activation Feature Description (EV 107932).
 Updated sections 4.6 Departments and 4.8 Call Processing Policies for the
Department Calling Line ID Override Feature Description (EV 126077).
 Removed references to the Instant Conferencing service and replaced it with
references to the Meet-Me Conferencing service where applicable.
 Updated document for EV 155935.
 Updated section 6.9.1 Configure Voice Portal for EV 156444.
 Updated section 12.5.1 List, Add, Modify, or Delete Feature Access Codes or Speed
Dial 100 Prefix for EV 156542.

1.7 Changes for Release 17.0, Document Version 2

This version of the document includes the following changes:
 Updated section [Link] Manage Configurable Device Files for EV 112223.

1.8 Changes for Release 17.0, Document Version 1

This version of the document includes the following changes:
 Updated section 12.5 Feature Access Codes for the Call Center Enhancements,
Voice Mail Retrieval FAC, Communication Barring User-Control, Legacy Automatic
Callback Service (EV 98945), Call Center Barge-in Enhancements (EV 98104), and
Directed MSN Support Feature Descriptions.
 Updated section 12.14 Intercept Group for the Intercept Enhancements Feature
Description.
 Added sections 5.14 Session Admission Control Capacity and 6.20 Session
Admission Control Group and modified section 4.4.4 Set or Modify Policies for Group
Administrator for the Session Admission Control Feature Description.
 Updated sections [Link] Manage Configurable Device Files and [Link] Files Tab
for the Device Management Usability Enhancements Feature Description.
 Updated section 4.8 Call Processing Policies for the Calling Name and Number
Delivery Split Feature Description.
 Updated section 4.4.4 Set or Modify Policies for Group Administrator and 4.2.1 Modify
Group Profile for the Calling Line ID Security Feature Description.
 Updated section 12.13 Extension Dialing, 6.9.1 Configure Voice Portal, 12.6 Group
Directory, and 12.7 Enterprise Directory for the Variable Length and Longer Extension
Support Feature Description (EV 95518).
 Added section 4.11 Virtual On-Net Enterprise Extensions and modified section 12.4
Custom Contact Directories for the Enterprise Virtual On-Net Destinations Feature
Description (EV 95519).
 Deleted sections on Time Schedule and Holiday Schedule and replaced them with
section 4.7 Schedule for the Schedule Recurrence Support Feature Description
(EV 99280).

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 22 OF 314
  Added section 5.9 Office Zones and updated section 4.4.4 Set or Modify Policies for
Group Administrator for the Location-based Calling Restrictions Feature Description
(EV 101360).
 Added section 6.6 Pre-alerting Announcement for the Pre-alerting Announcement
Feature Description (EV 99279).
 Updated section 4.10 Dian Plan Policy for the E.164 Number Format Support for
Callback Services Feature Description (EV 96509).
 Added section 5.11 Route Point External Systems for the Network CTI Integration
Feature Description (EV 87520).
 Updated section 6.8 Voice Messaging for EV 105948.
 Updated section 12.8.1 Generate Inventory Report for Group for EV 107334.
 Updated section 12.14 Intercept Group for EV 109939.
 Updated sections 4.11 Virtual On-Net Enterprise Extensions and 12.4 Custom
Contact Directories for EV 110253.

1.9 Changes for Release 16.0, Document Version 1

This version of the document includes the following changes:
 Made minor change to section 4.4.4 Set or Modify Policies for Group Administrator for
EV 88656.
 Added section 4.8 Call Processing Policies, modified section 4.2.1 Modify Group
Profile, and deleted the Calling Line ID section for the Calling Line Identity
Enhancements Feature Description.
 Added several Feature Access Codes in section 12.5 Feature Access Codes for the
Advice of Charge Feature Description, the Interrogation FAC Feature Description, the
Selective Call Forwarding Enhancement Feature Description, the SIP Bridged Lines
Feature Description, and the Call Return to Playback Number Feature Description.
 Modified section 12.11.2 Modify Configuration of Configurable Devices for the Device
Management TRTP Support Feature Description.
 Added section 6.13 Enterprise Trunk for the Enterprise Trunking Feature Description.
 Modified section 5 Resources Menu and added sections 4.9 Communication Barring
Authorization Codes and 5.7 Network Classes of Service for the Communication
Barring Fixed Feature Description.
 Added section 6.16 Polycom Phone Services to match the interface.
 Removed the Utilities → Digit Map, since it is no longer in the interface (moved to
Profile → Dial Plan Policy).
 Updated for EVs 98713 and 98696.

1.10 Changes for Release 15.0, Document Version 3

This version of the document includes the following changes:
 Updated section 12.8.1 Generate Inventory Report for Group for EV 69617.
Document was not listed in the EV, but the help page was changed and this
document reflects the same changes.
 Updated section 10.7.1 View and Configure Outgoing Calling Plan for Group and
Departments for EV 61621.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 23 OF 314
 1.11 Changes for Release 15.0, Document Version 2
This version of the document includes the following changes:
 Updated section 12.5.1 List, Add, Modify, or Delete Feature Access Codes or Speed
Dial 100 Prefix for EV 67093.
 Updated section [Link] General Settings and section [Link] Internal Calls Settings
for EV 68745.

1.12 Changes for Release 15.0, Document Version 1

This version of the document includes the following changes:
 Updated sections 5.5.2 Add Identity/Device Profile and 5.5.3 Modify Identity/Device
Profile for EV 67117.
 Updated sections 12.5.1 List, Add, Modify, or Delete Feature Access Codes or Speed
Dial 100 Prefix for EV 67093.
 Updated section 12.5.1 List, Add, Modify, or Delete Feature Access Codes or Speed
Dial 100 Prefix with new feature access code (FAC) for the Automatic Callback
Enhancement Feature Description.

1.13 Changes for Releases 14.sp1 through 14.sp6, Document Version 6

This version of the document includes the changes for Releases 14.sp1 through 14.sp6.
Release 14.sp6
 Updated section 12.5.1 List, Add, Modify, or Delete Feature Access Codes or Speed
Dial 100 Prefix with new FAC for the Anonymous Call Rejection Feature Access
Codes Feature Description.
 Added section 4.8 Call Processing Policies for the Dial Plan Policy Feature
Description.
 Modified section 6.5 Music/Video On Hold for the Internal External Music On Hold
Feature Description. There are now two tabs for this service, General Settings and
Internal Settings.
 Removed information related to the Client Management System (CMS).
Release 14.sp5
There was no impact.
Release 14.sp4
 Added a new FAC, #14, BroadWorks Anywhere E.164 Dialing to section 12.5.1 List,
Add, Modify, or Delete Feature Access Codes or Speed Dial 100 Prefix from the
BroadWorks Anywhere Feature Description. Added a new section for this Feature
Description.
 Added the Busy Camp on option to the following sections, 6.5.2 Add Music/Video On
Hold Settings for Department and 6.5.4 Delete Music/Video On Hold Settings for
Department, for the Busy Camp On Feature Description.
 Added a section for the Custom Contact Directories Feature Description, 12.4 Custom
Contact Directories.
 Updated section 12.5.1 List, Add, Modify, or Delete Feature Access Codes or Speed
Dial 100 Prefix with a new FAC for the Group Call Park Feature Description.
 Updated section 10.3 Digit Strings for the Service Code Support Feature Description.
Information about the wildcard * was added.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 24 OF 314
 Release 14.sp3
 Updated section 12.5.1 List, Add, Modify, or Delete Feature Access Codes or Speed
Dial 100 Prefix, giving the user the choice to use the group or service provider level
FACs for the Residential Scalability Enhancements Feature Description.
 Modified document for the Connected Line Identity Feature Description.
The page was modified to indicate that configuration for the group calling line ID and
name also applies to the Group Connected Line Identification and name.
 Updated sections 5.10.1 List Assigned Numbers and 6.9.1 Configure Voice Portal for
the Telephone Number Inventory Feature Description. The list of numbers has a new
column indicating whether numbers are activated.
 Updated section 12.10.1 List or Set Passcode Rules for Users for the Voice Portal
Security Enhancements Feature Description. New security enhancements were
introduced for setting passcode rules.
Release 14.sp2
 Added two new FACs to section 12.5.1 List, Add, Modify, or Delete Feature Access
Codes or Speed Dial 100 Prefix for the Call Forwarding Not Reachable Feature
Description, *94 Call Forwarding Not Reachable Activation and *95 Call Forwarding
Not Reachable Deactivation.
 Added three new FACs to section 12.5.1 List, Add, Modify, or Delete Feature Access
Codes or Speed Dial 100 Prefix, *11 Call Retrieve, *12 Location Control Activation,
and *13 Location Control Deactivation for the Shared Call Appearance Enhancements
Feature Description.
Release 14.sp1
 Modified sections 5.13.1 View Trunking Call Capacity and 4.4.4 Set or Modify Policies
for Group Administrator for the Business Trunking Enhancements Feature
Description. This allows administrators to configure a maximum number of allocated
bursting calls to their group.
 Added a feature to allow administrators to configure Trunk Group access.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 25 OF 314
 2 About This Guide

The BroadWorks Application Server Group Web Interface Administration Guide Part 1 is
designed to assist group and department administrators with management of all
BroadWorks group and department administration functions. Detailed instructions for
each function and page of the BroadWorks system can be found both in the guide and in
the online help, which is available using the Help link on each web page.

NOTE: For information about management of all BroadWorks user administration functions, see
the BroadWorks Application Server Group Web Interface Administration Guide – Part 2.

This guide assumes administrators are familiar with the procedures in the BroadWorks
Getting Started Web Interface Administration Guide.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 26 OF 314
 3 Group Administrator Tasks and Responsibilities

A group administrator, using the web interface, performs these group and department
tasks:
 Add, modify, or delete group administrators, department administrators, and
schedules (holiday and time)
 Assign and configure group resources
 Assign service packs, group services, and user services
 Configure group services
 Control use of service scripts
 Control account and authorization codes
 Modify calling plans
 Manage utilities such as the Common Phone List and Feature Access Codes
 Perform advanced administrative functions

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 27 OF 314
 GROUP ADMINISTRATION

This section contains the following chapters:

 Profile Menu
 Resources Menu
 Services Menu
 Service Scripts Menu
 Account/Authorization Codes Menu
 Call Center Menu
 Calling Plan Menu
 Meet-Me Conferencing
 Utilities Menu

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 28 OF 314
 4 Profile Menu

This chapter contains sections that correspond to each item on the Group – Profile menu
page. This menu page is the Home page for group administrators and it appears when
you log in. To return to this page at any time, click Home.

Figure 1 Group – Profile Menu

The Group – Profile menu contains group and user profile related items. This guide
describes the group and department items.

NOTE: For information about management of all BroadWorks user administration functions
provided by the Users menu item, see the BroadWorks Application Server Group Web Interface
Administration Guide – Part 2.

 Basic menu
This menu displays the items that all group administrators can use.
− Profile
− Change Password
− Administrators
− Announcement Repository
− Departments
− Schedules
 Advanced menu
This menu displays the items that group administrators can use only if such functions
have been assigned to them.
− Call Processing Policies
− Communication Barring Authorization Codes
APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00
©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 29 OF 314
 − Dian Plan Policy
− Virtual On-Net Enterprise Extensions
− Dialable Caller ID

4.1 Access Group – Profile Menu

Use the Group – Profile menu to modify the profile of the group, add and modify
administrators and departments in the group, add and modify schedules (Holiday and
Time), and change your password.
On your Home page, in the Options list, click Profile. The Group – Profile menu page
appears.

Figure 2 Group – Profile Menu

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 30 OF 314
 4.2 Profile
Use this item from the Group – Profile page to modify the group profile.

4.2.1 Modify Group Profile

Use the Group – Profile page to modify the group profile, for example, the contact for the
group.

Figure 3 Group – Profile

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Profile. The Group – Profile page appears.
2) Type new information or select a different value from a drop-down list. An asterisk (*)
indicates required data.
This table provides the input boxes and the data required for each box. To move from
one box to another, use the TAB key or click in the next box.

Setting Name Allowed Values Description Example

Service Provider (Read-only) The ID of the service provider for AWSTel

this group (enterprise or company).

Group (Read-only) The ID of the group. ABC Distributing

Default Domain The drop-down box The domain name. [Link]

lists all domains
available for the
group.

Group Name 1 through 80 The legal company name. Do not ABC Distributing
characters. use backslashes or double Inc.
quotation marks.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 31 OF 314
 Setting Name Allowed Values Description Example

Calling Line ID 1 through 80 The name that will appear on ABC Distributing
Group Name characters. Cannot telephone sets with caller ID if the
contain %, +, user’s Calling Line Identity policy is
backslash, double configured to display the group’s
quotes, or extended name for calling line identity
ASCII characters. instead of the user’s name.

Calling Line ID The drop-down list The phone number that will appear 2404441901
Group Number contains the allowed on telephone sets with caller ID if
values. the user’s Calling Line Identity
(Read-only for policy is configured to display the
administrators with group’s phone number for calling
read-only access to line identity instead of the user’s
calling line ID number.
numbers.)

Contact Name 1 through 30 The primary contact for the Joe Smith
characters. company, first and last name.

Contact Phone 1 through 30 The phone number of the contact 5551000

characters. as you would dial it. Do not use OR
spaces or dashes. +13014441234

Contact E-mail 1 through 80 The e-mail address of the contact joe@abcompany.

characters in for the group. com
user@domain
format. Can contain
only one @ symbol,
letters, digits, and
the following
characters: !, #, $,
%, &, *, +, -, /, =, _, {,
}, |, ~, `, ., ?, ^, or
single quotes.

Time Zone * The drop-down list The time zone. (GMT-05:00)

contains the allowed (US) Eastern
values. Standard Time

User limits

Maximum (Read-only) The maximum number of users 20

number of users allowed in this group.

Current number (Read-only) The current number of users in the 5

of users group.

Additional Information

Address (Read-only) The street address of the group. 123 Main Street

City (Read-only) The city name. Gaithersburg

State/Province (Read-only) The state or province. MD

Zip/Postal Code (Read-only) The zip or postal code. 20877

Country (Read-only) The country of the group or United States

company.

3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 32 OF 314
 4.3 Change Password
Use this menu item on the Group – Profile menu page to change your password.

NOTE: The system can be configured to allow user authentication to be performed by an

external server. When external authentication is active, this menu item does not appear on this
page.

4.3.1 Change Your Password

Use the Group – Change Password page to change your password.

Figure 4 Group – Change Password

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Change Password. The Group – Change
Password page appears.
2) Type the information for your current and new password. Required data is indicated
with an asterisk (*). Follow the password rules defined for your group.
3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 33 OF 314
 4.4 Administrators
Use this item on the Group – Profile menu page to:
 List Administrators
 Add Administrators
 Modify or Delete Administrator
 Set or Modify Policies for Group Administrator

4.4.1 List Administrators

Use the Group – Administrators page to list all the administrators (group and department)
in the group. On this page, you can search for an administrator. From this page, you can
add an administrator or select an administrator to be modified or deleted, change an
administrator password, or assign services to or unassign services from an administrator.

NOTE: The system can be configured to allow user authentication to be performed by an

external server. When external activation is on, and you are not allowed to add administrators,
no Add button appears on this page.

Figure 5 Group – Administrators

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Administrators. The Group –

Administrators page appears.
This page is a list page. Depending on the number of pages of data in a list, list
pages allow you to search several different ways. You can click the heading of a
column to change the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the
data to specify search criteria, or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous.
For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started
Web Interface Administration Guide.
2) To display the previous page, click OK or Cancel.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 34 OF 314
 4.4.2 Add Administrators
Use the Group – Administrators Add page to add an administrator for the group.

NOTE: The system can be configured to allow user authentication to be performed by an

external server. When external activation is on, no password fields appear on this page.

Figure 6 Group – Administrators Add

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Administrators. The Group –

Administrators page appears.
2) Click Add. The Group – Administrators Add page appears.
3) Type or select information for the administrator. Required data is indicated with an
asterisk (*).
Following is a table of the text boxes and the input necessary for each. To move
between text boxes, use the TAB key on the keyboard, or click in the next text box.
Setting Name Allowed Values Description Example

Administrator Must be in user@domain The unique ID of the abcadmin@abc

ID * format. The user part must administrator. [Link]
be from 6 through 80
characters and can only
contain letters, digits, single
quotes, periods, semicolons,
or the following symbols: #,
$, %, &, +, -, /, =, ?, |, _ ,~, !,
`, ^, {, }.
The drop-down box lists the
domains available for your
group.

First Name 1 through 30 characters The first name for the service Joe
provider administrator.

Last Name 1 through 30 characters The last name for the service Smith
provider administrator.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 35 OF 314
 Setting Name Allowed Values Description Example

Reset 1 through 60 characters. The new password for the *******

Password Must follow the password group administrator. For
rules set for your security, asterisks appear on
organization. the page instead of the
characters typed.

Re-type new Same as Reset Password. The new password repeated. *******
password For security, asterisks appear
on the page instead of the
characters typed.

Language * The drop-down list displays The language the web English
all languages configured for interface displays for this
your system. administrator and the language
in which the system plays
announcements and
treatments for calls for this
administrator. The default is
English (U.S. English) unless
configured otherwise.

Administrator Group, Department If your group is part of an

Type (Read-only for service enterprise, and you choose to
provider groups) limit the scope of this
administrator to a single
department, you may only
select a department that exists
within your group. Enterprise-
level departments created by
your enterprise administrator
are not available.

4) Save your changes. Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous
page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 36 OF 314
 4.4.3 Modify or Delete Administrator
Use the Group – Administrators Modify page to delete an administrator, reset an
administrator’s password, or modify the name and language of an administrator. From
this page, you can set the group policies for a group administrator.

NOTE: The system can be configured to allow user authentication to be performed by an

external server. When external activation is on, no password fields appear on this page.

Figure 7 Group – Administrators Modify

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Administrators. The Group –

Administrators page appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the administrator. The Group – Administrators
Modify page appears.
3) To delete the administrator, click Delete. The previous page appears.
4) To edit information for the administrator, type or select information for the
administrator. For information on the settings available on this page, see section 4.4.2
Add Administrators.

NOTE: For a change to the Language control to be effective within the web interface, the
administrator must log out and then log in again. For voice prompts during calls, the change is
effective on the next call to or from the user.

5) Configure the administrator policies:

To configure the Group Administrator policies, click the Set Group Administrator
Policies link and go to section 4.4.4 Set or Modify Policies for Group Administrator.
6) Save your changes. Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous
page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.
APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00
©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 37 OF 314
 4.4.4 Set or Modify Policies for Group Administrator
Use the Group Administrator Policies page to configure policies for a group administrator.
Policies control the access of a group administrator to group, department, and user
functions of the web interface.
You can set the following access policy values:
 Full Access: Read-write access to a page or group of functions.
 Read-Only Access: Display-only access to a page or group of functions.
 Restricted: Either Read-Only access to a page or no access to a page or group of
functions.
 No Access: No access to one function or a group of functions, for example, user
functions.

NOTE: You cannot set access policies that have a higher level of access than you do. You
cannot change existing access policies of an administrator if those are at a higher level than
yours are. Buttons for such access policies are disabled.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 38 OF 314
 Figure 8 Group (Enterprise) – Group Administrator Policies

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 39 OF 314
 1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Administrators. The Group –
Administrators page appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the group administrator. The Group –
Administrators Modify page appears.
3) Click Set Group Administrator Policies. Data on the Group – Administrators Modify
page are saved and the Group Administrator Policies page appears.
4) Select the type of access for each policy.
The following table lists the policies for which you can set the access type and the
corresponding access types to choose from.
Policy Description

Group Profile Permission to view and modify information on the Group – Profile page.
Access  Full Access to modify group’s profile allows the administrator to modify
information on the Group – Profile page.
 Read-only Access to group’s profile allows the administrator to view but not
modify group profile information.
 No Access to group’s profile prevents the administrator from accessing the Group
– Profile page. The Profile menu item is removed from the Group – Profile page.

User Access Access to tasks for adding, modifying, and removing users and displaying the
User Profile pages (Full, Restricted, Restricted (Read-only access), Restricted
(No access), No Access).

Administrator Click the button for the access you want for adding, modifying, and removing
Access administrators (group and department) – (Full, Read-only, No Access).

Department Click the button for the access you want for adding, modifying, and removing
Access departments and displaying the list of departments (Full, Read-only, No
Access).
NOTE: Only those with Full Access can assign numbers to departments.

Device Access Access to administrative tasks related to Device Management, such as adding
or modifying devices and associating them with user accounts.
 Full Access to devices allows the administrator to add, modify, and delete
devices, and to associate devices with user accounts.
 Read-only Access to devices; may associate users to existing devices blocks the
administrator from creating, modifying, and deleting devices, but allows the
administrator to view device information and associate devices with user
accounts.
 Read-only Access to devices and user associations allows the administrator to
view but not modify information about devices and their association with user
accounts.

Enhanced Access to tasks for adding, deleting, and modifying enhanced service
Services Instance instances.
Access Examples of enhanced service instances are Auto Attendants, call capacity
groups, Meet-Me conference bridges, hunt groups, call centers, series
completion groups, and department Music/Video On Hold.
 Full Access to add enhanced services allows the administrator to add, delete,
and modify enhanced service instances.
 Restricted from adding or removing enhanced services instances; may modify
existing ones prevents the administrator from adding or deleting enhanced
service instances.

Feature Access Access to administrative tasks for managing feature access codes settings for
Code Access the group.
 Full Access to feature access codes allows the administrator to modify feature
access code settings for their group.
 Read-only Access to feature access codes allows the administrator to consult but
not modify feature access code settings.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 40 OF 314
 Policy Description

Phone Access to tasks for assigning phone numbers and extensions.

Number/Extension NOTE: The Phone Number/Extension Access controls the phone number and
Access extension assignment at the same time.
 Full Access to phone numbers/extensions allows the administrator to configure
phone numbers and extensions for users, virtual users (for example, Auto
Attendants, hunt groups, call centers).
 Read-only Access to phone numbers/extensions allows the administrator to
consult but not modify phone numbers and extensions.

Calling Line ID Access to administrative tasks for configuring calling line ID phone number:
Number Access  Full Access to calling line ID number allows the administrator to view and
configure the calling line ID number for the group and its users.
 Read-only Access to calling line ID number allows the administrator to consult but
not configure the calling line ID number for the group and its users.

Service Access Permission to assign services to the group and users in the group.
 Full Access to assigning resources to the group or users allows the administrator
to assign services to the group and to the users in their group.
 Read-only Access to service assignments hides the assignment menu items on
the Group – Resources menu page (Assign Group Services, New User Services
Template, and Existing User Services) and the Assign Services menu item on
the User – Profile menu page, preventing the administrator from assigning
services to the group and users and from modifying the new user services
template.

Trunk Group Access to trunk group configuration:

Access  Full Access to add/modify/delete trunk groups
 Restricted from adding or removing trunk groups; full access to trunk group
resources
 Restricted from adding or removing trunk groups; read-only access to trunk group
resources.
 No Access to trunk groups

Session Access to session capacity settings:

Admission Control  Full Access to group session admission control allows the administrator to create,
Access modify, and delete session admission control (SAC) groups for their group and
provides them with read-only access to the group’s session capacity settings
assigned to the group by the service provider/enterprise administrator.
 Read-only Access to group session admission control allows the administrator to
view but not change session capacity and SAC group settings.
 No Access to group session admission control gives the administrator no access
to session admission control functionality, and the Resources – Session
Admission Control and Services – Session Admission Control Group menu items
do not appear on the administrator’s menu.

Office Zone Access to viewing and configuring office zones for the users:
Access  Full Access to user office zone control
 Read-only Access to user office zone control

Number Activation Access to activating phone numbers:

Access  Full access to number activation
 Read-only access to number activation
 No access to number activation

Dialable Caller ID Access to tasks for configuring dialable caller ID settings for the group
Access (Full, Read-only, No Access).

Verify Translation Access to creating and running test calls to gather information about translation,
and Routing routing, and services for calls:
Access  Full access to Verify Translation and Routing
 No access to Verify Translation and Routing

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 41 OF 314
 Policy Description

Communication Access to assigning communication barring profiles to users:

Barring Access  Full access to assign communication barring profiles to users
 No access to communication barring profiles
This policy applies only to enterprise groups.

5) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

4.5 Announcement Repository

Your group's Announcement Repository is a repository for all your group-level custom
announcements that you can use in your group services and allows you to add, modify,
and delete announcements. It provides the following capabilities:
 The ability to share a single announcement among multiple services.
 The ability to modify an announcement while it is being used by services.
 The ability to keep an announcement on the system without it being used by a
service.
Use this item on the Group – Profile menu page to perform the following operations on
your group's Announcement Repository:
 List Announcements
 Add Announcements
 Modify Announcements
 Delete Announcements

4.5.1 List Announcements

Use the Group – Announcement Repository page to list the announcements configured for
your group.
This page is a list page. Depending on the number of pages of data in a list, list pages
allow you to search several different ways. You can click the heading of a column to
change the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the data to specify
search criteria, or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous. For more
information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web Interface
Administration Guide.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 42 OF 314
 Figure 9 Group – Announcement Repository

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Announcement Repository. The Group –
Announcement Repository page appears. The Audio tab is displayed by default.
2) To view the video announcements, click Video.
3) To display specific announcements, select your search criteria and click Search. Or,
to view all audio or video announcements, click Search without entering any criteria.
Announcements are listed with their size and media type.
4) To download an announcement, click the download link in the row of the
announcement. You can then save the announcement on your local computer.
5) To display the previous page, click OK or Cancel.

4.5.2 Add Announcements

Use the Group – Announcement Repository Add page to add an audio or video
announcement for the group. After you add an announcement, you can associate it with
group services. An announcement can be associated with more than one service.

Figure 10 Group – Announcement Repository Add

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Announcement Repository. The Group –
Announcement Repository page appears.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 43 OF 314
 2) Click Add. The Group – Announcement Repository Add page appears.
3) Type the name of the audio or video announcement. The name can be from 1
through 80 characters.
4) To upload an announcement file, type the path and file name of an audio or video file
with your announcement in the Upload Announcement File text box or click Browse
to select a file on your computer.
5) To save your changes and display the previous page, click OK.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

4.5.3 Modify Announcements

Use the Group – Announcement Repository Modify page to modify an audio or video
announcement for the group.

Figure 11 Group – Announcement Repository Modify

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Announcement Repository. The Group –
Announcement Repository page appears.
2) To modify a video announcement, click the Video tab.
3) Click Edit in the row of announcement to modify. The Group – Announcement
Repository Modify page appears.
4) Modify the announcement as required. For information on the fields available on this
page, see section 4.5.2 Add Announcements.
5) To download the announcement, click the Download link. You can then save the
announcement on your local computer.
6) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and returns
to the previous page.
To exit without changing, click Cancel or select another page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 44 OF 314
 4.5.4 Delete Announcements
Use the Group – Announcement Repository page to delete some announcements from
your group's Announcement Repository.

Figure 12 Group – Announcement Repository

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Announcement Repository. The Group –
Announcement Repository page appears.
2) To display video announcements, click Video.
3) Check the Delete box in the row of the announcement(s) to delete.

NOTE: You cannot delete an announcement that is associated with a service.

4) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and returns
to the previous page.
To exit without changing, click Cancel or select another page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 45 OF 314
 4.6 Departments
Use this item on the Group – Profile menu page to:
 List Departments
 Add Departments
 Modify or Delete Department

4.6.1 List Departments

Use the Group – Department page to list all the departments in the group. From this
page, you can add, modify, or delete a department.

Figure 13 Group – Departments

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Departments. The Group – Departments
page appears.
Departments are listed with their parent departments, if any. For example, the listing
for a department named Pre-Sales with the parent department Sales appears as
follows: Sales\Pre-Sales.
If your group is part of an enterprise, departments within your group are listed with
your group name in parentheses. For example, if your group is named DEF
Distributing, the listing for a department named Public Relations appears as follows:
Public Relations (DEF Distributing). This distinguishes departments created at your
group level from departments created at the enterprise level by your enterprise
administrator.
This page is a list page. Depending on the number of pages of data in a list, list
pages allow you to search several different ways. You can click the heading of a
column to change the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the
data to specify search criteria, or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous.
For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started
Web Interface Administration Guide.
2) To display the previous page, click OK or Cancel.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 46 OF 314
 4.6.2 Add Departments
Use the Group – Departments Add page to add a department for the group. After you
have added a department, you can assign users to the department. For more information
about adding users, see the BroadWorks Application Server Group Web Interface
Administration Guide – Part 2.

Figure 14 Group – Departments Add

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Departments. The Group – Departments
page appears.
2) Click Add. The Group – Departments Add page appears.
3) Type the name of the department. It can be from 1 through 50 characters.
4) Use the Parent Department drop-down list box to create the new department under
an existing department.
5) Enter the calling line ID name for the department. It can be from 1 through 80
characters and cannot contain %, +, backslash, double quotes, or extended ASCII
characters.
6) From the Department Calling Line ID Number drop-down list, select the phone
number for the department.
7) To save your changes and display the previous page, click OK.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 47 OF 314
 4.6.3 Modify or Delete Department
Use the Group – Departments Modify page to modify or delete a department.

Figure 15 Group – Departments Modify

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Departments. The Group – Departments
page appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the department. The Group – Departments
Modify page appears.
3) To delete the department, click Delete. The previous page appears.

NOTE 1: You cannot delete a department that has users assigned to it. Before you delete a
department, modify the profile of all users within that department to assign them to a different
department or to no department.

NOTE 2: You cannot delete a department that has any sub-departments under it. Before you
delete a department, either assign each of its sub-departments a new parent or no parent, or
delete all of its sub-departments.

4) Modify information as required. For information about the fields on this page, see
section 4.6.2 Add Departments.
5) To save your changes and display the previous page, click OK.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 48 OF 314
 4.7 Schedules
The Schedules configuration option allows you to create schedules for your group.
Schedules are used to configure the business hours for Auto Attendants and can be
applied to services such as BroadWorks Anywhere, Call Notify, Custom Ringback, or Call
Forwarding. A schedule can be one of two types: Holiday or Time. If your group is part of
an enterprise, you can also view and use but not modify enterprise schedules.
You create a schedule by first creating an empty schedule and then adding events to it to
specify when the schedule applies.

NOTE: An empty schedule, that is, a schedule with no events, is considered by the system as
always applicable.

Use the Schedule item on the Group – Profile menu page to:
 List and Delete Schedules
 View Schedule
 Add Schedule
 Add Event
 Modify Schedule

4.7.1 List and Delete Schedules

Use the Group – Schedules page to list all the schedules available for your group. If your
group is part of an enterprise, this list also includes enterprise schedules.
From this page, you can also access the pages to add, view, modify, or delete schedules.

Figure 16 Group (Enterprise) – Schedules

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Schedules. The Group – Schedules page
appears, listing the existing schedules for the group.
2) To delete a schedule, check the Delete box in the row of the schedule. Note that you
can only delete schedules defined at the group level.
3) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.
To cancel your changes and display the previous page, click Cancel.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 49 OF 314
 4.7.2 View Schedule
You use the Group – Schedule View or Group – Schedule Edit page to view the details of
a schedule.

Figure 17 Group – Schedule View

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Schedules. The Group – Schedules page
appears, listing the schedules available for the group.
2) Click View or Edit on the row of the schedule to view. The Group – Schedule
View/Edit page appears.
3) To view the details of an event, click View or Edit on the row for the event. The
Group – Event View/Edit page appears.

Figure 18 Group – Event View

4) Click OK.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 50 OF 314
 4.7.3 Add Schedule
Use the Group – Schedule Add page to add a schedule for your group.

Figure 19 Group – Schedule Add

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Schedule. The Group – Schedule page
appears.
2) Click Add. The Group – Schedule Add page appears.
3) In the Schedule Name text box, enter a name for the schedule. The name can be
from 1 through 40 characters.
4) For Schedule Type, select the type of schedule you want:
− To create a holiday schedule, check Holiday.
− To create a time schedule, check Time.
5) Click OK. This creates a schedule with no events. To complete the definition of the
schedule, follow the procedure in section 4.7.4 Add Event to add one or more events
to the schedule.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 51 OF 314
 4.7.4 Add Event
Use the Group – Event Add page to add an event to a schedule.

Figure 20 Group – Event Add

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Schedule. The Group – Schedule page
appears.
2) Click Edit in the row for the schedule to which you want to add and event. The Group
– Schedule Modify page appears.
3) Click Add. The Group – Event Add page appears.
4) In the Event Name text box, enter a name for the event. The name can be from 1
through 40 characters.
5) Configure the event time:
− In the Start Date box, select a date from the calendar.
− To make it an all day event, check the All Day Event box.

NOTE: When you check All Day Event, the Start Time and End Time options are disabled.

− If applicable, configure the start time. In the Start Time box, type a time (HH:MM,
0 < HH <= 12, 00 <= MM <= 59) and select AM or PM from the drop-down list.
− In the End Date box, select a day from the calendar.
− If applicable, configure the end time. In the End Time box, type a time (HH:MM,
0 < HH <= 12, 00 <= MM <= 59) and select AM or PM from the drop-down list.
6) Configure the recurrence pattern. From the Recurs drop-down list, select the type of
recurrence for the event from the following options:

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 52 OF 314
 − Daily and enter the frequency of occurrence in days (from 1 through 999).

Figure 21 Daily Recurrence Pattern

− Weekly and enter the frequency of occurrence in weeks (from 1 through 999) and
select the day or days of the week on which the event should occur.

Figure 22 Weekly Recurrence Pattern

− Monthly and enter the frequency of occurrence in months (from 1 through 999)
and specify the day on which the event should occur. Select one of the following
options:
− To schedule the event on a specific day of the month, for example the 25th,
check Day <X> of the month and enter the day from 1 through 31. If you
select 29, 30, or 31, the occurrence will fall on the last day of the month for
months that are shorter than 29, 30, or 31 days respectively.
− To schedule the event on a specific day of the week within the month, for
example the second Monday of the month, check The <Xth> <Day-of-Week>
of the month and select Xth and Day-of-Week from the drop-down lists.

Figure 23 Monthly Recurrence Pattern

− Yearly and specify the frequency of occurrence in years (from 1 through 99), for
example every two years, and specify the day on which the event should occur.
Select one of the following options:
− To schedule the event on a specific day of the year, check Day <X> of
<Month> and enter a valid day and select the month.
− To schedule the event on a specific day of the week and month, for example
the first Sunday of February, check The <Xth> <Day-of-Week> of <Month>
and select Xth, Day-of-Week, and Month from the drop-down lists.

Figure 24 Yearly Recurrence Pattern

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 53 OF 314
 7) If this is a recurring event, specify when the event should end. In the Recurrence
Range section, select one of the following options for End:
− Never
− After <X> occurrences, and enter the number of occurrences from 1 through 999.
− Date and select a date from the calendar or enter a date in the MM/DD/YYYY
format.

Figure 25 Recurrence Range

8) To save your changes click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous
page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

4.7.5 Modify Schedule

Use the Group – Schedule Modify page to modify a schedule. You cannot modify
schedules that were defined at the enterprise level.

Figure 26 Group – Schedule Modify

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Schedule. The Group – Schedule page
appears.
2) Click Edit in the row for the schedule you want to modify. The Group – Schedule
Modify page appears.
3) To change the schedule name, type the new name in the Schedule Name text box.
4) To delete an event, check the Delete box in the row of the event to delete and click
Apply.
5) To modify an event, click Edit in the row for the event you want to modify. The Group
– Event Modify page appears.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 54 OF 314
 Figure 27 Group – Event Modify

6) Modify the event as required. For information about the options available on this
page, see section 4.7.4 Add Event.
7) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and returns
to the previous page.
To exit without changing, click Cancel or select another page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 55 OF 314
 4.8 Call Processing Policies
You use this page to configure a group’s Call Processing Policies. The policies you
configure are related to the calling line ID. This allows you to override the Calling Line ID
policy configured at the service provider/enterprise level.

Figure 28 Group (Service Provider) – Call Processing Policies

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 56 OF 314
 Figure 29 Group (Enterprise) – Call Processing Policies

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Call Processing Policies under the
Advanced menu. The Group – Call Processing Policies page appears.
2) Select or enter information as described in the following table.
Field Description

Calling Line ID

Use Group Name for Calling Check this option to use group name for calling line identity. When
Line Identity checked, the group name appears instead of a user’s name on
telephone sets with caller ID.

Allow Department Name Check this option to allow the use of the department name instead of
Override the group calling line ID name for calling line identity. Note that this
option is only available when the Use group name for Calling Line
Identity option is checked.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 57 OF 314
 Field Description

Use Group Calling Line ID Specify whether the group or service provider/enterprise Calling Line
Policy ID policy should be used.
Use Service Provider Calling  Select Use Group Calling Line ID Policy to use the policy defined on
Line Id Policy/Use this page.
Enterprise Calling Line Id  For an enterprise group, select Use Enterprise Calling Line ID Policy to
Policy use the policy defined at the enterprise level.
 For a service provider group, select Use Service Provider Calling Line
ID Policy to use the policy defined at the service provider level.

External Calls: This option allows you to specify the Calling Line ID policy settings for
 Use user phone number external calls at the group level.
for Calling Line Identity  Select Use user phone number for Calling Line Identity to send the
 Use configurable CLID for user’s phone number as calling line ID for outgoing external calls.
Calling Line Identity  Select Use configurable CLID for Calling Line Identity to send the user’s
 Use group/department custom calling Line ID phone number for outgoing external calls. You
phone number for Calling need to define this number on the user’s Profile page.
Line Identity  Select Use group/department phone number for Calling Line Identity to
send the group or department phone number as calling line ID for
outgoing external calls. The department phone number is used if the
user belongs to a department that has a phone number assigned;
otherwise, the group phone number is used. This option is available
only if there is a group phone number configured (at the Group – Profile
level). The group number, if available, appears on this page.

Enterprise Calls: This option allows you to specify the Calling Line ID policy settings for
 Use extension enterprise calls at the group level.
 Use location code plus This option applies only to enterprise groups.
extension  Select Use extension to send the user's extension as calling line
 Use External Calls Policy identity.
 Select Use location code plus extension to send the group's location
code followed by the user's extension as calling line identity.
 Select Use External Calls Policy to use the setting configured on this
page for external calls.

Group Calls: This option allows you to specify the Calling Line ID policy settings for
 Use extension group calls at the group level.
 Use location code plus  Select Use extension to send the user's extension as calling line
extension identity.
 Use External Calls Policy  For an enterprise group, select Use location code plus extension to
send the group's location code followed by the user's extension as
calling line identity.
 Select Use External Calls Policy to use the setting configured on this
page for external calls.

Emergency Calls: This option allows you to specify the Calling Line ID policy settings for
 Use user phone number emergency calls at the group level.
for Calling Line Identity  Select Use user phone number for Calling Line Identity to send the
 Use configurable CLID for user’s phone number as calling line ID for outgoing emergency calls.
Calling Line Identity  Select Use configurable CLID for Calling Line Identity to send the user’s
 Use group/department custom calling Line ID phone number for outgoing emergency calls.
phone number for Calling You need to define this number on the user’s Profile page.
Line Identity  Select Use group/department phone number for Calling Line Identity to
send the group or department phone number as calling line ID for
outgoing emergency calls. The department phone number is used if
the user belongs to a department that has a phone number assigned;
otherwise, the group phone number is used. This option is available
only if there is a group phone number configured (at the Group – Profile
level). The group number, if available, appears on this page.

Block Calling Name for Select this option to block the user’s calling name when the user
External Calls makes a call to an external destination.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 58 OF 314
 Field Description

Calling Line ID Group This is a read-only field. It displays, if available, the calling line identity
Number number of the group. If the group phone number is not configured, this
field is empty and the settings that require the group phone number
are disabled.

Calling Line ID Group Name This is a read-only field. Depending on the configuration, it can display
the group name or the group calling line identity name, or it can be
empty. When this field is empty, the settings that require the group
name are disabled.

Incoming Caller ID

Use Group Dialable Caller This policy allows you to decide whether the group or service
ID Policy provider/enterprise Dialable Caller ID policy should be used.
Use Service  Select Use Group Dialable Caller ID Policy to use the policy defined on
Provider/Enterprise Dialable this page.
Caller ID Policy  Select Use Service Provider/Enterprise Dialable Caller ID Policy to use
the Service Provider/Enterprise policy.

Dialable Caller ID: On/Off Select On to enable the Dialable Caller ID feature for your group, or
select Off to disable it.

3) To save the changes, click Apply. Or to save the changes and return to the previous
page, click OK.
To exit without saving, click Cancel.

4.9 Communication Barring Authorization Codes

Use this item on the Group – Profile menu page to create and manage communication
barring authorization codes for the group.
Communication-barring authorization codes restrict certain types of calls. Calls requiring
authorization are not connected unless a valid code is entered. The types of calls
requiring authorization are defined by Network Classes of Service. To view the network
classes of service assigned to your group, see section 5.7 Network Classes of Service.

4.9.1 List Communication Barring Auth Codes

Use the Group – Communication Barring Auth Codes page to list the communication
barring authorization codes defined for your group.

Figure 30 Group – Communication Barring Auth Codes

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Communication Barring Auth Code under
the Advanced menu. The Group – Communication Barring Auth Codes page
appears.
2) Click OK to save your changes and return to the previous page.
To cancel you changes and return to the previous page, click Cancel.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 59 OF 314
 4.9.2 Add Authorization Code
Use the Group – Communication Barring Auth Code Add page to create a new
communication barring authorization code.

Figure 31 Group – Communication Barring Auth Code Add

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Communication Barring Auth Codes
under the Advanced menu. The Group – Communication Barring Auth Code page
appears.
2) Click Add. The Group – Communication Barring Auth Code Add page appears.
3) Enter the authorization code and a description of the code. An authorization code
consists of 2 through 14 digits (0 through 9).
4) Click OK to save your changes and return to the previous page.
To cancel you changes and return to the previous page, click Cancel.

4.9.3 Delete Communication Barring Authorization Code

Use the Group – Communication Barring Auth Codes page to delete one or more
communication barring authorization codes defined for your group.

Figure 32 Group – Communication Barring Auth Codes (Delete)

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Communication Barring Auth Codes
under the Advanced menu. The Group – Communication Barring Auth Codes page
appears.
2) Select the Delete check-box in the row for each authorization code you want to
delete.
3) Click OK or Apply. Apply save you changes. OK saves your changes and returns to
the previous page.
Or to cancel your changes and return to the previous page, click Cancel.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 60 OF 314
 4.10 Dian Plan Policy
You use this page to configure a group’s Dial Plan policy for digit collection and outside
access codes processing. This includes public and private dial plans simultaneously on a
per-group basis. The Dial Plan policy allows integrated and consistent control of digit
collection and external digit processing policies. One of the commonly used applications
that require configuring this policy is to provide the capability to allow the “dial 9 to access
an outside line” feature common in many PBX systems.

Figure 33 Group – Dial Plan Policy

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Dial Plan Policy. The Dial Plan Policy page
appears.
2) For Dial Plan Policy Settings For This Group, choose from the following levels:
− System Settings
− Service Provider Settings
− Group Settings

NOTE: The enterprise and service provider levels are equivalent for this feature.

3) Check or uncheck Requires Access Code for Public Calls. When this option is
checked, dialing an access code is enforced to access the public dialing plan.
4) Check or uncheck Allow E.164 Public Calls. When this option is checked, E.164
addresses are allowed as public calls regardless of the Non-Permissive option setting.
However, it is only relevant when the Requires Access Code for Public Calls option is
checked.
APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00
©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 61 OF 314
 5) Check the Prefer E.164 Number Format for Callback Services box to indicate that the
E.164 number format is the preferred format for Callback services.
6) In the Public Digit Map text box, enter the digit map.

NOTE: The required indicator (*) beside the Public Digit Map text box label appears only when
the Dial Plan Policy Settings For This Group is set to “Group Settings”.

Use the following syntax for a digit map.

DigitMap DigitString | "(" DigitString 0*( "|" DigitString ) ")"

DigitString 1*((DTMFToken | "x" | DTMFRange) ["."])

DTMFRange "[" 1*((DIGIT" DIGIT ) | DTMFToken ) "]"

DTMFToken DIGIT | "#" | "*" | "T"

DIGIT "0" | "1" | "2" | "3" | "4" | "5" | "6" | "7" | "8" | "9"

An example of a valid digit map is: (1xxx| 2.[#T])

In this map, a collection of digit strings starting with “1” stops after four digits (total) are
collected. A collection of digit strings starting with “2” continues until a timeout (“T”) is
reached or until the “#” character is collected. Digits collected are then reported to the
Application Server.
7) In the Private Digit Map text box, enter the private digit map. This field is optional. If it
is not entered, the public digit map is used. The same syntax rules apply for Private
Digit Map and Public Digit Map.
8) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 62 OF 314
 4.10.1 Add Dial Plan Policy Access Code
Use this page to add a new access code to a Dial Plan policy.

Figure 34 Group – Dial Plan Policy Add

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Dial Plan Policy. The Group – Dial Plan
Policy page appears.
2) Click Add. The Dial Plan Policy Add page appears.
3) In the Access Code text box, enter the access code number. An access code
consists of 1 through 5 digits (0 through 9, *, #) and does not contain wildcards.
4) In the Description text box, enter a description for the access code.
5) Check or uncheck Include Code for Network Translations and Routing to determine
whether the access code should be included as part of the dialed digits for the
purpose of network translations and routing.
6) Check or uncheck Include Code for Screening Services to determine whether the
access code should be included as part of the dialed digits for the purpose of call
screening (for example, for the Outgoing Dialing Plan and Outgoing Calling Plan).
7) Check or uncheck Enable Secondary Dial Tone to determine whether a secondary
dial tone is applicable for calls initiated from a Media Gateway Control Protocol
(MGCP) device or for call originations that involve the Media Server for digit collection.
If this attribute is enabled, then the private digit map is initially used for digit collection.
This attribute cannot be enabled unless a private digit map is configured.

NOTE: This is only available when the Private Digit Map is configured.

8) Save your changes. Click OK to save your changes and display the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 63 OF 314
 4.10.2 Modify Dial Plan Policy Access Code
Use this page to modify or delete an access code for a Dial Plan policy.

Figure 35 Group – Dial Plan Policy Modify

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Dial Plan Policy. The Group – Dial Plan
Policy page appears.
2) Click Edit in the row of the Dial Plan policy access code. The Group – Dial Plan
Policy Modify page appears.
3) Edit the access code information. For more information on the fields for the Dial Plan
policy access codes, see section 4.10.1 Add Dial Plan Policy Access Code.
4) Click Delete to delete the access code. The previous page appears.
5) Click OK to save your changes and display the previous page.
6) To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 64 OF 314
 4.11 Virtual On-Net Enterprise Extensions
Use this item on the Group – Profile page to create and manage Virtual On-Net users,
which includes the following procedures:
 List Virtual On-Net Users
 Add Virtual On-Net User
 Add Range of Virtual On-Net Users
 Modify or Delete Virtual On-Net User
The Virtual On-Net Enterprise Extensions service allows BroadWorks users to reach
destinations that are not part of their enterprise or group, using extensions. The service
integrates the virtual private network (VPN) destinations with the BroadWorks enterprise
framework by explicitly defining in the enterprise directory destinations that are not part of
the enterprise and associating extensions with them. Enterprise users with the Virtual On-
Net Enterprise Extensions service enabled can place calls to these destinations using
extensions, as they would call users in their group or enterprise.
A Virtual on-net destination (user) is associated with an E.164 number, an extension, first
and last name, as well as a virtual on-net type used for billing purposes.

NOTE: Enterprise users with Virtual On-Net Enterprise Extensions service assigned can call
any virtual on-net user in the enterprise using their extension, whereas service provider users
can call any virtual on-net user in their group using their extension.

When presenting callers with the identity of a virtual on-net user, the Virtual On-Net
Enterprise Extensions service overrides the public identity of that destination with their
virtual on-net identity provisioned for this service.
The following restrictions apply to directory numbers (DN) and extensions used in the
Virtual On-Net Enterprise Extensions service:
 A directory number is a public E.164 number and must be unique within a given
group. The same DN can however be present in any number of groups. The DN
may represent a non-BroadWorks number or a DN hosted on another Application
Server cluster. The DN may even represent:
− For enterprise Virtual On-Net users – a DN that is part of another
enterprise/service provider hosted on the same Application Server cluster.
− For service provider Virtual On-Net users – a DN that is part of another enterprise
or group that belongs to any service provider hosted on the same Application
Server cluster.
However, it cannot be a DN that is assigned to a user in the same group.
 Extensions assigned to Virtual On-Net users are standard group extensions and must
be unique in the group. In addition, they must follow the group’s minimum and
maximum extension length settings. Note that different groups can use the same
extensions.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 65 OF 314
 4.11.1 List Virtual On-Net Users
Use the Group – Virtual On-Net Users page to view Virtual On-Net users in your group.
From this page you can also add, modify, and remove Virtual On-Net users.

NOTE: Virtual On-Net users are also listed in your enterprise or group directory. For enterprise
groups, the enterprise directory lists Virtual On-Net users for all enterprise groups.

Figure 36 Group – Virtual On-Net Users

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Virtual On-Net Enterprise Extensions.
The Group – Virtual On-Net Users page appears.
2) To search for users, enter your search criteria and click Search.
This page is a list page. Depending on the number of pages of data in a list, list
pages allow you to search several different ways. You can click the heading of a
column to change the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the
data to specify search criteria, or click the page links. For more information on
defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web Interface
Administration Guide.
3) To return to the previous page, click OK.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 66 OF 314
 4.11.2 Add Virtual On-Net User
Use the Group – Virtual On-Net Users Add page to add a Virtual On-Net user.

Figure 37 Group – Virtual On-Net Users Add

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Virtual On-Net Extensions. The Group –
Virtual On-Net Users page appears.
2) Click Add. The Group – Virtual On-Net Users Add page appears.
3) Enter the last and the first name of the user, from 1 through 30 characters each.
4) Enter the last and the first name to be used as this user’s calling line ID. The calling
line ID last and first names can be from 1 through 30 characters and cannot contain
characters %, +, backslash, double quotes, or extended ASCII characters.
5) In the Phone Number text box, enter the user’s phone number. The phone number
can be in the national (from 1 through 20 digits) or E.164 format (from 3 through 22
digits). You can include spaces and dashes in the number, which do not count toward
the number's length. If you do not enter the number in the E.164 format, the system
automatically adds the plus sign and the system default country code at the beginning
of the number.
6) In the Extension text box, enter the extension to assign to this virtual on-net user. The
extension has to be unique within the group and can only contain digits (0 through 9).
The allowed length may vary from organization to organization. The extension
settings for your organization are configured on the Group – Extension Dialing page.
7) From the Virtual On-Net Type drop-down list, select the type to associate with the
user for billing purposes.
8) To save your changes and return to the previous page, click OK.
To cancel your changes and return to the previous page, click Cancel.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 67 OF 314
 4.11.3 Add Range of Virtual On-Net Users
Use the Group – Virtual On-Net Users Add page to add a range of Virtual On-Net users.
When you create a range of Virtual On-Net users, a single name is associated with the
range. Subsequently, the range is treated as individual entries and can only be edited as
individual entries from that point on. For information on modifying an entry, see section
4.11.4 Modify or Delete Virtual On-Net User.

Figure 38 Group – Virtual On-Net Users Range Add

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Virtual On-Net Extensions. The Group –
Virtual On-Net Users page appears.
2) Click Add Range. The Group – Virtual On-Net Users Range Add page appears.
3) Enter the last and first name, from 1 through 30 characters, for the range of Virtual
On-Net users.
4) Enter the last and the first name to be used as the range’s calling line ID. The calling
line ID last and first names can be from 1 through 30 characters and cannot contain
characters %, +, backslash, double quotes, or extended ASCII characters.
5) For Phone Number Range, enter the first and the last phone number of the range.
The phone numbers can be in the national (from 1 through 20 digits) or E.164 format
(from 3 through 22 digits). You can include spaces and dashes in the number, which
do not count toward the number's length. If you do not enter the number in the E.164
format, the system automatically adds the plus sign and the system default country
code at the beginning of the number.
6) For Extension, enter the first and the last extension of the range of extensions to be
associated with the number range. The extensions have to be unique within the
group and can only contain digits (0 through 9). The allowed length may vary from
organization to organization. The extension settings for your organization are
configured on the Group – Extension Dialing page.
7) From the Virtual On-Net Type drop-down list, select the type to associate with the
users for billing purposes.
8) To save your changes and return to the previous page, click OK.
To cancel your changes and return to the previous page, click Cancel.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 68 OF 314
 4.11.4 Modify or Delete Virtual On-Net User
Use the Group – Virtual On-Net User page to delete or modify a Virtual On-Net user.

Figure 39 Group – Virtual On-Net Users Modify

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Virtual On-Net Extensions. The Group –
Virtual On-Net Users page appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the entry to edit. The Group – Virtual On-Net
User page appears.
3) To delete the entry, click Delete. The previous page appears.

WARNING: The Delete function cannot be undone. Once you click Delete, your deletion is
final. Press Cancel before you click Delete to avoid a deletion.

4) To modify the entry, enter or select information as required. For information about the
fields on this page, see section 4.11.2 Add Virtual On-Net User. Note that the Phone
Number field is read-only and cannot be modified.
5) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

4.12 Dialable Caller ID

You use the Dialable Caller ID menu item on the Group – Profile menu page to manage
dialable caller ID settings and criteria for your group.
Dialable caller ID criteria are used to screen incoming calls and transform the caller’s
phone number into a dialable format. Dialable caller ID criteria can be defined at the
system, service provider, and group levels. The level to apply to a call is determined by
the Call Processing Policies settings as well as the settings on this page.
At each level, the criteria entries are prioritized and applied to calls in the order of priority.
1 denotes the highest priority, 2 denotes the second highest priority, and so on. When you
create a new criteria entry, it is automatically assigned the next available priority, which
you can subsequently modify.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 69 OF 314
 Within a criteria entry, the criteria are grouped.
When no criteria are selected within a group of criteria, it means that the group does not
matter. If any criteria are selected within a group, the call must match at least one of the
selected criteria.
If a call matches all the groups of criteria in a criteria entry, the corresponding prefix digits
are added to the beginning of the remote party’s number received from the Network
Server. Note that the prefix digits can be empty.
This section includes the following procedures for configuring the Dialable Caller ID
feature for your group:
 View Dialable Caller ID Settings
 Configure Dialable Caller ID Settings and Prioritize Entries
 Add Dialable Caller ID Criteria Entry
 Modify or Delete Dialable Caller ID Entry

4.12.1 View Dialable Caller ID Settings

You use the Group – Dialable Caller ID page to configure dialable caller ID settings for
your group and to prioritize dialable caller ID criteria entries.
Depending on your access permissions, this page can be read-only or modifiable as
illustrated in Figure 40 and Figure 41.

Figure 40 Group – Dialable Caller ID (Read-only)

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Dialable Caller ID under the Advanced
menu. The Group – Dialable Caller ID page appears.
2) To view the details of a particular entry, click View/Edit on the row for the entry.
3) To return to the previous page, click OK.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 70 OF 314
 4.12.2 Configure Dialable Caller ID Settings and Prioritize Entries
You use the Group – Dialable Caller ID page to configure dialable caller ID settings for
your group and to prioritize dialable caller ID criteria entries.

Figure 41 Group – Dialable Caller ID

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Dialable Caller ID under the Advanced
menu. The Group – Dialable Caller ID page appears.
2) Select the dialable caller ID configuration to use for your group. For Dialable Caller ID
Configuration check one of the following options:
− Check Use Service Provider/Enterprise Criteria to use the dialable caller ID
criteria defined for your service provider/enterprise.
− Check Use Group Criteria to use the dialable caller ID criteria defined for your
group.
3) Select the action to take in case the screening of the caller’s phone number fails:
− Check Display the received caller ID to display the caller’s ID received from the
network.
− Check Do not display the caller’s number to display only the caller’s name.
− Check Do not display the caller’s name or number if you do not display the
caller’s identity.
4) Prioritize criteria entries. To change the priority of a criterion entry, type the new
priority in the Priority column of the row for the entry.
You can enter any whole or decimal number. When you apply the changes, the
criteria entries are renumbered from 1 to n, in the relative order assigned by you, and
reordered accordingly. For example, if there are two criteria entries A and B, and you
assign priority 7 to entry A and priority 3.5 to entry B, entry B is listed first with priority
1, and entry A is listed second with priority 2.
5) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 71 OF 314
 To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

4.12.3 Add Dialable Caller ID Criteria Entry

You use the Group – Dialable Caller ID Add page to add a dialable caller ID criterion entry
for your group.
A criterion entry is a collection of criteria to apply to incoming calls and optionally a prefix to
add to the beginning of the originator’s phone number for calls that match the criteria in the
entry. The criteria are grouped. When no criteria are selected within a group of criteria, it
means that the group does not matter. If any criteria are selected within a group, the call
must match at least one of the selected criteria.
The criteria are grouped into the following groups:
 Call category – The call category is determined by the cat contact parameter
obtained from the Network Server query response. The system-defined cat values
are shown in the following table.
System-defined Cat Values Description

NATIONAL National

INTERLAT InterLATA

INTRALAT IntraLATA Toll

INTERNAT International

LOCAL Local

PRIVATE Private

EMERG Emergency

OTHER Other

NOTE: The table enumerates all the possible values of call category. Some values may not
apply to terminating calls.

 Network call type – The network call type is determined by the ct contact parameter
obtained from the Network Server query response. The network call types supported
by the Application Server are provisioned at the following CLI level:
AS_CLI/System/CallP/CommunicationBarring/CallTypes

 Alternate call indicator – The alternate call indicator is determined by the aci contact
parameter obtained from the Network Server query response. The alternate call
indicators supported by the Application Server are provisioned at the following CLI
level:
AS_CLI/System/CallP/CommunicationBarring/AltCallIndicators

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 72 OF 314
 Figure 42 Group – Dialable Caller ID Criteria Add

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Dialable Caller ID under the Advanced
menu. The Group – Dialable Caller ID page appears.
2) Click Add. The Group – Dialable Caller ID Add page appears.
3) In the Name text box, enter a name for the entry. The name is mandatory and can be
from 1 through 40 characters.
4) In the Description text box, enter a description for the entry.
5) In the Prefix Digits text box, enter the digits to add to the beginning of the caller’s
phone number if the call satisfies the conditions specified in this entry. The prefix can
contain digits (0 through 9), characters # and *, and can be at most 10 characters.
6) For Match Categories, select one or more call categories to match.
7) Select configurable call types to match. In the Available Configurable Call Types
column, select the desired call types and click Add >. Alternatively, to select all call
types, click Add All >>.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 73 OF 314
 8) Select alternate call indicators to match. In the Available Alternate Call Indicators
column, select the desired indicators and click Add >. Alternatively, to select all call
indicators, click Add All >>.
9) Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

4.12.4 Modify or Delete Dialable Caller ID Entry

You use Group – Dialable Caller ID Modify page to modify or delete a selected dialable
caller ID criterion entry.

Figure 43 Group – Dialable Caller ID Criteria Modify (Top of Page)

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Dialable Caller ID under the Advanced
menu. The Group – Dialable Caller ID page appears.
2) Click Edit in the row of the entry to edit. The Group – Dialable Caller ID Modify page
appears.
3) To delete the entry, click Delete. The Group – Profile page appears.

WARNING: This operation is final and cannot be undone.

4) Modify the entry as required. For information about the options available on this page,
see section 4.12.3 Add Dialable Caller ID Criteria Entry.
5) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 74 OF 314
 5 Resources Menu

This chapter contains sections that correspond to each item on the Group – Resources
menu page.

Figure 44 Group – Resources Menu (Top of Page)

The Group – Resources menu contains these items:

 Configuration menu
This menu displays the items that group administrators use to list and configure
resources:
− Call Recording Platform
− Group Paging Targets Capacity
− Identity/Device Endpoints
− Identity/Device Profiles
− Domains
− Network Classes of Service
− Numbers
− Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges
− Office Zones
− Route Point External Systems

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 75 OF 314
 − Services
− Trunking Call Capacity
− Session Admission Control Capacity
 Assignment menu
This menu displays the items that group administrators use to assign resources:
− Activate Numbers
− Assign Group Services
− New User Services Template
− Existing User Services
− IMRNs
− Mobile Subscriber Directory Numbers

5.1 Access the Group – Resources Menu

Use the items on the Group – Resources menu, for example, to list resources assigned to
your group. You can add, modify, or remove Identity/Device Profiles to represent your
users’ telephony equipment or public SIP identities. You can add services to and remove
services from the group, for Services.
On your Home page, on the Options list, click Resources. The Group – Resources menu
page appears.

5.2 Call Recording Platform

Use this item on the Group – Resources menu page to select a Call Recording platform
for your group.
The Call Recording user service allows users to record their calls using a Third-Party Call
Recording (3PCR) platform. You can also assign Call Recording to Auto Attendant, Call
Center, and Route Point virtual users and then record their calls. For information on
recording calls for virtual users, see the BroadWorks Application Server Group Web
Interface Administration Guide – Part 2.

5.2.1 Select Call Recording Platform

The Group – Call Recording Platform page allows you to select a Call Recording platform
for your group.

Figure 45 Group – Call Recording Platform

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 76 OF 314
 1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Call Recording Platform. The Group –
Call Recording Platform page appears.
2) Select a recording platform from the drop-down list.

NOTE: Once a recording platform is assigned, you cannot clear the selection. You can only
assign a different platform to the group. Only when the Call Recording service is unauthorized,
the platform is cleared.

3) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

5.3 Group Paging Targets Capacity

The Group – Group Paging Targets Capacity page displays the maximum number of
target users a paging group is allowed to have. Target users are users who are paged
when a call is made to the paging group.

5.3.1 View Group Paging Targets Capacity

Use this item on the Group – Resources menu page to view the maximum number of
target users in a paging group allowed for your group.

Figure 46 Group – Group Paging Targets Capacity

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Group Paging Targets Capacity. The
Group – Group Paging Targets Capacity page appears.
2) To display the previous page, click OK.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 77 OF 314
 5.4 Identity/Device Endpoints
Use this item on the Group – Resources menu page to list the identity/device endpoints for
your group.

5.4.1 List Identity/Device Endpoints

The Group – Identity/Device Endpoints page displays identity/device endpoints for your
group.

Figure 47 Group – Identity/Device Endpoints

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Identity/Device Endpoints. The Group
– Identity/Device Endpoints page appears.
2) To display all the identity/device endpoints for your group, click Search.
To display specific identity/device endpoints, enter your search criteria and click
Search. You can search by Line/Port User Part, Line/Port Domain, User ID, Last
Name, First Name, Phone Number, Extension, and Department. For more
information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web
Interface Administration Guide.
3) To display the previous page, click OK.

5.5 Identity/Device Profiles

Use this item on the Group – Resources menu page to:
 List Identity/Device Profile
 Add Identity/Device Profile
 Modify Identity/Device Profile
 Delete Identity/Device Profile
When you create or modify an identity/device profile, the information you need to provide
depends on the selected identity/device profile type.

5.5.1 List Identity/Device Profile

Use the Group – Identity/Device Profiles page to list your group’s identity/device profiles.
From this page, you can add, modify, or delete an identity/device profile.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 78 OF 314
 Figure 48 Group – Identity/Device Profiles

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Identity/Device Profiles. The Group –
Identity/Device Profiles page with search criteria boxes appears.
2) To display the list of identity/device profiles, click Search. The list of identity/device
profiles appears.
For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started
Web Interface Administration Guide.
3) To display the previous page, click OK or Cancel.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 79 OF 314
 5.5.2 Add Identity/Device Profile
Use the Group – Identity/Device Profile Add page to add a new identity/device profile for
the group.

Figure 49 Group – Identity/Device Profile Add (Managed Device)

Figure 50 Group – Identity/Device Profile Add (IMS Deployment)

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Identity/Device Profiles. The Group –
Identity/Device Profiles page appears.
2) Click Add. The Group – Identity/Device Profile Add page appears.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 80 OF 314
 3) Type or select information for the identity/device profile. Required data is indicated by
an asterisk (*).
Setting Name Values Description Example

Identity/Device 1 through 80 The name of the new identity/device CyberGroupIAD1

Profile Name * characters. profile.

Identity/Device The drop-down box The type of identity/device profile Cisco 2421-16
Profile Type lists available used for the new identity/device Cisco 2421-24
identity/device profile.
profile types.

Protocol The drop-down box The communication protocol used by MGCPIETF 1.0
lists available the identity/device profile.
protocols. Not available in IMS deployments.

Host Name/ 1 through 80 The host name or IP address of the [Link]

IP Address characters. Cannot identity/device profile. Optional for [Link]
contain spaces or some identity/device profiles, such as
the @ symbol. IP phones.
Not available in IMS deployments.

Port 1025 through The communication port used by the 1234

65535. identity/device profile. This field is
dependent on the type of
Identity/Device Profile Type selected.
Not available in IMS deployments.

Transport The available The transport protocol used. TCP

values are listed in
the drop-down box.

MAC Address 12 characters The unique Media Access Control 21A1423f23d2

containing only (MAC) address of the network
uppercase letters hardware used by the new
and digits. identity/device profile.

Serial Number 1 through 80 The serial number of the 123AB-C-456

characters. identity/device profile.
Not available in IMS deployments.

Description 1 through 80 A brief text description of the Bldg. 3 Device

characters. identity/device profile, such as an
internal reference, manufacturer
name, or other internal feature.

Outbound 1 through 80 The host name or IP address of the [Link].

Proxy Server characters. Cannot proxy server to be used by this com
contain spaces or identity/device profile. [Link]
the @ symbol. Not available in IMS deployments.

STUN Server 1 through 80 The host name or IP address of the [Link]

characters. Cannot Simple Traversal of UDP through .com
contain spaces or NAT (STUN) server to be used by [Link]
the @ symbol. this identity/device profile.
Not available in IMS deployments.

Physical 1 through 1024 The physical location of the Office number

Location characters. identity/device profile. and address

4) If applicable, configure the authentication information as follows:

− To use the credentials defined for the identity/device profile type, check Use
Identity/Device Profile Type Credentials. Alternatively, to use custom credentials,
check Use Custom Credentials.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 81 OF 314
 − If you have selected Use Custom Credentials, enter your device access user
name and password.
5) Save your changes. Click OK. The previous page appears.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

5.5.3 Modify Identity/Device Profile

Use the Group – Identity/Device Profiles Modify page to modify and configure an
identity/device profile, and to list the users to whom an identity/device profile has been
assigned.
The tabs available on this page depend on the type of device management supported by
the device.
 Profile Tab (All Devices)
 Configure Tab (Legacy Devices)
 Users Tab (All Devices)
 Files Tab (Managed Devices)
 Custom Tags Tab (Managed Devices)

[Link] Profile Tab (All Devices)

Use the Profile tab on the Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify page to modify the profile
information for an identity/device profile.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 82 OF 314
 Figure 51 Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Profile (Managed Device)

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 83 OF 314
 Figure 52 Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Profile (Legacy Device)

Figure 53 Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Profile (Unmanaged Device)

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 84 OF 314
 Figure 54 Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Profile (Unmanaged Device – IMS Deployments)

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Identity/Device Profiles. The Group –
Identity/Device Profiles page with search criteria boxes appears.
2) To display the list of identity/device profiles, click Search.
This page is a list page. Depending on the number of pages of data in a list, list
pages allow you to search several different ways. You can click the heading of a
column to change the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the
data to specify search criteria, or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous.
For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started
Web Interface Administration Guide.
3) Click Edit or any item in the row for the identity/device profile to edit. The Group –
Identity/Device Profile Modify page appears showing the Profile tab by default.
4) Edit the identity/device profile information. Required information is indicated with an
asterisk. For more information about the identity/device profile information settings,
see section 5.5.2 Add Identity/Device Profile.
The following read-only data is displayed.
Name Description Example

Identity/Device The name of the new identity/device profile. SipPhone4

Profile Name

Identity/Device The type of identity/device profile used for the Cisco ATA186,
Profile Type identity/device profile. Device types with the Polycom SoundPoint
same name but different capabilities are IP 500
differentiated by following the name with the
number of available ports.

Device Type URL The URL of the device type. [Link]

Soundpoint_IP_500

Lines/Ports The number of lines/ports on the device. Unlimited

Assigned Lines Ports The number of assigned line/ports. 2

Unassigned The number of line/ports still available to be Unlimited

Lines/Ports assigned.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 85 OF 314
 Name Description Example

Version The software version of the identity/device X-Lite release 1104o

type. It is only displayed for SIP devices. stamp 56125

5) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

[Link] Configure Tab (Legacy Devices)

Use the Configure tab on the Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify page to modify the
configuration information for an identity/device profile. This tab is only available for legacy
devices.

NOTE: A configuration file contains IP phone attributes, for example, proxy address/port, and
user-specific attributes, for example, calling line identity, calling name, authentication username,
and authentication password.

Figure 55 Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Configure

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Identity/Device Profiles. The Group –
Identity/Device Profiles page appears.
2) To display the list of identity/device profiles, click Search.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 86 OF 314
 This page is a list page. Depending on the number of pages of data in a list, list
pages allow you to search several different ways. You can click the heading of a
column to change the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the
data to specify search criteria, or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous.
For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started
Web Interface Administration Guide.
3) Click Edit or any item in the row for the identity/device profile. The Group –
Identity/Device Profile Modify page appears.
4) Click the Configuration tab.
5) Specify the type of configuration file. Click a button to select the type of configuration.
Manual: The identity/device profile is to be physically configured by the group
administrator.
Default: The identity/device profile uses default parameters that are uploaded at the
system and group level and that act as the default settings for all identity/device
profiles at these levels. The default parameters are combined with the subscriber
profile attributes to configure the phone for a subscriber.
The Default system configuration file is configured and uploaded to the system using
the command line interface (CLI). For more information, see the BroadWorks
Application Server Command Line Interface Administration Guide.
Custom: The identity/device profile uses a custom configuration file uploaded by the
administrator. The custom file may or may not override the system parameters, and,
if the group configuration file is used, the custom file overrides the group file. If a
parameter exists both in the system file and the custom file, the custom file has
precedence over the system file.
6) If you selected Manual or Default, save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply
saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays the previous page.
7) To upload a custom file, select Custom and click Browse to find and open the file on
your computer.
When you return to the Identity/Device Profile Modify page the custom file name
appears in the Currently using configuration file box, and the file is displayed.
− If you change the configuration file, click Rebuild the files.
The configuration file is regenerated and transmitted to the File Server.
The rebuild operation is completed even when there has not been a change to
the configuration file.
8) To modify the external configuration of an identity/device profile, click Click To
Configure.

NOTE: External configuration may not be available for all identity/device profile types.

9) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 87 OF 314
 [Link] Users Tab (All Devices)
Use the Users tab on the Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify page to list the user
accounts that have been assigned the selected identity/device profile, and to reorder the
line/ports in use for the identity/device profile.

Figure 56 Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Users (AS Mode)

Figure 57 Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Users (XS Mode)

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Identity/Device Profiles. The Group –
Identity/Device Profiles page appears.
2) To display the list of identity/device profiles, click Search.
This page is a list page. Depending on the number of pages of data in a list, list
pages allow you to search several different ways. You can click the heading of a
column to change the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the
data to specify search criteria, or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous.
For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started
Web Interface Administration Guide.
3) Click Edit or any item in the row for the identity/device profile. The Group –
Identity/Device Profile Modify page appears.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 88 OF 314
 4) Click the Users tab.
5) To display the list of users with the selected identity/device profile assigned, click
Search.
You can search for users by Line/Port User Part, Line/Port Domain, (In IMS
deployments, Public Identity User Part, and Public Identity Domain), Endpoint Type,
User ID, Last Name, First Name, Phone Number, Extension, or Port. In XS mode,
you can also search by Private Identity. The Edit link takes you to the user/virtual
subscriber Profile menu page.

NOTE: The Primary Line/Port and the Port columns are empty for trunk users. The Port search
criterion does not apply to trunk users.

To reorder the line/ports in use for the identity/device profile, click Reorder Line/Ports
on this Identity/Device Profile. The Devices Modify - Reorder Users page appears.
For more information, see section [Link].1 Change Order of Line/Ports.

NOTE: The Reorder Line/Ports on this Identity/Device Profile link appears only when more than
one line/port has been assigned to users and when the static line ordering option is disabled for
the identity device/profile type.

6) To modify a user account in the list, click Edit or any item in the row corresponding to
that user. The User – Profile page appears.
7) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page or click Cancel to display
the previous page.

[Link].1 Change Order of Line/Ports

Use the Group – Devices Modify – Reorder Users page to change the order of the
line/ports assigned to a device.

Figure 58 Group – Devices Modify – Reorder Users (AS Mode)

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 89 OF 314
 Figure 59 Group – Devices Modify – Reorder Users (XS Mode)

NOTE: In AS mode, line/ports are listed on the Group – Devices Modify – Reorder Users page.
In XS mode, line/ports are listed along with their private identity, if defined.

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Identity/Device Profiles. The Group –
Identity/Device Profiles page appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the device. The Group – Identity/Device Profiles
Modify page appears.
3) Click the Users tab and then click Reorder Line/Ports on this Device. The Group –
Devices Modify – Reorder Users page appears.

NOTE: The Reorder Line/Ports on this Identity/Device Profile link appears only when more than
one line/port has been assigned to users and when the static line ordering option is disabled for
the identity device/profile type.

4) To change the order of a line/port, select it and click Move Up or Move Down.
5) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

[Link] Files Tab (Managed Devices)

Use the Files tab on the Identity/Device Profile Modify page to manage files for the
identity/device profile.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 90 OF 314
 Figure 60 Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Files

[Link].1 Manage Identity/Device Profile Files

1) On the Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify page, click the Files tab.
2) For IP phones, click Rebuild the files to regenerate and transmit the configuration
files to the file server. Or click Rebuild the files (force) to regenerate and transmit
the configuration files to the file server even if the files have not changed since the last
rebuild.
3) For IP phones that support a remote reset display, to instruct the phones to reload
their configuration files, click Reset the phones.
4) To test file access, click the link in the Access Link column and the row for the file you
want to test. The browser imitates a device access for the file. If the operation is
successful, a new browser window is open displaying the file. If it is not successful,
you are presented with an error message.
5) To download a repository file, click the Download link in the Repository File column
and the row for the file to download, and then follow your browser‘s instructions.
6) To download a template file, click the Download link in the Template File column and
the row for the file whose template you want to download, and then follow your
browser’s instructions.
7) To download the extended file capture, click the link in the Extended Capture column
and the row for the file whose extended file capture you want to download, and then
follow the instructions of your browser.
8) Click OK. OK displays the previous page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 91 OF 314
 [Link].2 Modify File for Identity/Device Profile

Use the Identity/Device Profile File Modify page to modify an existing identity/device profile
file. You can also load a new identity/device profile file.

Figure 61 Group – Identity/Device Profile File Modify

1) On the Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify page, click the Files tab.
2) Click Edit on the row containing the file you would like to modify. The Identity/Device
Profile File Modify page appears.
3) To test file access, click the link next to Access File. The browser imitates a device
access for the file. If the operation is successful, a new browser window is open
displaying the file. If it is not successful, you are presented with an error message.
4) To download a repository file, click the Download link next to Repository File, and
then follow your browser’s instructions.
5) To download a template file, click the Download link next to Template File, and then
follow your browser’s instructions.
6) To enable extended file capture, check the Enable Extended File Capture box.
7) To download the extended file capture, click the Download link, and then follow your
browser’s instructions. This link only appears when the Enable Extended File Capture
option is enabled.
8) To specify the type of file to assign, select from the following:

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 92 OF 314
 − Manual means that the Provisioning Server does not generate the file for this
device profile. It is manually generated and saved onto the file repository.
− Default specifies that the device profile does not use a custom template. Instead,
the Provisioning Server uses the corresponding file/template defined at the
device-type level to build the resulting file for the device profile.
− Custom means that the device profile has its own file/template for this file.
9) If you have selected a custom file, click Browse to add the file to the Upload File text
box. The uploaded file remains on your local computer.
10) For IP phones, click Rebuild the files to regenerate and transmit the configuration file
to the file server. Or click Rebuild the files (force) to regenerate and transmit the
configuration file to the file server if the files have not changed since the last rebuild.
11) For IP phones that support a remote reset display, to instruct the phone to reload its
configuration file, click Reset the phones.
12) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

[Link] Custom Tags Tab (Managed Devices)

Use the Custom Tags tab on the Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify page to modify,
add, or delete custom tags for the identity/device profile. This tab is only available for
managed devices with custom tags enabled.
This page is a list page that allows you to search several different ways. You can click the
headings of a column to change the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes
below the data to specify search criteria, or click the page links, for example, Next or
Previous. For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting
Started Web Interface Administration Guide.

Figure 62 Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Custom Tags (same in IMS Deployments)

1) To delete a tag, select the check box in the row of the tag and then click Apply. The
custom tag is removed from the identity/device profile.
2) To add a custom tag, click Add. The Identity/Device Profile Custom Tag Add page
appears. For information on adding a custom tag, see section [Link] Add Custom
Tag.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 93 OF 314
 3) To modify a custom tag, click Edit on the row for the desired tag. The Identity/Device
Profile Custom Tag Modify page appears. For more information on modifying custom
tags, see section [Link] Modify Custom Tag.

[Link] Add Custom Tag

Use the Group – Identity/Device Profile Custom Tag Add page to add a custom tag for an
identity/device profile.

Figure 63 Group – Identity/Device Profile Custom Tag Add (same in IMS Deployments)

1) On the Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify page, click the Custom Tags tab.
2) Click Add. The Identity/Device Profile Custom Tag Add page appears.
3) In the Tag Name text box, enter the name for the tag. A tag name can be from 3
through 64 characters and cannot contain the % character (except for the beginning
and end % already provided on the web page) and cannot start with %BW (reserved
for BroadWorks tabs).
4) In the Tag Value text box, enter the value for the tag (from 1 through 256 characters).
5) Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

[Link] Modify Custom Tag

Use the Group – Identity/Device Profile Custom Tag Modify page to modify a custom tag
for an identity/device profile.

Figure 64 Group – Identity/Device Profile Custom Tag Modify (same in IMS Deployments)

1) On the Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify page, click the Custom Tags tab.
2) Click Edit on the row of the tag you would like to modify. The Identity/Device Profile
Custom Tag Modify page appears. The Tag Name cannot be edited.
3) Click Delete to delete this tag from the identity/device profile.
APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00
©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 94 OF 314
 4) In the Tag Value text box, enter the new value for the tag (from 1 through 256
characters)
5) Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

5.5.4 Delete Identity/Device Profile

Use the Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify page to delete an identity/device profile
from the system.

Figure 65 Group – Identity/Device Profile Modify

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Identity/Device Profiles. The Group –
Identity/Device Profiles page appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the identity/device profile. The Group – Devices
Modify page appears.
3) Click Delete. The Group – Identity/Device Profiles page appears.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

WARNING: The Delete function cannot be undone. Once you click Delete, your deletion is
final. You can press Cancel before you click Delete to avoid a deletion.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 95 OF 314
 NOTE: Identity/device profiles assigned to users cannot be deleted.

5.6 Domains
Use this item on the Group – Resources menu page to:
 List Domains
 List Users Assigned to Domain

5.6.1 List Domains

Use the Group – Domains page to list the domains assigned to your group. From this
page, you can modify the profile of a user assigned to a domain.

Figure 66 Group – Domains

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Domains. The Group – Domains page
appears.
This page is a list page. Depending on the number of pages of data in a list, list
pages allow you to search several different ways. You can click the heading of a
column to change the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the
data to specify search criteria, or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous.
For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started
Web Interface Administration Guide.
2) To display the previous page, click OK.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 96 OF 314
 5.6.2 List Users Assigned to Domain
Use the Group – Domains Users page to list the users assigned to a domain.

NOTE: You cannot change the domain assigned to a user (or the users assigned to a domain).

Figure 67 Group – Domain Users

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Domains. The Group – Domains page
appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the domain. The Group – Domain Users page
with search criteria boxes appears.
3) To display the list of users for the domain, click Search. To display specific users for
the domain, enter search criteria and click Search. You can search by User ID, Last
Name, First Name, Phone Number, and Extension.
For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started
Web Interface Administration Guide.
4) To edit the profile of a user listed on this page, click Edit or any item in the row for the
user. For more information, see the BroadWorks Application Server Group Web
Interface Administration Guide – Part 2.
5) To display the previous page, click OK.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 97 OF 314
 5.7 Network Classes of Service
Use this item on the Groups – Resources menu page to view the network classes of
services for the group and the users assigned to them.

5.7.1 List Network Classes of Service

Use the Group – Network Classes of Service page to display the list of the network
classes of service assigned to your group.

Figure 68 Group – Network Classes of Service

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Network Classes of Service. The
Group – Network Classes of Service page appears displaying the network classes of
service assigned to your group.
This page is a list page that contains an advanced search. List pages allow you to
present the data several different ways. For example, you can click the headings of a
column to change the sort order of items in the column. The advanced search lets
you define specific search criteria to narrow your search and display a manageable
list. For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting
Started Web Interface Administration Guide.
2) Click OK to return to the previous page.

5.7.2 List Assigned Users

Use the Group – Network Classes of Service page to list the users assigned to a specific
class of service.

Figure 69 Group – Network Classes of Service

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 98 OF 314
 1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Network Classes of Service. The
Group – Network Classes of Service page appears displaying the network classes of
service assigned to your group.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the network class of service you want to view.
The Group – Network Class of Service page appears.
3) Click OK to return to the previous page.

5.8 Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges

If your group is part of a service provider, you use the Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges
menu item on the Group – Resources menu page to view enterprise trunk number ranges
assigned to your group. Enterprise trunk number ranges are not assigned to enterprise
groups. Enterprise groups use number ranges assigned to their enterprise.
Enterprise trunk number ranges are used in conjunction with the Route List service to
quickly provide connectivity to a new PBX site by assigning ranges of directory numbers
(enterprise trunk number ranges) for trunking users to a single user profile instead of
requiring an individual BroadWorks user profile for each directory number. For more
information on configuring the Route List service, see the BroadWorks Application Server
Group Web Interface Administration Guide Part 2.

5.8.1 Display Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges

Use the Group – Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges page to display the enterprise trunk
number ranges assigned to your group.
The Group – Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges page is a list page that allows you to
search several different ways. You can click the headings of a column to change the sort
order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the data to specify search criteria,
or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous. For more information on defining
search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web Interface Administration Guide.

Figure 70 Enterprise – Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges.
The Group – Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges page appears.
2) To search for specific number ranges, enter your search criteria and click Find.
3) If the number range is assigned to a user account, click the Edit link in the row of the
number range to go to the Profile menu of the account.
4) To display the previous page, click OK.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 99 OF 314
 5.9 Office Zones
Use this item on the Group – Resources page to view the office zones assigned to your
group and to view the users assigned to those office zones.
Office zones are used to configure location-based calling restrictions for the users.

5.9.1 List Office Zones

Use the Group – Office Zones page to view the office zones assigned to your group.

Figure 71 Group – Office Zones

1) On the Group - Resources menu page, click Office Zones. The Group – Office
Zones page appears.
This page is a list page that contains an advanced search. Depending on the number
of pages of data in a list, list pages allow you to present the data several different
ways. You can click the headings of a column to change the sort order of items in the
column, use the input boxes below the data to specify search criteria, or click the page
links, for example, Find or Find All. The advanced search lets you define specific
search criteria to narrow your search and display a manageable list. For more
information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web
Interface Administration Guide.
2) To display specific office zones, select your search criteria and click Search.
3) To return to the previous page, click OK.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 100 OF 314
 5.9.2 List Assigned Users
Use the Group – Office Zone Usage page to list the users assigned an office zone.

Figure 72 Group – Office Zone Usage

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Office Zones. The Group – Office
Zones page appears.
2) Click Edit in the row for the zone whose assigned users you want to view. The Group
– Office Zone Usage page appears displaying the users that have been assigned the
zone you selected.
3) To access the profile of a selected user, click Edit in the row for the user.
4) Click OK to return to the previous page.

5.10 Numbers
Use this item on the Group – Resources menu page to:
 List Assigned Numbers
 Change Department Assignments of Numbers

5.10.1 List Assigned Numbers

Use the Group – Numbers page to list the phone numbers assigned to your group, the
departments to which numbers and number ranges have been assigned (if any), the users
to whom individual numbers have been assigned, and the activation status of the number.
You can also modify the department to which a phone number or number range is
assigned.
Assigning phone numbers to departments offers an optional way to organize and
categorize the numbers available to your group. The department to which a given phone
number is assigned does not need to match the department of the user to whom the
number is assigned.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 101 OF 314
 Figure 73 Group – Numbers

The Groups – Numbers page is a list page that contains an advanced search. Depending
on the number of pages of data in a list, list pages allow you to present the data several
different ways. You can click the headings of a column to change the sort order of items in
the column, use the input boxes below the data to specify search criteria, or click the page
links, for example, Next or Previous. The advanced search lets you define specific
search criteria to narrow your search and display a manageable list. For more information
on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web Interface
Administration Guide.
1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Numbers. The Group – Numbers page
appears.
2) To display all the numbers assigned to your group, click Search. Or to display
specific numbers, enter search criteria and click Search. You can search by Phone
Number, User ID, Last Name, First Name, Extension, Department, and Activated
status.
The list of phone numbers that satisfies your search criteria appears. The Phone
Number, User ID, Last Name, First Name, Extension, Department, and Activated
status are displayed for each phone number.
3) To display the previous page, click OK.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 102 OF 314
 5.10.2 Change Department Assignments of Numbers
Use the Group – Assign Numbers Modify page to modify the assignments of numbers to
departments.

Figure 74 Group – Assign Numbers Modify

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Numbers. The Group – Numbers page
appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the number or number range. The Group –
Assign Numbers Modify page appears.
3) In the Phone Numbers column, select the number or range of numbers.
4) To move the selected items to the Assign to Department column, click Add >. To
move all items, click Add All >>.
5) Select the department or “None” from the drop-down list.
6) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

5.11 Route Point External Systems

Use this item on the Groups – Resources menu page to view route point external systems
assigned to your group and the route points assigned to them.

5.11.1 List Route Point External Systems

Use the Group – Route Point External Systems page to view the route point external
systems assigned to your group.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 103 OF 314
 Figure 75 Group – Route Point External Systems

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Route Point External Systems. The
Group – Route Point External Systems page appears displaying the route point
external systems assigned to your group.
This page is a list page that contains an advanced search. List pages allow you to
present the data several different ways. For example, you can click the headings of a
column to change the sort order of items in the column. The advanced search lets
you define specific search criteria to narrow your search and display a manageable
list. For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting
Started Web Interface Administration Guide.
2) To display the previous page, click OK.

5.11.2 View Route Point External System Usage

Use the Group – Route Point External System Usage page to view the route points
assigned a specific route point external system.

Figure 76 Group – Route Point External System Usage

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Route Point External Systems. The
Group – Route Point External Systems page appears.
2) Click Edit in the row for the target route point external system. The Group – Route
Point External System Usage page appears displaying the route points assigned the
selected route point external system.
3) To display the previous page, click OK.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 104 OF 314
 5.12 Services
Use this menu item on the Group – Resources menu page to:
 List Services
 List Service Pack Details

5.12.1 List Services

Use the Group – Services page to list the service packs, group services, and user services
authorized to your group.

Figure 77 Group – Services (Top of Page)

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Services. The Group – Services page
appears.
2) To display the previous page, click OK.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 105 OF 314
 5.12.2 List Service Pack Details
Use the Group – Service Pack Detail page to list the services in a service pack assigned
to the group.

Figure 78 Group – Service Pack Detail (Top of Page)

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Services. The Group – Services page
appears.
2) Click the name of the service pack. The Service Pack Detail page appears.
3) To display the previous page, click OK.

5.13 Trunking Call Capacity

Use this menu item on the Group – Resources menu page to list trunking call capacity.

5.13.1 View Trunking Call Capacity

Use the Group – Services page to view the trunking call capacity settings for your group.

Figure 79 Group (Enterprise) – Trunking Call Capacity

For an enterprise group this page displays the maximum capacity that any trunk group in
your group can have and the number of bursting calls allocated to your group that can be
distributed among the trunk groups.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 106 OF 314
 NOTE: The Maximum Capacity for any Trunk Group setting specifies the maximum number of
simultaneous active calls over a trunk group but does not guarantee that that many calls can be
established. The total allowed number of simultaneous calls over all trunk groups in your
enterprise is determined by the number of business trunking license units allocated to your
enterprise. One trunk call uses one license unit. When a call is released, the license unit is
freed and becomes available for another call.

Figure 80 Group (Service Provider) – Trunking Call Capacity

For a service provider group, this page displays the number of business trunking license
units and the number of bursting calls allocated to your group.
The number of business trunking license units determines the maximum number of
simultaneous calls allowed over all trunk groups in your group. One trunk call uses one
license unit. When a call is released, the license unit is freed and becomes available for
another call.
1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Trunking Call Capacity. The Trunking
Call Capacity page appears.
2) To display the previous page, click OK.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 107 OF 314
 5.14 Session Admission Control Capacity
The Session Admission Control (SAC) feature allows the system administrator to restrict
the number of simultaneous sessions allowed for the group.
Use this item on the Group – Resources menu to view the SAC capacity settings for your
group.

Figure 81 Group – Session Admission Control Capacity

1) On the Group - Resources menu page, select Session Admission Control

Capacity. The Group - Session Admission Control Capacity page appears.
2) To return to the previous page, click OK.
The following table lists the parameters displayed on this page and provides a description
for each.
Name Description

Session Admission This parameter specifies whether the number of concurrent subscriber
Control sessions is controlled for the group. When Control by SAC group only is
checked, no limits are imposed on the number of concurrent subscriber
sessions. When Control aggregate sessions as well as SAC groups is
checked, the maximum allowed number of concurrent subscriber sessions
for the group is as defined by the Maximum number of concurrent sessions
parameter.

Maximum number of This number represents the maximum number of simultaneous subscriber
concurrent sessions sessions allowed for the group. When the maximum number is reached,
creating new sessions is denied.
This parameter takes effect only when Session Admission Control is set to
Control aggregate sessions as well as SAC groups.

Maximum number of This number represents the maximum number of simultaneous originating
concurrent user sessions allowed for the group. When the maximum number is reached,
originating sessions creating new originating sessions is denied.

Maximum number of This number represents the maximum number of simultaneous terminating
concurrent user sessions allowed for the group. When the maximum number is reached,
terminating sessions creating new terminating sessions is denied.

Count intra Service This parameter determines whether calls made within the group count
Provider sessions toward the total number of sessions.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 108 OF 314
 5.15 Activate Numbers
Use this item on the Group – Resources menu to:
 List Assigned Phone Numbers
 Activate or Deactivate Assigned Phone Numbers
This item is available only if the Number Activation feature has been activated in your
system. Otherwise, numbers are activated as soon as they are assigned.

5.15.1 List Assigned Phone Numbers

Use the Group – Activate Numbers page to list the phone numbers assigned to users and
services in your group.

Figure 82 Group – Activate Numbers

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Activate Numbers. The Group –
Activate Numbers page appears.
2) To display the previous page, click OK or Cancel.

5.15.2 Activate or Deactivate Assigned Phone Numbers

Use the Group – Activate Numbers Modify page to activate or deactivate phone numbers
assigned to users and services in your group.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 109 OF 314
 Figure 83 Group – Activate Numbers Modify

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Activate Numbers. The Group –
Activate Numbers page appears.
2) Click anywhere in the row for the number or number range to modify. The Group –
Activate Numbers Modify page appears.
3) To activate a number or numbers, select the number(s) in the Deactivated Phone
Number column and click Add >. Alternatively, to activate all numbers, click Add All
>>.
4) To deactivate a number or numbers, select the number(s) in the Activated Phone
Number column and click Remove <. Alternatively, to deactivate all numbers, click
Remove All <<.
5) To save your changes, click OK. OK saves your changes and returns to the previous
page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

5.16 Assign Group Services

Use this item on the Group – Resources menu page to:
 List Assigned Group Services
 Assign or Unassign Group Services

5.16.1 List Assigned Group Services

Use the Group – Assign Group Services page to list the group services assigned to your
group by the service provider administrator.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 110 OF 314
 Figure 84 Group – Assign Group Services

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Assign Group Services. The Group –
Assign Group Services page appears.
2) To display the previous page, click OK or Cancel.

5.16.2 Assign or Unassign Group Services

Use the Group – Assign Group Services page to assign group services to or unassign
group services from your group.

NOTE: Only services authorized to your group appear.

Figure 85 Group – Assign Group Services

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Assign Group Services. The Group –
Assign Group Services page appears.
2) Assign Group Services:

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 111 OF 314
 − In the Available Services column, select the services to be assigned. You can
select some or all of the items in a column. Item names are listed in alphabetical
order. To select several items in sequential order, click the first name, hold down
the SHIFT key on the keyboard, and click the last name. To select several items,
but not in a particular order, click the names while holding down the CTRL key on
the keyboard.
− To assign the selected services, click Add >. To assign all services (unselected)
at once, click Add All >>.
3) Unassign services:
In the Assigned Services column, select the services and click Remove <. To
unassign all services (unselected) at once, click Remove All <<.
4) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

5.17 New User Services Template

Use this item on the Group – Resources menu page to assign or unassign service packs
or user services.
The system uses this template to assign service packs and user services automatically
when a user is added.

5.17.1 Define Service Set Assigned to New Users

Use the Group – New User Services Template page to assign service packs or user
services to or unassign from the template for new users.

NOTE: Only services authorized to your group appear on this page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 112 OF 314
 Figure 86 Group – New User Services Template

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click New User Services Template. The
Group – New User Services Template page appears.
2) Assign or unassign service packs:
In the Available Service Packs or Available User Services column, select the items to
be assigned. You can select some or all of the items in a column. Item names are
listed in alphabetical order. To select several items in sequential order, click the first
name, hold down the SHIFT key on the keyboard, and click the last name. To select
several items, but not in a particular order, click the names while holding down the
CTRL key on the keyboard.
To assign the selected services, click Add >. To assign all services (unselected) at
once, click Add All >>.
3) Unassign user services:
In the Assigned Service Packs or Assigned User Services column, select the items
and click Remove <. To unassign all services (unselected) at once, click Remove All
<<.
4) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 113 OF 314
 5.18 Existing User Services
Use this item on the Group – Resources menu page to assign or unassign service packs
or user services.

5.18.1 Assign or Unassign Service Packs or User Services

Use the Group – Existing User Services page to assign service packs or user services to
or unassign from all existing (current) users in the group.
Only services authorized to your group appear. The Number Assigned column identifies
the number of instances of services assigned to all users in the group or assigned
individually to users.

Figure 87 Group – Existing User Services (Top of Page)

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Existing User Services. The Group –
Existing User Services page appears.
2) Assign service packs and user services. For each item to be assigned, check the
Assign to All Users box.
3) Unassign service packs and user services. For each item to be unassigned, check
the Unassign from All Users box.
4) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 114 OF 314
 5.18.2 View Service Usage
Use the Group – Service Usage page to view the users currently assigned a service or
service pack. The following is an example of service usage for the Fax Messaging
service.

Figure 88 Group – Service Usage (Fax Messaging Service)

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Existing User Services. The Group –
Existing User Services page appears.
2) To view the users who have a service assigned, click the View Users link on the line
for the service. The Group – Service Usage page appears.
3) To display specific users, enter search criteria and click Find.
4) To return to the Group – Existing User Services page, click OK.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 115 OF 314
 5.19 IMRNs
Use this item on the Group – Resources menu page to assign or unassign numbers to
your group's IP Multimedia Routing Number (IMRN) pool.
You assign numbers to the IMRN pool from the unassigned numbers in your group's
phone numbers. Once a number is assigned to the IMRN pool it is removed from your
group's pool of numbers and cannot be assigned to a user or service.

5.19.1 List IMRNs

Use the Group – IMRNs page view the numbers in your group's IMRN pool.

Figure 89 Group – IMRNs

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click IMRNs. The Group – IMRNs page
appears.
2) To display specific numbers, enter search criteria and click Find.
3) Click OK to return to the previous page.

5.19.2 Assign IMRNs

Use the Group – Assign IMRNs page to assign phone numbers to your group's IMRN
pool. You can assign phone numbers in your group’s number pool that are unassigned to
any user or service. The available numbers are the unassigned numbers in the pool of
your group's phone numbers.

Figure 90 Group – Assign IMRNs

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 116 OF 314
 1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click IMRNs. The Group – IMRNs page
appears.
2) Click Add. The Group – Assign IMRNs page appears.
3) Select the ranges from which you want to assign numbers in the Available Range(s)
column and then click Add >. The numbers appear in the Available IMRNs column.
4) Select the number or numbers to assign in the Available IMRNs column and click
Add >.
You can select some or all of the items in a column. Items are listed in numerical
order. To select several items in sequential order, click the first item, hold down the
SHIFT key on the keyboard, and click the last item. To select several items, but not in
a particular order, click the items while holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard.
To assign all the available numbers, click Add All >>.
Assigned phone numbers appear in the Assign column.
5) To remove some numbers from the Assign column, select the numbers and click
Remove <.
To remove all numbers, click Remove All <<.
6) To save your changes and display the previous page, click OK.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel.

5.19.3 Unassign IMRNs

You use the Group – IMRNs page to unassign a range of numbers from your group's
IMRN pool.
You use the Group – Unassign IMRNs page to unassign some numbers from a range of
numbers in your group's IMRN pool.

Figure 91 Group – IMRNs (Unassign IMRN Range)

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 117 OF 314
 Figure 92 Group – Unassign IMRNs

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click IMRNs. The Group – IMRNs page
appears.
To unassign a range of numbers:
2) Check the Delete box in the row of the number range to unassign and click Apply.
To unassign some numbers in a range:
3) Click Edit in the row of the range. The Group – Unassign IMRNs page appears.
4) In the Assigned IMRNs column, select numbers to unassign and click Remove <.
The numbers are moved to the Unassigned IMRNs column.
To move all numbers to the Unassigned IMRNs column, click Remove All <<.
5) Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 118 OF 314
 5.20 Mobile Subscriber Directory Numbers
Use the Group – Mobile Subscriber Directory Numbers page to view the mobile subscriber
directory numbers assigned to your group and how they are assigned. This page is only
displayed for groups in a service provider.
Mobile subscriber directory numbers are assigned to users with the BroadWorks Mobility
service.

Figure 93 Group – Mobile Subscriber Directory Numbers

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Mobile Subscriber Directory

Numbers. The Group – Mobile Subscriber Directory Numbers page appears.
2) To search for specific number, enter your search criteria and click Search. Or to
display all mobile subscriber directory numbers, click Search without entering any
criteria.
This page is a list page. Depending on the number of pages of data in a list, list
pages allow you to search several different ways. You can click the heading of a
column to change the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the
data to specify search criteria, or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous.
For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started
Web Interface Administration Guide.
3) Click OK to return to the previous page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 119 OF 314
 6 Services Menu

This chapter contains sections that correspond to items on the Group – Services menu
page, except for items related to managing services as virtual users.

Figure 94 Group – Services Menu (Top of Page)

The following items on the Group – Services menu page are covered in this chapter:
 Basic menu
This menu displays the items that all group administrators can use:
− CommPilot Call Manager
− Exchange Integration
− Integrated IM&P
− LDAP Integration
− Music/Video On Hold
− Pre-alerting Announcement
− Voice Messaging
− Voice Portal
 Advanced menu
This menu displays the items that group administrators can use only if such functions
have been assigned to them:
− Advice Of Charge

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 120 OF 314
 − BroadWorks Mobility
− Custom Ringback Group
− Enterprise Trunk
− Group Night Forwarding
− Polycom Phone Services
− Preferred Carrier Group
− Series Completion
− Third-Party Voice Mail Support
− Session Admission Control Group

NOTE: For information about management of all BroadWorks user administration functions
provided by the menu items for virtual users, for example, Route Point, see the BroadWorks
Application Server Group Web Interface Administration Guide – Part 2.

6.1 Access the Group – Services Menu

Use the items on the Group – Services menu page to configure services (other than those
that you configure as virtual users, for example, one or more Auto Attendants or call
centers), and configure special functions, such as a user’s ability to access an external
directory and series completion.
On your Home page, on the Options list, click Services. The Group – Services menu
page appears.

6.2 CommPilot Call Manager

Use this item on the Group – Services menu page to:
 Configure Group Directory Display
 Configure Enterprise Directory Display
The CommPilot Call Manager offers users in your group access to the Group Directory
through the GROUP tab. If your group is part of an enterprise, the CommPilot Call
Manager instead offers access to the Enterprise Directory through the ENTERPRISE tab.
Configure access to these directories using the Group – CommPilot Call Manager page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 121 OF 314
 6.2.1 Configure Group Directory Display
The GROUP tab in the CommPilot Call Manager displays the contents of the group
directory, lists the contents of department and web directories, and can be used to search
for individual names. A group directory search displays up to 100 results.
You can use the Group – CommPilot Call Manager page to restrict the information
displayed in the GROUP tab or hide the tab altogether.

Figure 95 Group – CommPilot Call Manager

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click CommPilot Call Manager. The Group –
CommPilot Call Manager page appears.
2) Select the group directory configuration by selecting one of these choices:
− Display Group Directory: Allows users to view the contents of the group directory,
list the contents of department and web directories, and search for individual
names within the GROUP tab of the CommPilot Call Manager.
− Hide Group Directory: Hides the GROUP tab of the CommPilot Call Manager.
− Display Limited Group Directory (search only): Allows users only to search for
individual names within the GROUP tab of the CommPilot Call Manager. For
performance reasons, this option is recommended for groups with very large
directories.
3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 122 OF 314
 6.2.2 Configure Enterprise Directory Display
The ENTERPRISE tab in the CommPilot Call Manager displays the contents of the
enterprise directory, lists the contents of department and web directories, and can be used
to search for individual names. An enterprise directory search displays up to 100 results.
You can use the Group – CommPilot Call Manager page to restrict the information
displayed in the ENTERPRISE tab or hide the tab altogether.

Figure 96 Group – CommPilot Call Manager

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click CommPilot Call Manager. The Group –
CommPilot Call Manager page appears.
2) Select the enterprise directory configuration by selecting one of these choices:
− Display Enterprise Directory: Allows users to view the contents of the enterprise
directory, list the contents of department and web directories, and search for
individual names within the ENTERPRISE tab of the CommPilot Call Manager.
− Hide Enterprise Directory: Hides the ENTERPRISE tab of the CommPilot Call
Manager.
− Display Limited Enterprise Directory (search only): Allows users only to search
for individual names within the ENTERPRISE tab of the CommPilot Call
Manager. For performance reasons, this option is recommended for most
enterprises due to the large number of users typically present in the enterprise
directory.
3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 123 OF 314
 6.3 Integrated IM&P
Use this menu item on the Group – Services menu page to configure a service domain for
your group's Integrated IM&P service.

Figure 97 Group – Integrated IM&P

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Integrated IM&P. The Group – Integrated
IM&P page appears.
2) Configure IM&P domain for your group. Select one of the following options
− Select Use Service Provider Setting to use the service domain configured for your
service provider.
− Select IM&P service domain and enter the domain name to configure a different
domain for your group. The name can be at most 40 characters and cannot
contain spaces or the @ character.
3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

6.4 LDAP Integration

Use this menu item on the Group – Services menu page to enable or disable Lightweight
Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) integration.

6.4.1 Turn On or Off

Use the LDAP Integration page to turn on or off user access to a Lightweight Directory
Access Protocol (LDAP) directory.

NOTE: Before you turn LDAP Integration on, configure the LDAP server. For more information,
see section 12.15.1 Configure Group LDAP Directory.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 124 OF 314
 Figure 98 Group – LDAP Integration

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click LDAP Integration. The Group – LDAP
Integration page appears.
2) Click the LDAP Integration button you want: “On” to enable the service or “Off” to
disable the service.
3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

6.5 Music/Video On Hold

Use this menu item on the Group – Services menu page to:
 List Music/Video On Hold Settings Entries
 Add Music/Video On Hold Settings for Department
 Modify Music/Video On Hold Settings for Group or Department
 Delete Music/Video On Hold Settings for Department
Use the Music/Video On Hold page to manage Music/Video On Hold settings for the
group and departments. You can individually enable or disable playing Music/Video On
Hold for the Call Hold, Call Park, and Busy Camp On services for the group or department
and select a source file to play.
If a department has its own Music/Video On Hold settings, group settings do not apply.
For example, if Music/Video On Hold is not enabled for a department, the caller does not
hear any Music/Video On Hold. The group source is not played even if it is selected and
enabled.

NOTE: A department administrator can modify the settings for their department.

6.5.1 List Music/Video On Hold Settings Entries

Use the Group – Music/Video On Hold page to view the departments that have custom
Music/Video On Hold settings. The page always includes the group in this list.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 125 OF 314
 Figure 99 Group – Music/Video On Hold

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Music/Video On Hold. The Group –
Music/Video On Hold page appears.
2) To display the previous page, click OK or Cancel.

6.5.2 Add Music/Video On Hold Settings for Department

Use the Group – Music/Video On Hold Add page to customize Music/Video On Hold
service for a department.
You can enable or disable the playing of Music/Video On Hold for specific services and
select the audio source for these services. You can select an external identity/device
profile as the audio source for Music/Video On Hold.

NOTE: The maximum allowed length of .WAV and .MOV files is 10 minutes.

Figure 100 Group – Music/Video On Hold Add (Department)

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Music/Video On Hold. The Group –
Music/Video On Hold page appears.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 126 OF 314
 2) Click Add. The Group – Music/Video On Hold Add page appears
3) From the Department drop-down list, select the department for which you want to
define custom settings.
The list box displays all departments within your group that do not have custom
Music/Video On Hold settings defined. If your group is part of an enterprise, the box
also displays departments created for the enterprise. If you select an enterprise-level
department, your Music/Video On Hold configuration changes will only apply to users
in that department that exist within your group.
4) Enable or disable Music/Video On Hold for individual services:
− Enable music/video during Call Hold to play the Music/Video On Hold message
for held callers.
− Enable music/video during Call Park to play Music/Video On Hold message for
parked callers.
− Enable music/video during Busy Camp On to play the Music/Video On Hold
message for camped callers.

NOTE: If Music/Video On Hold is disabled for a service, no Music/Video On Hold is played for
that service. (Group Music/Video On Hold is not played.)

5) From the Preferred Audio Codec drop-down list, select an audio codec.

NOTE: It is not recommended to use high compression rate codecs, such as G.729 and AMR
when pure music is being streamed because of the loss of quality.

6) Select the source of the message to play.

− To play music defined at the system level, check System Defined Music/Video.
− To play music from an external source, check External Source.
− To play music from a custom file, check System Defined Music/Video for now.
When you save your changes and return to the Music/Video On Hold page,
select this department on the list to modify its Music/Video On Hold settings. You
can then upload your custom file using the Music/Video On Hold Modify page that
appears.
7) If you checked External Source, select one of the following options:
− Select Identity/Device Profile to specify an identity/device profile as the external
Music/Video On Hold source. The Identity/Device Profile area appears where
you can specify the identity/device profile to use.

Figure 101 Music/Video On Hold Modify – Identity/Device Profile Option

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 127 OF 314
 Setting Name Values Description

Identity/Device The drop-down list contains The name of the identity/device profile. Only
Profile Name * the available identity/device identity/device profiles that support Music On
profiles. Hold appear on the list.

Line/Port * Maximum 80 characters. The line, port number, or SIP address,

Can contain a leading +, depending on the type of the identity/device
letters, digits and the profile you selected.
following characters: -, _, !, Not available in IMS deployments.
~, *, (, ), periods, and single
quotes.

Domain The drop-down box lists the The domain of the device.
available domains.

Public Identity Maximum 161 characters in The SIP address.

user@domain format. The Available only in IMS deployments.
user part can only contain
letters, digits, and the
following characters: -, _, !,
~,*, (, ), periods, and single
quotes.
The available domains are
listed in the drop-down box.

Port Number The drop-down list displays The device port number used for the external
the ports available on the Music/Video On Hold source. Note that the
device. field is only displayed when static line
ordering is enabled for the identity/device
profile type.

Contact Can only contain letters, A SIP contact address. Examples:

digits, and the following sip:[Link]:40070
characters: -, _, !, ~, *, (, ),
&, =, +, $, ?, /, period, sip:2403645125@[Link]:23590
semicolon, or single quotes. sip:2403645286@[Link]:40036;user
=phone;transport=udp
Only available for identity/device profile types
that allow static registrations.

You can also reconfigure the identity/device profile by clicking Configure

Identity/Device Profile, if shown. The Identity/Device Profile Modify page appears.
− Select None to define no identity/device profile.
8) Save your changes. Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous
page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

6.5.3 Modify Music/Video On Hold Settings for Group or Department

Use the Group – Music/Video On Hold Modify page to modify the Music/Video On Hold
settings for the group or for a selected department.
You can select a different Music/Video On Hold source for internal calls.

NOTE: The maximum length allowed for .WAV and .MOV files is 10 minutes.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 128 OF 314
 Figure 102 Group – Music/Video On Hold Modify – General Settings

[Link] General Settings

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Music/Video On Hold. The Group –
Music/Video On Hold page appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the group or a department. The Group –
Music/Video On Hold Modify page for the group or selected department appears. The
General Settings tab is displayed by default.
3) Enable or disable Music/Video On Hold for individual services as follows:
− Enable music/video during Call Hold to play the Music/Video On Hold message
for held callers.
− Enable music/video during Call Park to play Music/Video On Hold message for
parked callers.
− Enable music/video during Busy Camp On to play the Music/Video On Hold
message for camped callers.
4) From the Preferred Audio Codec drop-down list, select an audio codec. The default is
“None”.

NOTE: It is not recommended to use high compression rate codecs, such as G.729 and AMR
when pure music is being streamed (because of the loss of quality).

5) Select the source of the Music/Video On Hold message from the following options:
− Check System Defined Music/Video to use the message defined at the system
level.
− Check External Source to download the audio and/or video file from an external
source.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 129 OF 314
 − Check Custom Music/Video File to use a custom file.
6) If you selected External Source:
− Select Identity/Device Profile to specify an identity/device profile as the external
Music/Video On Hold source. When you click this button, a new area of controls
appears, allowing you to specify the identity/device profile.

Figure 103 Music/Video On Hold Modify – Identity/Device Profile Option

Setting Name Values Description

Identity/Device Selected from the list The name of the identity/device profile. Only
Profile Name * provided on the web page. identity/device profiles that support Music On
Hold appear on the list.

Line/Port * A valid line/port in The line, port number, or SIP address,

user@domain format. depending on the type of the identity/device
The user part can be from 1 profile you selected.
through 80 characters and Not available in IMS deployments.
can contain a leading +,
letters, digits, and the
following characters: -, _, !,
~, *, (, ), periods, and single
quotes.
The drop-down box lists the
available domains.

Public Identity Maximum 161 characters in The SIP address.

user@domain format. The Available only in IMS deployments.
user part can only contain
letters, digits, and the
following characters: -, _, !,
~,*, (, ), periods, and single
quotes.
The available domains are
listed in the drop-down box.

Port Number The drop-down list displays The device port number used for the external
the ports available on the Music/Video On Hold source. Note that the
device. field is only displayed when static line
ordering is enabled for the identity/device
profile type.

Contact Can only contain letters, A SIP contact address. Examples:

digits, and the following sip:[Link]:40070
characters: -, _, !, ~, *, (, ),
&, =, +, $, ?, /, period, sip:2403645125@[Link]:23590
semicolon, or single quotes. sip:2403645286@[Link]:40036;user
=phone;transport=udp
Only available for identity/device profile types
that allow static registrations.

You can also re-configure the identity/device profile by clicking Configure

Identity/Device Profile, if shown. The Identity/Device Profile Modify page appears.
− Select None to assign no identity/device profile.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 130 OF 314
 7) If you selected Custom Music/Video File, select the file or files to play.
− Select a file with your greeting from the Audio drop-down list.
− If your Music/Video On Hold service has video support enabled, you can also
select a file from the Video drop-down list.
8) To define a different source for internal calls, select the Internal Calls Settings tab.
This saves your current changes.
9) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

[Link] Internal Calls Settings

You use Internal Calls Settings tab on the Group – Music/Video On Hold Modify page to
specify Music/Video On Hold settings for internal calls.

Figure 104 Group – Music/Video On Hold Modify – Internal Calls Settings

1) Check Use Alternate Source for Internal Calls to use the Music On Hold under the
Internal Calls Settings tab for internal calls. When unchecked, the Music On Hold
under the General Settings tab is used for internal calls.
2) Specify the source for internal calls. For information about the settings available on
this tab, see section [Link] General Settings.
3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 131 OF 314
 6.5.4 Delete Music/Video On Hold Settings for Department
Use the Group – Music/Video On Hold Modify page to delete the Music/Video On Hold
settings for a department.
When there are no Music/Video On Hold settings for a department, the group settings are
used.

Figure 105 Group – Music/Video On Hold Modify – General Settings

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Music/Video On Hold. The Group –
Music/Video On Hold page appears.
2) Click Edit on any item in the row for the department. The Group – Music/Video On
Hold Modify page for the department appears. The General Settings tab is displayed
by default.
3) To delete Music/Video On Hold for the department, click Delete. The previous page
appears.

NOTE: A department administrator cannot delete Music/Video On Hold settings.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 132 OF 314
 6.6 Pre-alerting Announcement
The Pre-alerting Announcement service allows users to play a message to callers before
ringing the user’s phone.
Use this menu item on the Group – Services menu page to configure pre-alerting
announcement settings for the group.

Figure 106 Group – Pre-alerting Announcement

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Pre-alerting Announcement. The Group
– Pre-alerting Announcement page appears.
2) Specify whether the announcement can be interrupted by the caller, and if yes, how.
Select from the following:
− Do not allow
− Interrupt with any digit
− Interrupt with digit sequence, and specify the sequence (from 1 through 10
characters, can only contain digits and * and # characters).
3) For the Audio Announcement or Video Announcement settings, select from the
following:
− None
− URL, and enter the URL address where the announcement is stored. The URL
should be in the following format: http/[Link] name>[<:port>][path], for
example, [Link]
− Custom, and select a custom announcement file from the drop-down list.
4) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and returns
to the previous page.
To cancel your changes and return to the previous page, click Cancel.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 133 OF 314
 6.7 Exchange Integration
The Exchange Integration service integrates Microsoft Exchange Calendar with the
Receptionist Enterprise and Receptionist Small Business services.
Use the Exchange Integration menu item on the Group – Services menu page to
configure the Exchange Integration settings.

Figure 107 Group – Exchange Integration

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Exchange Integration. The Group –
Exchange Integration page appears.
2) For Exchange Integration, select On to enable the service, or select Off to disable the
service.
3) In the Exchange URL text box, type the URL of the Microsoft Exchange server to use.
The URL can be a maximum of 256 characters and should be in the following format:
http/[Link] name/IP address>[<:port>][path]. This information is required
when the Exchange Integration service is turned on.
4) In the Exchange User Name and Exchange User Password text boxes provide the
user name and password for the Exchange server. The user name can be from 1
through 64 characters and the password from 1 through 104 characters. This
information is required when the Exchange Integration service is turned on.
5) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 134 OF 314
 6.8 Voice Messaging
Use this menu item on the Group – Services menu page to configure voice messaging.
The Voice Messaging service allows a user to control their voice messaging attributes, for
example, to provide a personalized greeting to callers and to record messages from a
caller for calls that are not answered within a specified number of rings or for calls that
receive busy treatment.

NOTE: Use this section to configure the Voice Messaging server that is integrated with the
system.

6.8.1 Configure Voice Messaging

Use the Group – Voice Messaging page to determine the configuration to use for your
group’s voice-messaging server, to allow users to configure their own Advanced Settings
for voice mail, and to enable sending voice messages to an entire group (when available).

NOTE: The phone number for the voice portal must be set for the Voice Messaging service to
function. For more information, see section 6.9.1 Configure Voice Portal.

Figure 108 Group – Voice Messaging

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Voice Messaging. The Group – Voice
Messaging page appears.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 135 OF 314
 2) Use the Mail Server for Group Members control to determine whether your group will
use the mail server configured by your system provider, or another mail server that
you specify on this page. If you choose the System Provider Mail Server option, you
do not have to specify the information listed in the Default Group Mail Server area of
the page.

NOTE: If you select System Provider Mail Server and save the selection, only your administrator
can change the selection.

3) Check or uncheck the Allow users to configure their Voice Mail Advanced Settings
box.
4) Check or uncheck the Allow "Send Message to Entire Group" in Voice Message
Retrieval Compose/Forward Menus box. This control only appears if your system
provider administrator, service provider administrator, or enterprise administrator has
limited the scope of the voice portal to the group level.
5) If you selected the Default Group Mail Server option above, configure the group mail
server. In the Default Group Mail Server Settings area of the page, enter or select the
following information.

NOTE: If you selected System Provider Mail Server, the information listed in the Default Group
Mail Server area of the page has no effect and the system settings apply.

Setting Name Values Description

Mail Server ID 1 through 80 characters. The IP address or name of the voice

Mail Server.

Mail Server Protocol The drop-down box lists The mail protocol used by the
the possible protocols. specified server.

Delete all messages marked Check or uncheck the box. Eliminates all messages marked for
for deletion when using IMAP deletion.

Group Default Full Mailbox The drop-down box lists The default size of the user’s voice
Limit the possible values. mailbox on the group’s mail server. It
can be overridden for individual
users, if required.

Group Default Message On, Off “On” allows deletion of “expired”

Aging messages from the server. An
expired message was saved by the
user and has been stored on the
server for more time than the period
specified in the Hold Period input box
but the user has not logged in to
his/her voice mail since the message
expired. When users log in to their
voice mail, they can save any expired
messages. The Hold Period begins
again every time users save expired
messages. Applies only if users have
logged in to their voice mail and have
not resaved the expired messages.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 136 OF 314
 Setting Name Values Description

Group Default Hold Period The drop-down box lists The number of days messages saved
the possible values. by a user, are stored on the server
before they become “expired”
messages. Applies only if Group
Default Message Aging is set to “On”
and the user has logged in to his/her
voice mail and has not resaved the
expired messages.

6) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

6.9 Voice Portal

Use this item on the Services menu page to configure the voice portal.
In XS mode, an extended scope of the voice portal is available, which allows the voice
portal to provide its functions to any user on the system calling into it. The extended scope
voice portal provides a full set of functions to users in a group or enterprise/service
provider and a limited set of functions to every other user on the system.

6.9.1 Configure Voice Portal

Use the Group – Voice Portal page to enable or disable the use of the voice portal, to
configure the voice portal, and to add or modify the password for voice portal
administrators in the group. All voice portal administrators share the same password and
can use their phone and the voice portal to change the announcements for Auto
Attendants.
You can specify the phone number users without the Voice Messaging User service call to
access Voice Messaging using the voice portal. One number is used for all services; if
users do not have a service assigned, they do not hear options for that service in the
menu when calling this number.

NOTE: The phone number (or extension) for the voice portal must be set for the Voice
Messaging service to function.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 137 OF 314
 Figure 109 Group – Voice Portal

Figure 110 Group – Voice Portal (XS Mode)

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Voice Portal. The Group – Voice Portal
page appears.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 138 OF 314
 2) To change the voice portal ID, click Change User ID. The Group – Change User ID
page appears. Enter the new voice portal ID, select the domain from the drop-down
list, and then click OK. The Group – Voice Portal page appears.
3) For Voice Portal, select On to activate the portal; select Off to deactivate it.
4) For Extended Scope Portal, select On to activate the extended-scope portal; select
Off to deactivate it. This setting is only available in XS mode.
5) Type or select information to configure the voice portal. The input boxes include the
following.
Setting Name Values Description

Name 1 through 30 characters. The name of the voice portal.

Phone Number The drop-down box lists the Users dial this number to access
possible values. Voice Messaging and other services.
The activation status of the assigned
phone number is displayed to the
right of the number under the
Activated column. The status is not
shown if the phone number is set to
“None”.

Extension Must be unique within your The extension of the voice portal.
group. Extensions can vary
in length within the limits
configured for your group.

Public Identity TBD The SIP address of the voice portal.

Available only in IMS deployments.

Calling Line ID Phone 1 through 20 digits (3 The phone number to be displayed

Number through 22 digits in E.164 on lines with Caller ID. Note that this
format including the + box only appears when the CLID
(Not available in XS mode.) symbol). Spaces and policy in effect for the voice portal is
dashes are allowed but are to use a configurable CLID.
not included in the phone
number.

Calling Line ID Last Name 1 through 30 characters. This is the last name to be displayed
Cannot contain %, +, on lines with Caller ID
backslashes, double quotes,
or extended ASCII
characters.

Calling Line ID First Name 1 through 30 characters. This is the first name to be displayed
Cannot contain %, +, on lines with Caller ID
backslashes, double quotes,
or extended ASCII
characters.

Hiragana Last Name 1 through 30 characters. Designed for specific markets. This
input box does not appear unless
configured by your system
administrator

Hiragana First Name 1 through 30 characters. Designed for specific markets. This
input box does not appear unless
configured by your system
administrator.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 139 OF 314
 Setting Name Values Description

Language * The drop-down box lists all The language for the initial greeting
languages configured for and login messages for calls to the
your system. voice portal from outside the group.
After login has been completed, the
user's language becomes the
language of the call. For calls from
inside the group, the caller's
language is used throughout the call.
A language change is effective on the
next call to the voice portal.

Time Zone The drop-down box lists time Time zone of the voice portal.
zones to choose from.

Network Class of Service The drop-down box lists Determines the type of calls allowed
(Not available in XS mode) network classes of service for the voice portal.
assigned to your group.

Aliases SIP addresses in Up to three alternative SIP addresses

user@domain format. The for the voice portal.
user part can contain a
leading +, letters, digits, and
the following characters: -,
_, !, ~, *, (, ), periods, or
single quotes.
The drop-down box lists the
available domains.

6) Check or uncheck the Allow Phone Numbers or Voice Mail Aliases on login in addition
to Extensions box. When checked, users who do not call from their own extensions
(or from a phone number defined as a Voice Messaging alias) are prompted for a
mailbox ID instead of an extension. Validation is then made against extensions (as
usual), phone numbers, and voice portal aliases.
7) Check or uncheck the Use Voice Portal Wizard box. When checked, this option
enables a wizard application that forces users to change their password from the
default (or after an administrator has reset it), and to record their personalized name
before they can access the voice portal. This option also disables the "Press 3 to
delete your Personalized name" choice from the Personalized Name submenu of the
voice portal.
8) To reset the administrator password for the voice portal, type and retype a numeric
password, four through eight digits in length. The password is used by any group
administrator to log in to the voice portal system to record Auto Attendant messages.
You can change this password using the voice portal or this web page at any time.
9) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 140 OF 314
 6.10 Advice Of Charge
Use this item on the Group – Services menu page to view the Advice Of Charge service
settings for your group.

Figure 111 Group – Advice Of Charge

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Advice Of Charge. The Group – Advice
Of Charge page appears.
If Use Service Provider Settings is selected, the service provider-level configuration
applies to your group. If Use Group Settings is selected, the configuration displayed
on this page is in effect for the Advice Of Charge service in your group.
Delay between AoC-D notifications specifies the time in seconds between two
consecutive charge notifications sent to the user's device during a call.
2) Click OK to return to the previous page.

6.11 BroadWorks Mobility

Use this item on the Services menu page to view the BroadWorks Mobility settings for
your group.

Figure 112 Group – BroadWorks Mobility

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 141 OF 314
 1) On the Group – Services menu page, click BroadWorks Mobility. The Group –
BroadWorks Mobility page appears.
The page provides the following read-only information.
Setting Description

Use Service Provider When there is a check mark next to this option, service provider-level
Settings settings are used for the BroadWorks Mobility service in your service
provider.

Use Group Settings When there is a check mark next to this option, the settings displayed
on this page are used for the BroadWorks Mobility service in your group.
The settings are as listed in the following rows.

Enable Location When there is a check mark next to this option, BroadWorks Mobility
Services sends Service Control Function (SCF) queries to get the mobile
subscriber’s location content for calls that are terminated to the mobile
subscriber.

Enable MSRN Lookup When there is a check mark next to this option, BroadWorks Mobility
sends Service Control Function (SCF) queries to get the Mobile Station
Roaming Number (MSRN), in a GSM network, or Temporary Location
Directory Number (TLDN), in an ANSI-41 network, of the mobile
subscriber for least cost routing for calls that are terminated to the
mobile subscriber.

Enable Mobile State When there is a check mark next to this option, BroadWorks Mobility
Checking sends Service Control Function (SCF) queries to get the current power
state of the mobile device for the calls that are terminated to the mobile
subscriber. If the current state of the mobile device is “off”, the call is
forked to the mobile device.

Deny Call Originations When there is a check mark next to this option, BroadWorks Mobility
denies mobile originations.

Deny Call When there is a check mark next to this option, BroadWorks Mobility
Terminations denies calls terminated to the mobile device and does not alert the
mobile device for calls terminated to the desk phone.

Enable When there is a check mark next to this option, BroadWorks Mobility
Announcement sends network announcement suppression information to the mobile
Suppression network for calls anchored in BroadWorks.

2) Click OK to return to the previous page.

6.12 Custom Ringback Group

Use this item on the Services menu page to configure custom ringback group.
A ringback is the ringing heard by the calling party when they have dialed a number but it
has not yet been answered by the called party. Custom ringback tones are customizable
clips of recorded music, video, or other personalized audio content that you can substitute
for the default ringback. When someone calls you, instead of the default ringback, they
hear the custom ringback you specified.
BroadWorks allows you to specify both a custom audio ringback and custom video
ringback, at both the user and group level. What the caller hears or sees depends on the
capabilities of their phone, and which custom ringbacks the called party has configured.
Note that settings configured at the user level for the Custom Ringback User service
override the settings for the Custom Ringback Group service.
For audio-only callers, the situation is straightforward. If you specify a custom audio
ringback file, this is what they hear. Otherwise, they hear the system default ringback.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 142 OF 314
 For video-enabled callers, the “default” setting plays the custom audio file, if configured,
with no accompanying video component. If no custom audio file is configured, the caller is
played the system default ringback file.
The following table summarizes the behavior.
Audio Ringback Video Ringback Video-Capable Result
File File Caller

Y N N Audio ringback is used.

Y Audio ringback is used.

Y N Audio ringback is used.

Y Video ringback is used.

N Y N Custom Ringback does not

apply. System default
ringback is played.

Y Video ringback is used.

6.12.1 Configure Custom Ringback Group

Use the Group – Custom Ringback Group page to turn the feature on or off, and to
configure the custom ringback for the group.
The Custom Ringback Group allows you to specify the ringback files in audio and video
format for the group. Ringback is the sound callers hear while they wait for a call to be
picked up. You can select the system default, an URL, or a customized audio or video file.

NOTE: The maximum length allowed for .WAV and .MOV files is two minutes.

Figure 113 Group – Custom Ringback Group

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Custom Ringback Group. The Group –
Custom Ringback Group page appears.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 143 OF 314
 2) For Custom Ringback Group, select On to enable the service. Select Off to disable
custom ringback for the group.
3) Specify the Audio Ringback.
− Select Default to play the system default.
− Select URL and type the URL address to play audio ringback from a URL. The
URL should be in the following format: <http/https>://<domain name//IP
address>[<:port>][path], for example,
[Link]
− Select Personal Ringback File and select a file from the drop-down list to play a
custom ringback.
4) Specify the Video Ringback.
− Select Default to play the system default.
− Select URL and type the URL address to play video ringback from a URL. The
URL should be in the following format: <http/https>://<domain name/IP
address>[<:port>][path], for example,
[Link]
− Select Personal Ringback File and select a file from the drop-down list to play a
custom ringback.
5) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

6.13 Enterprise Trunk

NOTE: This applies only to groups that are part of a service provider. If your group belongs to
an enterprise, the enterprise trunks are set up by your enterprise administrator.

An enterprise trunk combines multiple trunk groups and allows the trunk groups to work
together to provide enhanced business trunking capabilities. You can assign subscribers
to an enterprise trunk, rather than to a single trunk group. These enterprise trunk
subscribers can originate or terminate calls through any of the trunk groups assigned to
the enterprise trunk. Thus, an enterprise trunk provides routing flexibility and redundancy
that is not possible with a single trunk group.
The Group – Enterprise Trunk page allows you to create enterprise trunks for your group.
This capability is linked to the Trunk Group feature and is made available when the Trunk
Group feature is assigned to your group.
Use the Group – Enterprise Trunk page to view and configure enterprise trunks for your
group. You access this page by selecting the Enterprise Trunk menu item on the Group –
Services menu page. The item is present only if the Trunk Group service is authorized for
the group.
There are two types of enterprise trunks: Weighted Routing and Ordered Routing. You
can create Ordered Routing enterprise trunks consisting of up to 10 trunk groups and
Weighted Routing enterprise trunks consisting of up to 100 trunk groups..
BroadWorks provides five different call routing policies:

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 144 OF 314
  Ordered Load Balancing policy: The trunk groups are ordered and the Application
Server selects each trunk group in turn following a round-robin algorithm.
 Overflow policy: The trunk groups are ordered and the Application Server selects
the first trunk group that has available capacity for a new terminating call. For
example, the Application Server does not choose the second trunk group until the first
trunk group has reached its capacity or is unreachable. The first trunk group on the
list is always selected unless it is not available to route the call.
 Most Idle policy: The Application Server always selects the trunk group that has the
fewest number of current originating or terminating calls and has available capacity for
a new terminating call.
 Least Idle policy: The Application Server always selects the trunk group that has the
greatest number of current originating or terminating calls and has available capacity
for a new terminating call.
 Weighted Overflow policy: Each trunk group is provisioned with a priority and a
weight. Starting with the trunk groups that have the highest priority (the lowest
numerical value), the Application Server selects a trunk group at that priority according
to a weighted random pick. A trunk group that has reached its capacity may not be
selected. If all trunk groups at a particular priority have reached their capacity, then
the Application Server applies the weights to randomly select a trunk group at the next
lower priority.

6.13.1 View Enterprise Trunks

Use the Group – Enterprise Trunk page to view the available enterprise trunks for the
group.

Figure 114 Group – Enterprise Trunk

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Enterprise Trunk. The Group –
Enterprise Trunk page appears.
2) Click OK, to return to the previous page.

6.13.2 Create Enterprise Trunk

To create an enterprise trunk, perform the following steps:
1) Add Enterprise Trunk
2) Configure Capacity Management and Assign Trunk Groups
3) Assign Priorities (This step is optional and applies only to Weighted Routing trunks.)
4) Add Users

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 145 OF 314
 [Link] Add Enterprise Trunk
Depending on the routing you want for your enterprise trunk to use, you have to use a
different page to create the enterprise trunk.
 To create an enterprise trunk that will use the weighted routing algorithm, use the Add
Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing page.
 To create an enterprise trunk that will use any other routing policy use the Add
Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing page.

[Link].1 Add Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing

Use the Enterprise – Add Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing page to add a new
enterprise trunk using weighted routing.
1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Enterprise Trunk. The Group –
Enterprise Trunk page appears.
2) Click Add by Weighted Routing. The Group - Add Enterprise Trunking using
Weighted Routing page appears.
The page has four tabs: Assign Trunk Groups, Assign Priorities, Add Users, and
Assigned Users. By default, the Assign Trunk Groups tab is appears.

NOTE: When you select another tab on this page, the Enterprise Trunk information is saved.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 146 OF 314
 Figure 115 Group – Add Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing

3) Type a name (from 1 through 30 characters) for the new enterprise trunk. This
information is mandatory.
4) From the drop-down list, select the Maximum number of reroute attempts.
5) From the drop-down list, select the Maximum number of reroute attempts within a
priority.
6) For the Route Exhaustion Action option, either:
− Select None
-or-
− Select Forward to Phone Number/SIP-URI and type the phone number or SIP
URI where you want to reroute the calls in case of route exhaustion.
A phone number must be from 2 through 30 digits (2 through 22 digits including
the leading + sign in E.164 number format). Additional spaces and dashes are
allowed but are not included in the number.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 147 OF 314
 A SIP URI must be at most 161 characters in user@domain format. The user
part can only contain a leading + sign, letters, digits and the following characters:
-, _, !, ~, *, (, ), periods, or single quotes. The domain part can be either a domain
name or an IP address, optionally followed by a colon and a port number. A
domain name can only contain letters, digits, periods, and dashes.
7) To save your changes, click OK. To save your changes and go to another tab, click
the tab you want. To exit without saving, click Cancel.

[Link].2 Add Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing

Use the Group – Add Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing page to add a new ordered
routing enterprise trunk for the group.

Figure 116 Group – Add Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Enterprise Trunk. The Group –
Enterprise Trunk page appears.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 148 OF 314
 2) Click Add by Ordered Routing. The Group - Add Enterprise Trunking using Ordered
Routing page appears. The page has three tabs: Assign Trunk Groups, Add Users,
and Assigned Users. The Assign Trunk Groups tab is displayed by default.

NOTE: When you select another tab on this page, the Enterprise Trunk information is saved.

3) Type a name (from 1 through 30 characters) for the new enterprise trunk. This
information is mandatory.
4) From the drop-down list, select the Maximum number of reroute attempts.
5) To select the routing algorithm, click one of the following: Ordered Load Balancing,
Overflow, Most Idle, or Least Idle.
6) For the Route Exhaustion Action option, either:
− Select None
-or-
− Select Forward to Phone Number/SIP-URI and type the phone number or SIP
URI where you want to reroute the calls in case of route exhaustion.
A phone number must be from 2 through 30 digits (2 through 22 digits including
the leading + sign in E.164 number format). Additional spaces and dashes are
allowed but are not included in the number.
A SIP URI must be at most 161 characters in user@domain format. The user
part can only contain a leading + sign, letters, digits and the following characters: -
, _, !, ~, *, (,), periods, or single quotes. The domain part can be either a domain
name or an IP address, optionally followed by a colon and a port number. A
domain name can only contain letters, digits, periods, and dashes.
7) To save your changes, click OK. To save your changes and go to another tab, click
the tab you want. To exit without saving, click Cancel.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 149 OF 314
 [Link] Configure Capacity Management and Assign Trunk Groups
Use the Assign Trunk Groups tab to configure enterprise trunk capacity management
settings and assign trunk groups to an enterprise trunk.

Figure 117 Group – Add Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing – Assign Trunk Groups

1) On the Add Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing or Add Enterprise Trunk using
Ordered Routing page, click the Assign Trunk Group tab.
2) Configure capacity management.
− To enable capacity management, select On. To disable it, select Off.
− In the Maximum Active Calls Allowed box, specify the capacity of the enterprise
trunk, that is, the maximum number of calls allowed at any one time. Note that
the number cannot exceed the number of Business Trunking License Units
(BTLUs) allocated for the group.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 150 OF 314
 − In the Capacity Exceeded Alarm Initial Value box, enter the number of calls for
the capacity exceeded initial value. When the capacity exceeded counter (the
counter that tracks the number of times a call exceeds the allowed capacity)
reaches this value, an alarm is generated. Note that an alarm is never generated
when the initial value is set to “0”.
− In the Capacity Exceeded Alarm Offset Value, enter the number of calls for the
capacity exceeded offset value. After the initial capacity exceeded count has
been reached, an alarm is generated every time the count reaches an exact
multiple of the offset value. Note that an alarm is never generated if the offset
value is set to “0”.
Example: If Capacity Exceeded Alarm Initial Value is set to “2” and Capacity
Exceeded Alarm Offset Value is set to “3”, an alarm is generated when the
capacity exceeded count reaches 2, 5, 8, 11, and so on.
3) Enter trunk group search criteria and click Search to display trunk groups that satisfy
your criteria, all just click Search to display all the trunk groups created for your group.
4) In the Available Trunk Groups column, select the trunk groups you want to add to the
enterprise trunk. Select some or all of the trunk groups. Trunk groups are listed in
alphabetical order.
To select several trunk groups listed in consecutive order, click the first trunk group
name you want and, while holding down the SHIFT key on the keyboard, click the last
trunk group name you want to select.
To select more than one non-consecutive trunk group, use your mouse to click the
trunk group names while holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard.
5) Click Add > to transfer selected trunk groups to the Assigned Trunk Groups column.
Or, to move all trunk groups, click Add All >>.
6) To save your changes, click OK. To exit without saving, click Cancel. To save your
changes and go to the next tab, select the tab you want.

NOTE: You can assign a maximum of 100 trunk groups to an enterprise trunk.

[Link] Assign Priorities

Use the Enterprise Trunk - Assign Priorities tab to assign priorities and weights to trunk
groups in an Enterprise Trunk. The trunk groups shown in this tab are those assigned to
the Enterprise Trunk using the Assign Trunk Groups tab.

NOTE: This applies only to Weighted Routing type trunks and is optional. By default all trunk
groups have the same priority and weight.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 151 OF 314
 Figure 118 Group – Enterprise Trunk – Assign Trunk Group Priorities

1) On the Add Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing click the Assign Priorities tab.
2) Next to each trunk group, select the priority from the Priority drop-down list. “1”
denotes the highest priority and “10” (default) the lowest. Enter the weight you want to
assign to each trunk group. The weight must be an integer from 1 through 65536 (the
default value is “50”). The higher the weight, the higher the probability of that trunk
group being selected for call termination within its priority when using the Weighted
Overflow routing policy.
3) To save your changes, click Apply. To save your changes and display the previous
page, click OK. To exit without saving, click Cancel. To save your changes and go to
the next tab, select the tab you want.

[Link] Add Users

Use the Enterprise Trunk – Assign Users page to assign users to an enterprise trunk. The
Available Users column is a searchable list that lists all trunk users in the enterprise that
are not assigned to any Enterprise Trunk. The Users to be Assigned column shows the
users that are to be assigned.

Figure 119 Group – Enterprise Trunk – Assign Users

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 152 OF 314
 1) On the Add Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing page or Add Enterprise Trunk
using Ordered Routing page, click the Add Users tab. The Enterprise Trunk – Assign
Users page appears.
2) In the Available Users column, select the users you want to add to the enterprise
trunk. Select some or all users. Users are listed in alphabetical order.
3) To select several users listed in consecutive order, click the first user name you want
and, while holding down the SHIFT key on the keyboard, click the last user name you
want to select.
4) To select more than one non-consecutive user, use your mouse to click the user
names while holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard.
5) Click Add > to transfer selected users to the Users to be Assigned column. Or, to
move all users, click Add All >>.
6) To save your changes, click Apply. To save your changes and go to another tab,
click the tab you want. To save your changes and display the previous page, click
OK. To exit without saving, click Cancel.

6.13.3 Assigned Users

Use the Enterprise Trunk – Assigned Users tab to view, modify, or delete users assigned
to the enterprise trunk.

Figure 120 Group – Enterprise Trunk – Assigned Users

[Link] View Assigned Users

Users can be searched based on User ID, Last Name, First Name, Phone Number,
Extension, Department, and Alternate Trunk Identity.
To view users assigned to an enterprise trunk:
1) On the Add Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing, Add Enterprise Trunk using
Ordered Routing, Modify Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing, or Modify
Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing page, click the Assigned Users tab. The
Enterprise Trunk – Assigned Users page appears.
2) Enter the search criteria you want and click Search to display the users satisfying
your search criteria. Or to display all users assigned to this enterprise trunk, just click
Search.
3) To display the previous page, click OK or Cancel.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 153 OF 314
 [Link] Modify User Information
1) On the Add Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing, Add Enterprise Trunk using
Ordered Routing, Modify Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing, or Modify
Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing page, click the Assigned Users tab. The
Enterprise Trunk – Assigned Users page appears.
2) Use the Search tool to display the enterprise trunk users.
3) Click Edit in the row for the user whose information you want to modify. The selected
user’s Profile Menu appears.
4) Modify user information as required.
For more information on modifying user information, see the BroadWorks Application
Server Group Web Interface Administration Guide – Part 2.

[Link] Delete User from Enterprise Trunk

1) On the Add Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing, Add Enterprise Trunk using
Ordered Routing, Modify Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing, or Modify
Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing page, click the Assigned Users tab. The
Enterprise Trunk – Assigned Users page appears.
2) Use the Search tool to display the enterprise trunk users.
3) Select the row for the user you want to delete and click Delete.
4) To exit the page without deleting the user, click Cancel.

NOTE: The Delete function cannot be undone. Once you click Delete, your deletion is final.
Press Cancel before you click Delete to avoid a deletion.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 154 OF 314
 6.13.4 Modify Enterprise Trunk
Use the Group – Modify Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing or Group – Modify
Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing to modify enterprise trunk information.

Figure 121 Group – Modify Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 155 OF 314
 Figure 122 Group – Modify Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Enterprise Trunk. The Group –
Enterprise Trunk page appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the enterprise trunk to edit. Depending on the
trunk type, the Group – Modify Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing or Group –
Modify Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing page appears.
3) Edit the enterprise trunk information.
For more information about the enterprise trunk attributes, see section 6.13.2 Create
Enterprise Trunk.
4) To save your changes, click Apply. To save your changes and go to another tab,
click the tab you want. To save your changes and display the previous page, click
OK. To exit without saving, click Cancel.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 156 OF 314
 NOTE: Selecting a different tab saves the current enterprise trunk information.

6.13.5 Delete Enterprise Trunk

Use the Group – Modify Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing or Group – Modify
Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing page to delete an enterprise trunk.
1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Enterprise Trunk. The Group –
Enterprise Trunk page appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the enterprise trunk to edit. Depending on the
trunk type, the Group – Modify Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing or Group –
Modify Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing page appears.
3) Click Delete. The Group – Enterprise Trunk page appears.
To exit the page without deleting the enterprise trunk, click Cancel.

NOTE: The Delete function cannot be undone. Once you click Delete, your deletion is final.

6.14 Group Night Forwarding

Use the Group – Group Night Forwarding page to configure the Group Night Forwarding
service for your group.

Figure 123 Group – Group Night Forwarding

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Group Night Forwarding. The Group –
Group Night Forwarding page appears.
2) Click On to activate the service, click Off to deactivate the service, or click Automatic
On to enable automatic activation.
3) If you selected automatic activation, select a time schedule and/or a holiday schedule
when the service should be automatically activated.
− In the Forward to phone number/SIP-URI text box, enter a phone number or SIP-
URI to redirect calls to. For example, you can decide to redirect calls to an Auto
Attendant or a voice mailbox.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 157 OF 314
 A phone number must be from 2 through 30 digits (2 through 22 digits including
the leading + sign in E.164 number format). Additional spaces and dashes are
allowed but are not included in the number.
A SIP URI must be at most 161 characters in user@domain format. The user
part can only contain a leading + sign, letters, digits and the following characters:
-, _, !, ~, *, (,), periods, or single quotes. The domain part can be either a domain
name or an IP address, optionally followed by a colon and a port number. A
domain name can only contain letters, digits, periods, and dashes.
Extensions and feature access codes (FACs) are also allowed as a redirecting
number. When you enter a feature access code, call processing after redirection
depends on the services assigned to the caller.
4) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

6.15 MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint

Use this item on the Group – Services menu page to configure the MWI Delivery to Mobile
Endpoint service settings.
The service allows users to have a notification send to their mobile phone when they
receive a new voice mail, fax, or video message if their phone has the short messaging
service (SMS) or message waiting indicator (MWI) capability.
The Group – MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint page allows you to create custom SMS
templates used to send additional information about the new messages to the user's
mobile phone. Such a template consists of a collection of pre-defined tags along with the
text to be included in the message. The tags are replaced at run time with the available
information.

NOTE: You can configure custom templates for your group only if your service/enterprise
administrator allows your group to use group-level templates.

This page lists the existing templates and allows you to enable and disable templates.
From this page you can also access pages to modify existing templates or create new
templates. You can create up to four templates per provisioned language to
accommodate different situations. The system determines which template to use based
on the number of new and existing messages.

NOTE: It is recommended that the language encoding of the administrator account you use to
configure a template for a language be compatible with the language encoding for that template.
Otherwise, the text containing characters with no matching encoding may be displayed
incorrectly.

6.15.1 View and Enable SMS Templates and Configure Sender Tag
Use the Group – MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint page to view and enable or disable
SMS templates used to send message delivery information to the mobile.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 158 OF 314
 Figure 124 Group – MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint. The
Group – MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint page appears.
2) To enable or disable a template, check or uncheck the Enable box in the row of the
template.
3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

6.15.2 Add MWI Delivery Custom Template

Use the Group – MWI Delivery Custom Template – Add page to add a new custom
template.
You can create up to four different templates per language, which are used to build the
contents of the message. The purpose of the multiple templates is to provide flexibility in
the message generated for different syntax required when communicating the existence of
single or multiple voice mail messages to the subscriber.
The possible template types are as follows:
 Single new message with no previous messages: This template is used when the
subscriber receives a single voice mail message while the mailbox is empty.
 Single new message with at least one previous message: This template is used
when the subscriber receives a single new voice mail message and there are existing
messages in the subscriber's voice mailbox.
 Multiple new messages: This template is used when there are more than one new
voice mail messages for the subscriber.
 Default: This template is used when the template that should be used is not
provisioned or has been disabled.
A template consists of up to six lines of text. For each line, you can select a tag and enter
the text to be included before and after the tag. In addition, the "no tag” option allows you
to add punctuation or additional text.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 159 OF 314
 At run time, the tags are replaced by the actual information when the SMS message is
crated from the template. If data for a tag is not available, the entire line corresponding to
that tag is not included in the message.
The available tags and their estimated length are as follows.
Tag Name Estimated Length

%VMNumber 10

%newMsgs 2

%totalMsgs 2

%callerName 15

%callerNumber 10

no tag 0

The estimated tag lengths are used to calculate the estimated character count of the
template. The number of characters in the message is estimated by counting the length of
the actual text including spaces (but excluding tags) and adding the estimated length of
each tag that appears in the message.
If the system administrator has restricted the maximum length of the message, the allowed
message length is displayed on the page.

Figure 125 Group – MWI Delivery Custom Template – Add

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 160 OF 314
 1) On the Group – Services menu page, click MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint. The
Group – MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint page appears.
2) Click Add. The Group – MWI Delivery Custom Template - Add page appears.
3) From the Language drop-down list, select the language for which you are creating the
template.
4) From the Type drop-down list, select the type of template to create.
5) Create the template, with up to six lines. A line includes components specifying a tag
and text.
− Enter the text that comes before the tag, select a tag from the drop-down list, and
then enter the text to follow the tag. The “no tag” tag selection allows you to add
punctuation or additional text.
− To add an additional line, click the + button to the right and repeat the previous
step.
The text of the template appears in the preview area of the page and the number
of characters in the message is displayed at the bottom of the page. If the system
administrator has restricted the maximum length of the message, the allowed
message length is also displayed.
6) Click OK to save your changes.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.
Example:
You can create a template with the “You have %newMsgs new messages and a total of
%totalMsgs messages.” text as follows:
 On the first line, type “You have” in the left text box, select the %newMsgs tag from
the drop-down list in the middle, and type “new messages” in the right text box.
 Click the + button to add a second line.
 On the second line, type “and the total of” in the left text box, select the %totalMsgs
tag from the drop-down list in the middle, and type “messages.” in the right text box.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 161 OF 314
 6.15.3 Modify MWI Delivery Custom Template
You use the Group – MWI Delivery Custom Template – Modify page to modify an existing
template.

Figure 126 Group – MWI Delivery Custom Template – Modify

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint. The
Group – MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint page appears.
2) Click Edit in the line of the template to edit. The Group – MWI Delivery Custom
Template – Modify page appears.
3) Modify the template as required. For information about configurable options available
on this page, see section 6.15.2 Add MWI Delivery Custom Template.
4) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 162 OF 314
 6.16 Polycom Phone Services
Use the Group – Polycom Phone Services page to integrate BroadWorks services with the
Polycom family phone services.

Figure 127 Group – Polycom Phone Services

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Polycom Phone Services. The Group –
Polycom Phone Services page appears.
2) For Polycom Phone Directory, check one or more of the following options:
− Include the Group’s Common Phone List into the Polycom Phone Directory
− Include the following Group Custom Contact Directory in the Polycom Directory
and select the directory from the drop-down list.
3) Click OK or Apply. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and returns
to the previous page. Click Cancel to return to the previous page without saving.

6.17 Preferred Carrier Group

Use this menu item on the Group – Services menu page to list preferred intraLATA,
interLATA, and international carriers for the group.

6.17.1 List Preferred IntraLATA, InterLATA, and International Carriers for Group
Use the Group – Preferred Carrier Group page to list the preferred intraLATA, interLATA,
and international carriers your administrator has assigned for your group.

Figure 128 Group – Preferred Carrier Group

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Preferred Carriers Group. The Group –
Preferred Carriers Group page appears.
2) To display the previous page, click OK.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 163 OF 314
 6.18 Series Completion
Use this item on the Group – Services menu page to:
 List Series Completion Groups
 Add Series Completion Group
 Modify or Delete Series Completion Group
Series Completion allows calls to be routed to the next available line, much like the Hunt
Group service. The difference is the caller dials a “real” directory number rather than a
“virtual” one and several lines ring at several phones.
This service is used to support Key System functionality. Key Systems typically ring all
available lines in a specified order when a call is incoming, regardless of the number
dialed to reach the company. For example, when calling a technical support hotline, the
user dials 1-800-555-HELP. That number rings line 1 of the company. If line 1 is busy, it
rings line 2. If line 2 is busy, it rings line 3 and so on. If all lines are busy, the call can be
sent to Voice Messaging or another assigned service of the group. If all lines or users of
this company were assigned to the series completion group, BroadWorks acts like a Key
System.

6.18.1 List Series Completion Groups

Use the Group – Series Completion page to list all current series completion groups.
From this page, you can add, modify, or delete a group.

Figure 129 Group – Series Completion

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Series Completion. The Group – Series
Completion page appears.
2) To display the previous page, click OK or Cancel.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 164 OF 314
 6.18.2 Add Series Completion Group
Use the Group – Series Completion Add page to add a series completion group.

Figure 130 Group – Series Completion Add

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Series Completion. The Group – Series
Completion page appears.
2) Click Add. The Group – Series Completion Add page appears.
3) Type the group name, from 1 through 80 characters. An asterisk (*) indicates
required data.
4) Assign users:
− To find a desired user, enter search criteria in the fields provided and click
Search. For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks
Getting Started Web Interface Administration Guide.
− In the Available Users column, select the users. You can select some or all of the
items in a column. Item names are listed in alphabetical order. To select several
items in sequential order, click the first name, hold down the SHIFT key on the
keyboard, and click the last name. To select several items, but not in a particular
order, click the names while holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard.
− To assign the selected users, click Add >. To assign all users (unselected) at
once, click Add All >>
5) Save your changes. Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous
page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 165 OF 314
 6.18.3 Modify or Delete Series Completion Group
Use the Group – Series Completion Modify page to modify or delete a group.

Figure 131 Group – Series Completion Modify

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Series Completion. The Group – Series
Completion page appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the group. The Group – Series Completion
Modify page appears.
3) To delete the group, click Delete. The previous page appears.
4) Edit the information for the group: Type or select information. An asterisk (*) indicates
required data.
5) Assign users:
− To find a desired user, enter search criteria in the fields provided and click
Search. For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks
Getting Started Web Interface Administration Guide
− In the Available Users column, select the users. You can select some or all of the
items in a column. Item names are listed in alphabetical order. To select several
items in sequential order, click the first name, hold down the SHIFT key on the
keyboard, and click the last name. To select several items, but not in a particular
order, click the names while holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard.
− To assign the selected users, click Add >. To assign all users (unselected) at
once, click Add All >>.
6) Unassign users:
In the Assigned Users column, select the users and click Remove <. To unassign all
users (unselected) at once, click Remove All <<.
7) Save your changes. Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous
page. To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the
previous page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 166 OF 314
 6.19 Third-Party Voice Mail Support
Use this item on the Group – Services menu page to enable or disable third-party voice
mail support.
Third-Party Voice Mail Support allows users to direct their busy and unanswered calls to a
third-party voice mail system, that is, one outside the BroadWorks system.

6.19.1 Turn On or Off

Use the Group – Third-Party Voice Mail Support page to enable or disable this service for
the group.

Figure 132 Group – Third-Party Voice Mail Support

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Third-Party Voice Mail Support. The
Group – Third-Party Voice Mail Support page appears.
2) To enable or disable the service, select On or Off.
3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page. To exit without saving, select another page
or click Cancel to display the previous page.

6.20 Session Admission Control Group

A session admission control (SAC) group is a set of access devices logically grouped
together. You create SAC groups to impose restrictions on the number of concurrent
sessions for a given set of access devices.
Group administrators with appropriate privileges can define SAC groups for their group.
Group-level SAC groups can include devices within the scope of that group, enterprise-
level devices for their enterprise, or any system devices.
You need full access privileges to session admission control settings to manage SAC
groups.
The following two figures show the Group – Session Admission Control Group page for a
group administrator with full access and read-only access privileges to SAC.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 167 OF 314
 Figure 133 Group – Session Admission Control Group

Figure 134 Group – Session Admission Control Group (Read-only)

6.20.1 View Session Admission Control Group

You use the Group – Session Admission Control Group page to view SAC groups for the
group.
1) On the Enterprise – Services menu page, click Session Admission Control Group.
The Enterprise – Session Admission Control Group page appears.
2) Click OK to return to the previous page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 168 OF 314
 6.20.2 Add Session Admission Control Group
Use the Group – Session Admission Control Group Add page to create a new SAC group.

Figure 135 Group – Session Admission Control Group Add

1) On the Enterprise – Services menu page, click Session Admission Control Group.
The Group – Session Admission Control Group page appears.
2) Click Add. The Group – Session Admission Control Group Add page appears.
3) Enter a unique name for the new SAC group, from 1 through 30 characters. Required
fields are marked with an asterisk.
4) Specify the Maximum number of concurrent sessions you want to allow for this SAC
group. The number cannot exceed the maximum number of concurrent subscriber
sessions allowed for the group as specified on the group’s Resources – Session
Admission Control Capacity page, if set. If the group limit if not set, this setting can be
from 0 through 999999.
5) To restrict the number of user-originated sessions, enter the Maximum number of
concurrent user originating sessions. This number can be from 0 through Maximum
number of concurrent sessions.
6) To restrict the number of user-terminated sessions, enter the Maximum number of
concurrent user terminating sessions. This number can be from 0 through Maximum
number of concurrent sessions.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 169 OF 314
 7) To avoid situations where other SAC groups use up all the session resources
allocated to your group, reserve sessions for the SAC group. Enter the number of
sessions in the Reserved number of concurrent sessions box. This number can be
from 0 through Maximum number of concurrent sessions.
8) To reserve user-originated sessions, enter the number of sessions in Reserved
number of concurrent user originating sessions reserved. This number can be from 0
through Reserved number of concurrent sessions.
9) To reserve user-terminated sessions, enter the number of sessions in Reserved
number of concurrent user terminating sessions reserved. This number can be from 0
through Reserved number of concurrent sessions.
10) To make this group the default SAC group for the group, check Default Session
Admission Control Group.

NOTE: One SAC group can be defined as the default SAC group to which new devices are
added. This includes any new devices added at system level, new devices added for the
enterprise, or new devices added for any group within the enterprise (if your group is part of an
enterprise).

11) To include the intra-SAC group sessions in the count of the total number of sessions
for the SAC group, check Count intra Session Admission Control group sessions.
12) To block emergency and repair calls when the call limit is reached for this SAC group,
check Block emergency and repair calls due to Session Admission Control limits.
13) Assign devices.

− Use the Search utility to find the devices you want to assign.
− In the Available Devices column, select the devices to assign to this SAC group
and click Add >. Or, to add all the available devices, click Add All >>.
You can select some or all of the items in a column. Item names are listed in
alphabetical order. To select several items in sequential order, click the first
name, hold down the SHIFT key on the keyboard, and click the last name. To
select several items, but not in a particular order, click the names while holding
down the CTRL key on the keyboard.
14) To save your changes click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 170 OF 314
 6.20.3 Modify or Delete Session Admission Control Group
Use the Session Admission Control Group – Session Admission Control Group Modify
page to modify an existing SAC group.

Figure 136 Group – Session Admission Control Group Modify

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Session Admission Control Group. The
Group – Session Admission Control Group page appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the SAC group you want to edit. The Session
Admission Control Group - Session Admission Control Group Modify page appears.
3) Type or select information as needed. For information about the parameters that
appear on this page, see section 6.20.2 Add Session Admission Control Group.
4) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

NOTE: If you have read-only SAC permissions, you can only view the information on this page
as illustrated in Figure 137.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 171 OF 314
 Figure 137 Group – Session Admission Control Group Modify (Read-only)

6.20.4 Delete Session Admission Control Groups

Use the Group – Session Admission Control Group page to delete an SAC group.

Figure 138 Group – Session Admission Control Group (Delete)

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Session Admission Control Group. The
Group – Session Admission Control Group page appears.
2) Check the Delete box in the row of the SAC group you want to delete.
3) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 172 OF 314
 WARNING: Once you delete an SAC group, your deletion is final.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 173 OF 314
 7 Service Scripts Menu

This chapter contains sections that correspond to each item on the Group – Service
Scripts menu page.

Figure 139 Group – Service Scripts Menu

The Group – Service Scripts – Basic menu displays the items that all group administrators
can use including:
 Configuration
 Load
 Logs

7.1 Access the Group – Service Scripts Menu

Use the Group – Service Scripts menu to enable or disable the capability to load Call
Processing Language (CPL) scripts, to load scripts, and to view the logs generated by a
script.
On your Home page, in the Options list, click Service Scripts. The Group – Service
Scripts menu page appears.
The items in the Service Scripts menu allow group administrators to use CPL scripts to
execute or customize call management features for all the users in a group. BroadSoft,
certified third-party developers, certified group administrators, or service providers
develop CPL scripts.
For example, a group administrator for a law firm may want to configure Call Notify so that
all incoming calls to all users trigger an e-mail notification to the billing department.
Configuring Call Notify automatically with a script means that an administrator does not
have to set that Call Notify instance for every user.

NOTE: To manage their own call management features, individual users can use their Service
Scripts menu to enable or disable the capability to load CPL scripts, to load scripts, and to view
the logs generated by a script. A script enabled by a user takes precedence over a script
enabled for the user’s group.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 174 OF 314
 7.2 Configuration
Use this item on the Group – Service Scripts menu page to enable or disable use of a
script for a group.

7.2.1 Enable or Disable Use of Script

Use the Group – Configuration page to enable or disable the use of a CPL script in the
group. On this page you can also view the contents of a script that has been loaded for
your group.

Figure 140 Group – Configuration

1) On the Group – Service Scripts menu page, click Configuration. The Group –
Configuration page appears. On this page, if a script has been loaded, the contents
of the script appear in the Script Source input box.
2) Click “Enabled” or “Disabled”. “Enabled” indicates the feature is on.
3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 175 OF 314
 7.3 Load
Use this item on the Group – Service Scripts menu page to load a CPL script for a group.

7.3.1 Load CPL Script

Use the Group – Load page to load a CPL script for the group.

Figure 141 Group – Load

1) On the Group – Service Scripts menu page, click Load. The Group – Load page
appears.
2) Select the source of the script file:
− To use a file on your computer, click Browse and then find and open the file. The
path to the file appears in the File text box.
− To use a file on your web server, type the address of the server in the URL text
box. A URL should be in the following format: http/[Link] name/IP
address>[<:port>][path].

NOTE: After a script has been loaded for your group, the contents of the script appear in the
Script Source input box on the Group – Configuration page.

3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 176 OF 314
 7.4 Logs
Use this item on the Group – Service Scripts menu page to view or clear logs from a CPL
script for a group.

7.4.1 View or Clear Logs from CPL Script

Use the Group – Logs page to view or clear the logs generated during execution of a CPL
script loaded for the group.

Figure 142 Group – Logs

1) On the Group – Service Scripts menu page, click Logs. The Group – Logs page
appears. The logs displayed in the Log trail box are the logs generated by and
specified in the script.
2) To clear the logs on display, check the Clear Logs box.
3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 177 OF 314
 8 Account/Authorization Codes Menu

This chapter contains sections that correspond to each item on the Group – Acct/Auth
Codes menu page.

Figure 143 Group – Acct/Auth Codes Menu

The Group – Acct/Auth Codes menu contains these Basic items:

 Administration
 Codes Management

8.1 Access Group – Account/Authorization Codes Menu

Use the Group – Acct/Auth Codes menu to create groups of users who are required to
enter a code before being allowed to continue with a call.
On your Home page, from the Options list, click Acct/Auth Codes. The Group –
Acct/Auth Codes menu page appears.
Account codes track the calls users make, for example, to a particular customer.
Authorization codes prevent users from making calls unless they have been given an
authorization code to do so.

8.2 Administration
Use this item on the Group – Acct/Auth Codes menu page to:
 Identify Users for Account Code Usage
 Identify Users for Authorization Code Usage

8.2.1 Identify Users for Account Code Usage

Use the Group – Administration page to:
 Identify the users who cannot make calls outside the group (or to other groups)
without entering an account code after a prompt (Mandatory restricted usage).
 Identify the users who can choose whether or not to enter a Feature Access Code
(FAC) and then to enter an account code after a prompt to make outside-group calls
[Optional (FAC-based) usage].
Optional usage is very useful to track and bill for calls to particular numbers, for
example, customer numbers.
 Remove account code usage restrictions for local and toll-free calls.
Calls made with account codes are reported to the billing records. Calls are connected
when a code of valid length (number of digits) is entered.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 178 OF 314
 Figure 144 Group – Administration (Account Codes)

1) On the Group – Acct/Auth Codes menu page, click Administration. The Group –
Administration page appears.
2) To display the version of the page for account codes, click “Account Code”.
3) Select the Number of Digits for account codes.
4) Click the Allow Local and Toll-Free Calls without Account/Authorization Code box to
turn the feature on (checked) or off (not checked).
5) Assign users to one of the Restricted Users lists.
− To find a desired user, enter search criteria in the fields provided and click
Search. For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks
Getting Started Web Interface Administration Guide.
− In the Non-restricted Users column, select the users. You can select some or all
of the items in a column. Item names are listed in alphabetical order. To select
several items in sequential order, click the first name, hold down the SHIFT key
on the keyboard, and click the last name. To select several items, but not in a
particular order, click the names while holding down the CTRL key on the
keyboard.
− To assign the selected users, click Add > beside the Restricted Users column to
which you want to assign the users: Mandatory Usage or Optional (FAC-based)
Usage. To move all users (unselected) at once, click Add All >> beside the list.
6) Unassign users from the Restricted Users lists.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 179 OF 314
 In the appropriate Restricted Users column, select the users and click Remove <
beside the list. To move all items (unselected) at once, click Remove All << beside
the list.
7) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

8.2.2 Identify Users for Authorization Code Usage

Use the Group – Administration page to:
 Identify the users who cannot make calls outside the group (or to other groups)
without entering an authorization code after a prompt.
 Remove authorization code usage restrictions for local and toll-free calls.
Calls made with authorization codes are reported to the billing records. Calls are
connected when a valid code is entered.
Outgoing calls restricted by the Outgoing Calling Plan or the Forwarded Transferred Calls
portion of the calling plan service will not be permitted. In addition, Simultaneous Ring
phone numbers that are outside the group will not ring if the user of the service is assigned
an Authorization Code.

Figure 145 Group – Administration (Authorization Codes)

1) On the Group – Acct/Auth Codes menu page, click Administration. The Group –
Administration page appears.
APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00
©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 180 OF 314
 2) To display the version of the page for authorization codes, click “Authorization Code”.
3) Type the Number of Digits for authorization codes.
4) Click the Allow Local and Toll-Free Calls without Account/Authorization Code box to
turn the feature on (checked) or off (not checked).
5) Assign users to the Restricted Users column.
− To find a desired user, enter search criteria in the fields provided and click
Search. For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks
Getting Started Web Interface Administration Guide.
− In the Non-restricted Users column, select the users. You can select some or all
of the items in a column. Item names are listed in alphabetical order. To select
several items in sequential order, click the first name, hold down the SHIFT key
on the keyboard, and click the last name. To select several items, but not in a
particular order, click the names while holding down the CTRL key on the
keyboard.
− To assign the selected users, click Add >. To move all users (unselected) at
once, click Add All >>.
6) Unassign users from the Restricted Users list.
In the Restricted Users column, select the users and click Remove <. To move all
users (unselected) at once, click Remove All <<.

NOTE: Trunk Group users can be listed in the restricted and non-restricted user lists.

7) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 181 OF 314
 8.3 Codes Management
Use this item on the Group – Acct/Auth Codes menu page to:
 View or Delete Account and Authorization Codes
 Add Account and Authorization Codes
To modify a code, delete the current code and add a replacement code.
The Codes Management page allows you to specify the required codes, with the proper
number of digits, which must be entered prior to the placement of calls by users restricted
by this service.

8.3.1 View or Delete Account and Authorization Codes

Use the Group – Codes Management page to view or delete account and authorization
codes. From this page, you can add account and authorization codes.

NOTE: If a six-digit length is specified for a code on the Group – Administration page and a
corresponding code is added on the Group – Codes Management page, if the code length is
changed, the original six-digit code is deleted from the list of codes on the Group – Codes
Management page.

Figure 146 Group – Codes Management

1) On the Group – Acct/Auth Codes menu page, click Codes Management. The Group
– Codes Management page appears.
2) To delete a code, check the Delete box for the code.
3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 182 OF 314
 8.3.2 Add Account and Authorization Codes
Use the Group – Codes Management Add page to add account and authorization codes.

Figure 147 Group – Codes Management Add

1) On the Group – Acct/Auth Codes menu page, click Codes Management. The Group
– Codes Management page appears.
2) Click Add. The Group – Codes Management Add page appears.
3) Type the information for the code. An asterisk (*) indicates required data.
The length of a code (number of digits) is specified on the Group – Administration
page.
4) Save your changes. Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous
page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 183 OF 314
 9 Call Center Menu

The Group – Call Center Menu contains items used to manage the Call Center service for
the group. For information and procedures on managing the Call Center service, see the
BroadWorks Application Server Group Web Interface Administration Guide – Part 2.

Figure 148 Group – Call Center Menu

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 184 OF 314
 10 Calling Plan Menu

This chapter contains sections that correspond to each item on the Group – Calling Plan
menu page.

Figure 149 Group – Calling Plan Menu

The Group – Calling Plan menu contains these items, which you use to manage calling
plans for the group and departments:
 Configuration menu
This menu displays the items that group administrators use to configure codes and
digit strings for calling plans:
− Codes Management
− Digit Strings
− Pinhole Digit Strings
− Transfer Numbers
 Management menu
This menu displays the items that group administrators use to manage calling plans:
− Incoming Calling Plan
− Outgoing Calling Plan
− Outgoing Digit Plan
− Outgoing Pinhole Digit Plan

10.1 Access Group – Calling Plan Menu

Use the Group – Calling Plan menu to manage calling plans for the group and
department.
On your Home page, in the Options list, click Calling Plan. The Group – Calling Plan
menu page appears.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 185 OF 314
 10.2 Codes Management
Use this item on the Group – Calling Plan menu page to configure authorization codes for
outgoing calls for the group and departments. The types of calls that require authorization
codes are determined by the Outgoing Calling Plan and Outgoing Digit Plan.

NOTE: This page only appears if authorization codes are required for some outgoing calls.

This section contains the following procedures:

 List Codes for Group and Departments
 Add or Delete Code for Group or Department

10.2.1 List Codes for Group and Departments

Use the Group – Codes Management page to list the authorization codes for the group
and departments. From this page, you add, modify, or delete codes for the group and
departments.

Figure 150 Group – Codes Management

1) On the Group – Calling Plan menu page, click Codes Management. The Group –
Codes Management page that contains the codes for the group and departments
appears.
2) To display the previous page, click OK.

10.2.2 Add or Delete Code for Group or Department

Use the Group – Codes Management Modify (Department) and the Group – Codes
Management Add (Department) pages to manage authorization codes for the group or a
selected department.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 186 OF 314
 Figure 151 Group – Codes Management Modify (Department)

Figure 152 Group – Codes Management Add (Department)

1) On the Group – Calling Plan menu page, click Codes Management. The Group –
Codes Management page that lists the codes for the group and departments appears.
2) In the Department column, click Group Default or the name of a department. The
Codes Management Modify (Department) page appears.
3) To delete a code for the group or selected department, check the Delete box in the
row of the code to delete and click Apply.

NOTE: Once you click Apply the code if deleted and the action cannot be undone.

4) To add a code, click Add. The Codes Management Add (Department) page appears.
5) Type the information for the new code. An asterisk (*) indicates required data. The
Account/Authorization Code must be from 10 through 99999999999999.
6) Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

NOTE: To modify a code, delete it and then add the changed code.

10.3 Digit Strings

Use this menu item on the Group – Calling Plan menu page to:
 List or Delete Digit Strings
APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00
©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 187 OF 314
  Add Digit String
 Modify Digit String
The Digit Strings page allows you to set up a custom digit string plan. You can assign digit
strings to your group, a department, or a user in your group, to restrict the types of calls
users can make or receive. Digit strings consist of a sequence of digits, which can include
special characters, and each string is given a name. The digit strings are available for
both incoming and outgoing plans.
When a call is placed, forwarded, transferred, or received, the number is checked against
assigned digit strings (whether assigned to the individual user or to their department or
group). Note that if the users do not have individual assignments, their department digit
string settings take effect. If the users are not assigned to a department, then the group
default assignments take effect. If the number matches a digit pattern, the corresponding
action is applied to the call; for example, allow or block.

10.3.1 List or Delete Digit Strings

Use the Group – Digit Strings page to list the current digit strings configured for the
Outgoing and Incoming Calling Plans for the group. On this page, you can also delete
digit strings. From this page, you can add digit strings.

Figure 153 Group – Digit Strings

1) On the Group – Calling Plan menu page, click Digit Strings. The Group – Digit
Strings page that contains the digit strings defined for the group appears.
This page is a list page. Depending on the number of pages of data in a list, list
pages allow you to search several different ways. You can click the heading of a
column to change the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the
data to specify search criteria, or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous.
For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started
Web Interface Administration Guide.
2) To delete a digit string, check the Delete box for the string.
3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

10.3.2 Add Digit String

Use the Group – Digit Strings Add page to add digit strings for the Outgoing and Incoming
Calling Plans for the group.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 188 OF 314
 Figure 154 Group – Digit Strings Add

1) On the Group – Calling Plan menu page, click Digit Strings. The Group – Digit
Strings page appears.
2) Click Add. The Group – Digit Strings Add page appears.
3) In the Name text box, type the name for the string.
4) In the Digit String text box, enter the digit string.
In addition to digits (0 through 9), the following characters are allowed in a digit string:
Character Description Examples

? Matches any single digit or allowed symbol; that is, it “202555????”

matches any of the following: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,
*, and #. A digit string can contain one or more
question marks (?) and a question mark can appear in
any position except as the national prefix or country
code.

* Matches zero or more digits, and is allowed only at the “301*” matches any string
end of the digit string. beginning with 301, such
as “3015550100”.

[] Matches a single digit that satisfies the specified range “[1,3,7]”, “[4-6]”, “[5-7, 9]”
of digits. A consecutive range is indicated with a
hyphen “-“, while a nonconsecutive range is indicated
with a comma “,”. Hyphens and commas can be used
in combination.

+ Matches an E.164 digit pattern and is only allowed as +12405551000

the first character of the pattern.

# Matches only itself and is used to denote a service #22

code.

\* Matches an asterisk (*) and is used to denote a service “\*11” represents “*11”
code. Backslash (\) is used to avoid conflict with the *
wildcard character.

5) Save your changes. Click OK. The previous page appears.

To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 189 OF 314
 10.3.3 Modify Digit String
Use the Group – Digit Strings Modify page to modify a digit string for the Outgoing and
Incoming Calling Plans for the group.

Figure 155 Group – Digit Strings Modify

1) On the Group – Calling Plan menu page, click Digit Strings. The Group – Digit
Strings page that contains the existing digit strings for the calling plans for the group
appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the string. The Group – Digit Strings Modify page
appears.
3) To delete the string, click Delete. The previous page appears.
4) To modify the string, type new data for the string. For information about the
characters allowed in a digit string, see section 10.3.2 Add Digit String.
5) Save your changes. Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous
page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

10.4 Pinhole Digit Strings

Pinhole digit strings are used to override calling restrictions imposed by the Outgoing
Calling Plan and Outgoing Digit Plan. Pinhole digit strings consist of a sequence of digits,
which can include special characters, and each string is given a name. Digit strings
defined on this page are available for your group’s Outgoing Pinhole Digit Plan.
When a call is placed, the number is checked against assigned digit strings (whether
assigned to the individual user or to their department or group). Note that if the users do
not have individual assignments, their department pinhole digit string settings take effect.
If the users are not assigned to a department, then the group assignments take effect. If
the number matches a digit pattern, the corresponding action is applied to the call, for
example, allow or block.
Use the Pinhole Digit Strings menu item on the Group – Calling Plan menu page to:
 List or Delete Pinhole Digit Strings
 Add Pinhole Digit String
 Modify Pinhole Digit String

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 190 OF 314
 10.4.1 List or Delete Pinhole Digit Strings
Use the Group – Pinhole Digit Strings page to list the digit strings configured for the
Outgoing Pinhole Digit Plan for the group. On this page, you can also delete pinhole digit
strings. From this page, you can add and modify pinhole digit strings.

Figure 156 Group – Pinhole Digit Strings

1) On the Group – Calling Plan menu page, click Pinhole Digit Strings. The Group –
Pinhole Digit Strings page appears, listing the existing digit strings for the Pinhole
Outgoing Calling Plan for the group.
2) To delete a pinhole digit string, check the Delete box for the string.
3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

10.4.2 Add Pinhole Digit String

Use the Group – Pinhole Digit Strings Add page to add a digit string for the Outgoing
Pinhole Digit Plan for the group.

Figure 157 Group – Pinhole Digit Strings Add

1) On the Group – Calling Plan menu page, click Pinhole Digit Strings. The Group –
Pinhole Digit Strings page appears.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 191 OF 314
 2) Click Add. The Group – Pinhole Digit Strings Add page appears.
3) In the Name text box, type the name for the string.
4) In the Digit String text box, enter the digit string.
In addition to digits (0 through 9), the characters in the following table are allowed.
Character Description Examples

? Matches any single digit or allowed symbol; that is, it “202555????”

matches any of the following: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, *,
and #. A digit string can contain one or more question
marks (?) and a question mark can appear in any
position except as the national prefix or country code.

* Matches zero or more digits, and is allowed only at the “301*” matches any string
end of the digit string. beginning with 301, such
as “3015550100”.

[] Matches a single digit that satisfies the specified range “[1,3,7]”, “[4-6]”, “[5-7, 9]”
of digits. A consecutive range is indicated with a hyphen
“-”, while a nonconsecutive range is indicated with a
comma “,”. Hyphens and commas can be used in
combination.

+ Matches an E.164 digit pattern and is only allowed as +12405551000

the first character of the pattern.

# Matches only itself and is used to denote a service code. #22

\* Matches an asterisk (*) and is used to denote a service “\*11” represents “*11”
code. Backslash (\) is used to avoid conflict with the *
wildcard character.

5) Save your changes. Click OK. The previous page appears.

To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

10.4.3 Modify Pinhole Digit String

Use the Group – Digit Strings Modify page to modify a pinhole digit string.

Figure 158 Group – Pinhole Digit Strings Modify

1) On the Group – Calling Plan menu page, click Pinhole Digit Strings. The Group –
Pinhole Digit Strings page appears, listing pinhole digit strings defined for your group.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the string. The Group – Pinhole Digit Strings
Modify page appears.
3) To delete the string, click Delete. The previous page appears.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 192 OF 314
 4) To modify the string, type new data for the string. For information about the
characters allowed in a digit string, see section 10.4.2 Add Pinhole Digit String.
5) Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

10.5 Transfer Numbers

Use this menu item on the Group – Calling Plan menu page to list and configure transfer
numbers for the group and departments.
You assign transfer numbers (T1, T2, and T3) to specific call types in the Outgoing Calling
Plan and Outgoing Digit Plan to block users from making those types of calls. When a
user dials a number for a call type to which a transfer number has been assigned, the call
is routed to the transfer number instead of to the dialed number. If the group or a
department has no transfer number, and an outgoing call type has a transfer number
assigned to it, the call is blocked.

10.5.1 List and Configure Transfer Numbers for Group and Departments
Use the Group – Transfer Numbers page to list and configure the transfer numbers for the
group and departments.

NOTE 1: Department settings override group settings, and user settings override group and
department settings.

NOTE 2: This page lists all departments in your group. If your group is part of an enterprise,
this page also lists any departments created on the enterprise level by your enterprise
administrator. If you choose to modify the transfer numbers for an enterprise-level department,
your changes will only apply to users in that department that exist within your group.

Figure 159 Group – Transfer Numbers

1) On the Group – Calling Plan menu page, click Transfer Numbers. The Group –
Transfer Numbers page that contains the transfer numbers for the group and
departments appears.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 193 OF 314
 2) To configure, modify, or delete the transfer numbers for the group or a department,
edit the Transfer Number text boxes for the group or department. An outgoing phone
number must be from 2 through 30 digits (3 through 22 digits including the leading +
sign in E.164 format). Additional spaces and dashes are allowed but are not included
in the number.
3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

10.6 Incoming Calling Plan

Use this menu item on the Group – Calling Plan menu page to list and configure incoming
calling plan settings for the group and departments.
The settings on the Incoming Calling Plan define the types of calls that are allowed to
reach the group and departments. For example, the Incoming Calling Plan determines
whether users in your group or department can receive calls from outside the group or
collect calls.
For all incoming calls, the call type is compared to the set of allowed incoming calls in the
plan. If the call type is not in the set, the call is denied and an appropriate message is
played to the originating party.

10.6.1 View and Configure Incoming Calling Plan for Group and Departments
Use the Group – Incoming Calling Plan page to list or configure the settings for the
Incoming Calling Plan for the group and departments. A checked call type indicates that
calls of this type are allowed. On this page, Calls From Within Group, Calls From Outside
Group, and Collect Calls call types are provided by BroadWorks; other call types are
defined for the group. To add new call types, see section 10.3.2 Add Digit String.

NOTE 1: Department settings override group settings, and user settings override group and
department settings.

NOTE 2: This page lists all departments in your group. If your group is part of an enterprise,
this page also lists all departments created at the enterprise level by your enterprise
administrator. If you alter the settings for an enterprise-level department, your changes will only
apply to users in that department that exist within your group.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 194 OF 314
 Figure 160 Group – Incoming Calling Plan

1) On the Group – Calling Plan menu page, click Incoming Calling Plan. The Group –
Incoming Calling Plan page that contains the current settings for the group and
departments appears.
2) Configure permissions for calls from outside the group for the group and departments.
From the Calls From Outside Group drop-down list for the group or a department:
− Select “Y” to allow users in the group or department to receive calls from outside
the group.
− Select “P” to allow users in the group or department to receive calls from outside
the group only if the outside call is transferred or forwarded to the user by another
user inside the group.
− Select “N” to prevent users in the group or department from receiving any calls
from outside the group, even if the outside call has been transferred or forwarded
by a user inside the group.

NOTE: Fully restricted users (“N” in Calls From Outside Group column) cannot pick up outside
calls in their call pickup group or outside calls parked by a user in their group.

3) For the remaining call types, to allow the call type for the group or for a department,
check the box for the call type in the row for the group or department.
4) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 195 OF 314
 10.7 Outgoing Calling Plan
Use this menu item on the Group – Calling Plan menu page to list and configure outgoing
calling plan settings for the group and departments.
The settings on the Outgoing Calling Plan define the types of calls that group members
and department members are allowed to make. For example, this page determines
whether users in the group can initiate toll and international calls. The settings also control
whether calls initiated by group and department users can be forwarded and transferred
by other members in the group or department to numbers outside the group.

10.7.1 View and Configure Outgoing Calling Plan for Group and Departments
Use the Group – Outgoing Calling Plan page to list and configure the settings for the
Outgoing Calling Plan for the group and departments. All new users receive the call types
assigned to the Group Default or if assigned to a department, they receive the call types
assigned to that department. The settings can be modified for individual users, on their
Calling Plan pages.
A definition of each call type follows.
Call Type Description

Group Calls within the user's business group.

Local Calls within the local calling area.

Toll Free Free calls to numbers beginning with 1, usually followed by 800, 877, or 888.

Toll Calls outside the local calling area.

International Chargeable calls to other countries.

Operator Assisted Calls made with the chargeable assistance of an operator.

Chargeable Directory Calls made to Directory Assistance such as 411 or the area code followed
Assistance by 555-1212.

Special Services I Calls to 700 numbers. These calls may or may not be chargeable.

Special Services II Customizable by the system provider.

Premium Services I Chargeable calls to 900 numbers.

Premium Services II Chargeable calls to 976 numbers.

Casual 1010XXX or 10XXX chargeable calls. Example: 10-10-321, followed by the

number you are calling.

URL Dialing Chargeable calls made to an e-mail address instead of a phone number.

Unknown Unknown call type.

NOTE 1: Department settings override group settings, and user settings override group and
department settings.

NOTE 2: This page lists all departments in your group. If your group is part of an enterprise,
this page also lists all departments created at the enterprise level by your enterprise
administrator. If you alter the settings for an enterprise-level department, your changes only
apply to users in that department that exist within your group.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 196 OF 314
 The system can be configured to assign a unique set of call types for calls a user transfers
or forwards (system default). The system can also be configured to apply a unique set of
call types only for calls a user forwards. One of the tabs on this page changes according
to the system configuration, as provided in the following table.
Tab Description

Initiating Call Forwards/Transfers Set of call types for calls a user transfers or forwards.

Initiating Call Forwards Set of call types for calls a user forwards.

Figure 161 Group – (Enhanced) Outgoing Calling Plan – Originating Calls

Figure 162 Group – Outgoing Calling Plan – Originating Calls

1) On the Group – Outgoing Calling Plan menu page, click Outgoing Calling Plan. The
Group – Outgoing Calling Plan page that contains the Originating settings for the
group default and departments appears, as indicated by the active tab.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 197 OF 314
 2) Edit the Originating settings for the group and departments.
− For the group with Enhanced Outgoing Calling Plan service assigned, select one
of the following options from the drop-down list for each call type to modify:
− “Y” to allow a call type.
− “N” to block a call type.
− “A” to specify use of an authorization code for a call type.
− “T1”, “T2”, or “T3” to identify one of three transfer numbers (a call type). To
view or change the transfer numbers, see section 10.5 Transfer Numbers.
− For the group without the Enhanced Outgoing Calling Plan service assigned,
check a call type to allow it or uncheck it to block the call type.

Figure 163 Group – Outgoing Calling Plan – Initiating Call Forwards/Transfers

3) To display the Initiating Call Forwards/Transfers or the Initiating Call Forwards

settings, click the Initiating Call Forwards/Transfers tab or the Initiating Call Forwards
tab. The Group – Outgoing Calling Plan page that contains these settings for the
group default and departments appears.
4) Edit the settings for the group and departments. For each call type, check the call
type to allow it or uncheck it to block the call type.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 198 OF 314
 Figure 164 Group – Outgoing Calling Plan – Being Forwarded/Transferred Calls

5) To display the Being Forwarded/Transferred settings for the group default and
departments, click the Being Forwarded/Transferred tab. The Group – Outgoing
Calling Plan page that contains the Being Forwarded/Transferred settings for the
group default and departments appears.
6) To allow or disallow calls involving a number outside the group or department to be
transferred or forwarded, check or uncheck the box for Outside Group for the group or
department.

NOTE: The Outside Group setting applies not only to calls transferred to an outside number, but
also to calls transferred from an outside number to another member of the same group.

For example, suppose X (an outside number) calls A (a number inside the group). A answers
and then tries to transfer the call to B (another number inside the same group). If the Outside
Group option is not checked for the group, A is not able to transfer the call to B, even though A
and B are in the same group.

Figure 165 Group – Outgoing Calling Plan – Call Me Now Calls

7) To display the Call Me Now settings for the group and departments, click the Call Me
Now tab. The Group – Outgoing Calling Plan page that contains the Call Me Now
settings for the group default and departments appears.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 199 OF 314
 8) Edit the Call Me Now settings for the group and departments. For each call type,
check the call type to allow it or uncheck it to block the call type.
9) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

10.8 Outgoing Digit Plan

Use this item on the Group – Calling Plan menu to list and configure outgoing digit plan
settings for the group and departments.
The settings on the Outgoing Digit Plan define the customized types of calls that group
members and department members are allowed to make, forward, or transfer. The call
types are configured as digit strings. For information, see section 10.3 Digit Strings.
The call types in the Outgoing Digit Plan are in addition to those provided by BroadWorks
on the Outgoing Calling Plan.

10.8.1 View and Configure Outgoing Digit Plan for Group and Departments
Use the Group – Outgoing Digit Plan page to list and configure the outgoing digit plan
settings for the group and departments. All new users receive the call types assigned to
the Group Default or if assigned to a department, they receive the call types assigned to
that department. The settings can be modified for individual users, on their Calling Plan
pages.

NOTE 1: Department settings override group settings.

NOTE 2: This page lists all departments in your group. If your group is part of an enterprise,
this page also lists all departments created at the enterprise level by your enterprise
administrator. If you alter the settings for an enterprise-level department, your changes will only
apply to users in that department that exist within your group.

You can configure the settings independently for originating, forwarding/transferring, and
Call Me Now calls. One of the tabs on this page changes according to the system
configuration, as specified in the following table.
Tab Description

Initiating Call Settings for calls a user transfers or forwards.

Forwards/Transfers

Initiating Call Forwards Settings for calls a user forwards.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 200 OF 314
 Figure 166 Group – (Enhanced) Outgoing Digit Plan – Originating Calls

Figure 167 Group – Outgoing Digit Plan – Originating Calls

1) On the Group – Calling Plan menu page, click Outgoing Digit Plan. The Outgoing
Digit Plan page appears. The Originating tab is displayed by default.
2) Edit the originating calls settings for the group and departments.
− For a group with the Enhanced Outgoing Calling Plan service assigned, select
one of the following options from the drop-down list for each call type to modify:
− “Y” to allow a call type.
− “N” to block a call type.
− “A” to specify use of an authorization code for a call type.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 201 OF 314
 − “T1”, “T2”, or “T3” to identify one of three transfer numbers for a call type. To
view or change the transfer numbers, see section 10.5 Transfer Numbers.
− For the group without the Enhanced Outgoing Calling Plan service assigned,
check a call type to allow it or uncheck it to block the call type.

Figure 168 Group – Outgoing Digit Plan – Initiating Call Forwards/Transfers

3) To configure the setting for forwarding and/or transferring calls, click the Initiating Call
Forwards/Transfers tab or the Initiating Call Forwards tab.
4) Edit the settings on the rows for the group and departments. For each call type,
check the call type to allow it or uncheck it to block the call type.

Figure 169 Group – Outgoing Digit Plan – Call Me Now Calls

5) To configure the Call Me Now settings, click the Call Me Now tab.
6) Edit the settings on the rows for the group and departments. For each call type,
check the call type to allow it or uncheck it to block the call type.
7) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 202 OF 314
 To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

10.9 Outgoing Pinhole Digit Plan

Use this item on the Group – Calling Plan menu to list and configure Outgoing Pinhole
Digit Plan (OPDP) settings for the group and departments.
The Outgoing Pinhole Digit Plan allows you to override calling restrictions imposed by the
Outgoing Calling Plan and Outgoing Digit Plan at the group, department, or user level.
When a call is placed, the number is checked against assigned pinhole digit strings
(whether assigned to the individual user or to their department or group) before applying
the Outgoing Calling Plan and Outgoing Digit Plan screening services. If the number
matches any assigned pinhole digit pattern, the call that would otherwise be blocked by
the Outgoing Calling Plan or Outgoing Digit Plan may be allowed.
Note that if a user does not have individual assignments, their department pinhole digit
string settings take effect. If the user is not assigned to a department, then the group
default assignments take effect.
The call types in the Outgoing Pinhole Digit Plan are defined as digit strings on the
Outgoing Pinhole Digit Plan page. For information, see section 10.4 Pinhole Digit Strings.

10.9.1 View and Configure Outgoing Pinhole Digit Plan for Group and Departments
Use the Group – Outgoing Pinhole Digit Plan page to list and configure the Outgoing
Pinhole Digit Plan settings for the group and departments. All new users receive the call
types assigned to the Group Default or if assigned to a department, they receive the call
types assigned to that department. The settings can be modified for individual users, on
their Calling Plan pages.

NOTE 1: Department settings override group settings.

NOTE 2: This page lists all departments in your group. If your group is part of an enterprise,
this page also lists all departments created at the enterprise level by your enterprise
administrator. If you alter the settings for an enterprise-level department, your changes only
apply to users in that department that exist within your group.

You can configure the settings independently for originating, forwarding/transferring, and
Call Me Now calls. One of the tabs on this page changes according to the system
configuration, as specified in the following table.
Tab Description

Originating Settings for calls a user originates.

Initiating Call Settings for calls a user forwards or transfers.

Forwards/Transfers

Call Me Now Settings for Call Me Now calls.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 203 OF 314
 Figure 170 Group – Outgoing Pinhole Digit Plan – Originating Calls

1) On the Group – Calling Plan menu page, click Outgoing Pinhole Digit Plan. The
Outgoing Pinhole Digit Plan page appears. The Originating tab is displayed by
default.
2) For your group and for each listed department, select a value from the drop-down list
for each call type:
− “Y” to allow the call type for users in the group or department.
− “I” to ignore this call type for users in the group or department.
− “A” to force users in the group or department to supply an authorization code
when the call type is detected.
− “TX” (where X = 1, 2, or 3) to transfer users in the group or department to the
specified transfer number when the call type is detected. Transfer numbers are
defined on the group's Transfer Number page.
3) Click Apply.
4) To configure the OPDP for initiating call forwards and transfers, click the Initiating
Call Forwards/Transfers tab.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 204 OF 314
 Figure 171 Group – Outgoing Pinhole Digit Plan – Initiating Call Forwards/Transfers

5) Define ODPD rules for initiating call forwards and transfers. For your group and for
each listed department, select a value from the drop-down list for each call type:
− “Y” to allow the call type for users in the group or department.
− “I” to ignore this call type for users in the group or department.
6) Click Apply.
7) To configure the OPDP for Call Me Now calls, click the Call Me Now tab. The tab is
only visible if Call Me Now service has been authorized for the group.

Figure 172 Group – Outgoing Pinhole Digit Plan – Call Me Now Calls

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 205 OF 314
 8) Define ODPD rules for Call Me now calls. For your group and for each listed
department, select a value from the drop-down list for each call type listed.
− “Y” to allow the call type for users in the group or department.
− “I” to ignore this call type for users in the group or department.
9) Click OK or Apply. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 206 OF 314
 11 Meet-Me Conferencing

The Group – Meet-Me Conferencing menu page contains items used to manage the
Meet-Me Conferencing service for the group. For information and procedures for
managing the Meet-Me Conferencing service, see the BroadWorks Application Server
Group Web Interface Administration Guide – Part 2.

Figure 173 Group – Meet-Me Conferencing Menu

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 207 OF 314
 12 Utilities Menu

This chapter contains sections that correspond to each item on the Group – Utilities menu
page.

Figure 174 Group – Utilities Menu

The Group – Utilities menu contains these items:

 Basic menu
This menu displays the items that all group administrators can use:
− BroadWorks Anywhere Number Lookup
− Common Phone List
− Custom Contact Directories
− Feature Access Codes
− Group Directory
− Enterprise Directory
− Inventory Report
− Password Rules
− Passcode Rules

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 208 OF 314
  Advanced menu
This menu displays the items that group administrators can use only if such functions
have been assigned to them:
− Device Configuration
− Device Management Event Queues
− Extension Dialing
− Intercept Group
− LDAP Directory
− Verify Translation and Routing
− Voice Portal Branding

12.1 Access Group – Utilities Menu

Use the Group – Utilities menu to add and modify the users in your group, modify the
profile of the group, and add and modify administrators and departments in the group.
On your Home page, in the Options list, click Utilities. The Group – Utilities menu page
appears.

12.2 BroadWorks Anywhere Number Lookup

Use the Group – BroadWorks Anywhere Number Lookup page to verify whether a phone
number is used as a BroadWorks Anywhere location in your group.

Figure 175 Group – BroadWorks Anywhere Number Lookup

1) On the Group – Utilities menu page, click BroadWorks Anywhere Number Lookup.
The Group – BroadWorks Anywhere Number Lookup page appears.
2) Enter the number to look up and then click Find. If you enter the number in E164
format, the number is used for the search as entered. If no country code is specified,
the system default country code is used.
The users that have this number configured as their BroadWorks Anywhere location
are listed at the bottom of the page. If the lookup returns no results, the “No Entries
Present” message appears.
3) Click OK to return to the previous page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 209 OF 314
 12.3 Common Phone List
Use this item on the Group – Utilities menu page to:
 List and Delete Common Phone Numbers
 Add Common Phone Number
 Modify Common Phone Number
 Import Phone List

12.3.1 List and Delete Common Phone Numbers

Use the Group – Common Phone List page to view the list of phone numbers common to
all users in the group and to delete one or more common phone numbers. From this
page, you add and modify common phone numbers or import a phone list.
The Common Phone List, used as a speed-dial list from user CommPilot Call Managers,
can contain as many contacts as required. You can edit these contacts at any time and
the change is effective immediately in all user CommPilot Call Manager Group Phone
Lists.
If your group is part of an enterprise, your common phone list will be merged in users’
CommPilot Call Managers with the enterprise-level common phone list defined by your
enterprise administrator.

Figure 176 Group – Common Phone List

1) On the Group – Utilities menu page, click Common Phone List. The Group –
Common Phone List page appears.
2) To delete a number, check the Delete box for the number.
3) To import a phone list, see section 12.3.4 Import Phone List.
4) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 210 OF 314
 12.3.2 Add Common Phone Number
Use the Group – Common Phone List Add page to add a common phone number.

Figure 177 Group – Common Phone List Add

1) On the Group – Utilities menu page, click Common Phone List. The Group –
Common Phone List page appears.
2) Click Add. The Group – Common Phone List Add page appears.
3) Type the information for the number. An asterisk (*) indicates required data. The
name can be from 1 through 50 characters. The phone number must be from 2
through 30 digits (3 through 22 digits including the leading + sign in E.164 format).
Spaces and dashes are allowed but are not included in the number.
4) Save your changes. Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous
page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

12.3.3 Modify Common Phone Number

Use the Group – Common Phone List page to modify or delete a common phone number.

Figure 178 Group – Common Phone List Modify

1) On the Group – Utilities menu page, click Common Phone List. The Group –
Common Phone List page appears.

NOTE: To delete the number, click Delete. The previous page appears.

2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the number. The Group – Common Phone List
Modify page appears.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 211 OF 314
 NOTE: To delete the number, click Delete. The previous page appears.

3) To modify the number, type the new information for the number. An asterisk (*)
indicates required data.
4) Save your changes. Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous
page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

12.3.4 Import Phone List

Use the Group – Common Phone List Import page to import an existing Comma
Separated Values (CSV) phone list. To produce a CSV text file, click the Help link for the
page or see the instructions for an application such as Microsoft Outlook, Word, or Excel.

Figure 179 Group – Common Phone List Import

1) On the Group – Utilities menu page, click Common Phone List. The Group –
Common Phone List page appears.
2) Click Import Phone List. The Group – Common Phone List Import page appears.
3) Select the file: Click Browse to find and open the CSV file. The path to the file
appears in the text box.
4) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

12.4 Custom Contact Directories

Use the Group – Custom Contact Directory page to create a new custom contact directory
and manage existing custom contact directories. The directory can contain a maximum of
1,000 users. The custom contact directories can be read by all users in the group.
Users cannot be included in a custom contact directory if they have the User Privacy
service assigned and have directory privacy enabled.
Virtual On-Net users, if configured for your group or enterprise, are available for selection
in custom contact directories. In the enterprise model, the following information is
displayed for Virtual On-Net users: Last Name, First Name (Phone Number Group
Name). In the service provider model, the following information is displayed for Virtual On-
Net users: Last Name, First Name (Phone Number).

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 212 OF 314
 Figure 180 Group – Custom Contact Directory

1) On the Group – Utilities menu page, click Custom Contact Directories. The Group
– Custom Contact Directories page appears.
This page is a list page. Depending on the number of pages of data in a list, list
pages allow you to search several different ways. You can click the heading of a
column to change the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the
data to specify search criteria, or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous.
For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started
Web Interface Administration Guide.

NOTE: If the search produces more than 1,000 entries, a warning appears requesting that you
define the search criteria to narrow your search.

2) Save your changes. Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous
page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 213 OF 314
 12.4.1 Add Custom Contact Directory
Use the Custom Contact Directory Add page to create a new custom contact directory.

Figure 181 Group – Custom Contact Directory Add

1) On the Group – Utilities menu page, click Custom Contact Directory. The Group –
Custom Contact Directory page appears.
2) Click Add. The Group – Custom Contact Directory Add page appears.
3) In the Directory Name text box, type the name, from 1 through 40 characters. An
asterisk (*) indicates required data.
4) To add users to the custom directory, in the Available Users column select users to
assign and click Add >. To add all users, click Add All >>.
5) To find a desired user, enter the search criteria in the fields provided and click Search.
For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started
Web Interface Administration Guide.
6) You can select some or all of the items in a column. Item names are listed in
alphabetical order. To select several items in sequential order, click the first name,
hold down the SHIFT key on the keyboard, and click the last name. To select several
items, but not in a particular order, click the names while holding down the CTRL key
on the keyboard.
7) To remove users from the Assigned Users column, select the users to remove and
click Remove <. To remove all users, click Remove All <<.
8) Save your changes. Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous
page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 214 OF 314
 12.4.2 Modify Custom Contact Directory
Use the Custom Contact Directory Modify page to modify or delete a custom contact
directory.

Figure 182 Group – Custom Contact Directory Modify

1) On the Group – Utilities menu page, click Custom Contact Directory. The Group –
Custom Contact Directory page appears.
2) Click Edit on the row for the directory you would like to modify. The Group – Custom
Contact Directory Modify page appears.
3) In the Directory Name text box, type the information for the name if required. The
name can be from 1 through 40 characters. An asterisk (*) indicates required data.
4) Assign users:
− To find a desired user, enter search criteria in the fields provided and click
Search. For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks
Getting Started Web Interface Administration Guide.
− In the Available Users column, select the users. You can select some or all of the
items in a column. Item names are listed in alphabetical order. To select several
items in sequential order, click the first name, hold down the SHIFT key on the
keyboard, and click the last name. To select several items, but not in a particular
order, click the names while holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard.
5) To assign the selected users, click Add >. To assign all users, click Add All >>.
6) Unassign users:
In the Assigned Users column, select the users and click Remove <. To unassign all
users, click Remove All <<.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 215 OF 314
 7) To delete the custom contact directory, click Delete. The previous page appears.

WARNING: This action cannot be undone. When you click Delete, the contact directory is
permanently deleted.

8) Save your changes. Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous
page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

12.5 Feature Access Codes

Use this item on the Group – Utilities menu page to list, add, modify, or delete feature
access codes or speed dial 100 prefix.
Users dial feature access codes (flash and star codes) to access certain services, for
example, Last Number Redial and Call Return. Users also dial a prefix for Speed Dial 100
calls.

12.5.1 List, Add, Modify, or Delete Feature Access Codes or Speed Dial 100 Prefix
Use the Group – Feature Access Codes page to view, add, modify, delete, enable, or
disable feature access codes and to view, add, or modify the prefix for Speed Dial 100
calls. You can also reset feature access codes back to the default values set by your
service provider.
Feature access codes can be modified only if the Group FAC codes level is selected on
this page. If the Service Provider FAC codes level is selected, all FAC codes that appear
in the page’s FAC codes table are there for reference only and cannot be changed or
disabled on this page. In this level, feature access codes disabled by the service provider
are not displayed.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 216 OF 314
 Figure 183 Group – Feature Access Codes (Top of Page) Use Service Provider FAC Codes Option

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 217 OF 314
 Figure 184 Group – Feature Access Codes (Top of Page) Use Group FAC Codes Option

1) On the Group – Utilities menu page, click Feature Access Codes. The Group –
Feature Access Codes page appears. For more information about feature access
codes, see the list after the end of this procedure.
2) To modify the prefix for Speed Dial 100 calls, in the Speed Dial 100 Prefix text box,
type the prefix (one or two characters using 0 through 9, A through D, *, #).

NOTE: In XS mode, the Speed Dial 100 prefix may be empty.

3) Select whether to use the Service Provider FAC codes or the Group Level FAC
codes.
If the Service Provider FAC code level is selected, all FAC codes that appear in the
screen’s FAC codes table are there for reference only and cannot be changed or
disabled on this page. The Revert Back to Default FAC Settings link is absent in this
mode.
If the Group FAC code level is selected, all FAC codes for the services authorized to
your group appear in the page’s FAC codes table and can be changed or disabled on
this page.
The Revert Back to Default FAC Settings link does not appear on the page after
switching to Group FAC codes level until you save your changes.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 218 OF 314
 4) To reset feature access codes back to their default settings, click Revert Back to
Default FAC Setting. All feature access codes revert back to the default values set
by your service provider.
5) To modify a required feature access code, in the Main (Required) text box for the
service, select the current feature access code and type the code you want.

NOTE: Be careful not to configure a code that is already in use in the group or configure a code
that is the same as an extension already in use in the group. A feature access code can be two
to five characters long, and consist of characters A through D, digits (0-9), and the special
characters * and #.

6) To add or modify an alternate feature access code, in the Alternate (Optional) text box
for the service, type the new code or select the current code and type the new code.

NOTE: Be careful not to configure a code that is already in use in the group or configure a code
that is the same as an extension already in use in the group. A feature access code can be two
to five characters long, and consist of characters A through D, digits (0-9), and the special
characters * and #.

7) To delete an alternate feature access code, delete the current code in the Alternate
(Optional) text box for the service.
8) To disable or enable a feature access code, uncheck or check the Enable box in the
row of the feature access code.
9) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.
The following table provides the main (required) default feature access codes and their
descriptions.
Code Name Description

*34 Advice Of Charge Activation Allows users to activate the Advice of Charge service for
the next call, if the service is not activated for all calls.
When the service is activated, the Application Server
gathers and generates the advice of charge information
and sends it to the access device.

*77 Anonymous Call Rejection Allows users to activate the Anonymous Call Rejection
Activation service. After the user dials the feature access code, the
Application Server then plays an announcement to inform
the user that the service has been successfully activated.
If the service was already active, the user still receives the
announcement.

*87 Anonymous Call Rejection Allows users to deactivate the Anonymous Call Rejection
Deactivation service. After the user dials the feature access code, the
Application Server then plays an announcement to inform
the user that the service has been successfully
deactivated, even if the service was never activated.

*52* Anonymous Call Rejection Allows users to obtain the status of the Anonymous Call
Interrogation Rejection service.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 219 OF 314
 Code Name Description

#8 Automatic Callback Terminates all current Automatic Callback sessions.

Deactivation Automatic Callback retries a busy line automatically, with
notification as soon as the called party is free.

#9 Automatic Callback Menu Triggers the Interactive Voice Response (IVR) menu,
Access which lists the current pending callbacks and allows the
user to cancel individual callbacks.

*14 BroadWorks Anywhere Allows users to dial E.164 numbers. The user dials a
E.164 Dialing feature access code as an alias to the “+” sign. The
Application Server replaces the feature access code digits
with the “+” sign and resumes the call origination with an
E.164 number.

*15 Call Bridge Allows a Shared Call Appearance (SCA) location to

initiate or join an SCA-Bridge, upon which the Application
Server automatically selects an appropriate call
appearance to bridge on.
Call Bridge FAC is visible when one or more of the
following services is authorized (service provider or
group) or assigned (user):
 BroadWorks Anywhere
 Shared Call Appearance
 Shared Call Appearance 5
 Shared Call Appearance 10
 Shared Call Appearance 15
 Shared Call Appearance 20
 Shared Call Appearance 25
 Shared Call Appearance 30
 Shared Call Appearance 35
 Executive
 Flexible Seating Guest

*72 Call Forwarding Always Allows users to redirect incoming phone calls to another
Activation number, such as a mobile phone or administrative
assistant. After dialing the assigned code, users dial the
phone number to which calls are redirected followed by
the pound sign (#).

*73 Call Forwarding Always Allows users to turn Call Forwarding Always off. Upon
Deactivation deactivation, calls ring to the user’s phone unless the user
has set up another service such as Call Forwarding Busy,
Call Forwarding No Answer, or Do Not Disturb.

*21* Call Forwarding Always Allows the user to get the current status and destination of
Interrogation the Call Forwarding Always service. The status is active
or inactive and the destination is voice mail or the current
forwarding number.

*21 Call Forwarding Always to Allows users to redirect incoming phone calls to their
Voice Mail Activation voice mail.

#21 Call Forwarding Always to Allows users to turn Call Forwarding Always To Voice
Voice Mail Deactivation Mail off. After deactivation, calls ring to the user’s phone
unless the user has set up another service such as Call
Forwarding Busy, Call Forwarding Busy To Voice Mail,
Call Forwarding No Answer, or Call Management – Do
Not Disturb.

*90 Call Forwarding Busy Allows users to redirect their incoming phone calls to
Activation another number, such as a mobile phone or
administrative assistant, when they are on the phone.
After dialing the assigned code, a user dials the phone
number where they want their calls to be redirected.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 220 OF 314
 Code Name Description

*91 Call Forwarding Busy Allows users to turn Call Forwarding Busy off. After
Deactivation deactivation, calls ring on the user’s phone unless the
user has set up another service such as Call Forwarding
Always, Call Forwarding No Answer, or Do Not Disturb.

*67* Call Forwarding Busy Allows users to get the current status and destination of
Interrogation the Call Forwarding Busy service. The status is active or
inactive and the destination is voice mail or the current
forwarding number.

*40 Call Forwarding Busy To Allows users to redirect incoming phone calls to their
Voice Mail Activation voice mail when they are on the phone.

#40 Call Forwarding Busy To Allows users to turn Call Forwarding Busy To Voice Mail
Voice Mail Deactivation off. After deactivation, calls ring to the user’s phone
unless the user has set up another service such as Call
Forwarding Always, Call Forwarding Always To Voice
Mail, Call Forwarding No Answer, or Do Not Disturb.

*92 Call Forwarding No Answer Allows users to redirect their incoming phone calls to
Activation another number, such as a mobile phone or
administrative assistant, when they do not answer their
phone. After dialing the assigned code, the user dials the
phone number where they want their calls to be
redirected.

*93 Call Forwarding No Answer Allows users to turn Call Forwarding No Answer off. After
Deactivation deactivation, calls ring on the user's phone unless the
user has set up another service such as Call Forwarding
Busy, Call Forwarding Always, or Do Not Disturb.

*61* Call Forwarding No Answer Allows users to get the current status and destination of
Interrogation the Call Forwarding No Answer service. The status is
active or inactive and the destination is voice mail or the
current forwarding number.

*41 Call Forwarding No Answer Allows users to redirect incoming phone calls to their
To Voice Mail Activation voice mail when they do not answer their phone.

#41 Call Forwarding No Answer Allows users to turn Call Forwarding Busy To Voice Mail
To Voice Mail Deactivation off. After deactivation, calls ring to the user's phone
unless the user has set up another service such as Call
Forwarding Busy, Call Forwarding Busy To Voice Mail,
Call Forwarding Busy, or Call Management – Do Not
Disturb.

*94 Call Forwarding Not Allows users to have their incoming calls forwarded to a
Reachable Activation different number when their device is not accessible by
BroadWorks. After dialing the assigned code, users dial
the phone number where they want their calls to be
redirected.

*95 Call Forwarding Not Allows users to turn off the Call Forwarding Not
Reachable Deactivation Reachable service. After deactivation, should the user’s
phone become unreachable, calls are no longer rerouted
to an alternate device through the Call Forwarding Not
Reachable service.

*63* Call Forwarding Not Allows users to query the status of the Call Forwarding
Reachable Interrogation Not Reachable service.

#76 Call Forwarding Selective Allows users to activate the Call Forwarding Selective
Activation service. The service can be activated only if the service is
configured with the following minimum requirements:
 The Default Call Forward to phone number/SIP URI is
configured.
 At least one selective criterion is configured and active.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 221 OF 314
 Code Name Description

#77 Call Forwarding Selective Allows users to turn off the Call Forwarding Selective
Deactivation service. After the service has been deactivated, no
criteria are used when a call is being redirected.

*54* Calling Line ID Delivery Allows users to obtain the status of the Calling Line ID
Blocking Interrogation Delivery Blocking service.

*67 Calling Line ID Delivery Allows users to prevent display of their calling line ID on a
Blocking per Call per-call basis. Before placing a call, the user dials the
assigned code, and then places the call as usual. Note
that this service is active only for one phone call.

*31 Calling Line ID Delivery Allows users to prevent display of their calling line ID for
Blocking Persistent all calls.
Activation

#31 Calling Line ID Delivery Allows users to display their calling line ID for all calls.
Blocking Persistent
Deactivation

*65 Calling Line ID Delivery per Allows users to override the Calling Line ID Delivery
Call Blocking Persistent setting for the next call. Before
placing a call, a user dials the assigned code, and then
places the call as usual. Note that this service is active
only for one phone call.

*68 Call Park Allows users to place the call on hold in such a way that
any member of the group or enterprise, if the group is part
of an enterprise, can retrieve it with the Call Park Retrieve
function.
A call can be parked against any user of the group or
enterprise. However, a user can only have one call
parked at a time.

*88 Call Park Retrieve Allows users to retrieve parked calls.

*98 Call Pickup Call Pickup allows users to pick up calls within an
assigned call pickup group. The extensions in the call
pickup group can be viewed on the CommPilot web
interface for each user in the group. The call pickup
group is determined by an administrator and may or may
not consist of those listed in the group phone lists.
When users dial the Call Pickup code, the ringing phone
in the group is answered. If more than one phone is
ringing, Call Pickup allows users to answer the phone that
has been ringing the longest.

*48 Call Recording – Pause Allows you to pause call recording. The user’s Call
Recording service must be set to On Demand, On
Demand with User Initiated Start, or Always with
Pause/Resume mode; otherwise, dialing the code has no
effect.

*49 Call Recording – Resume Allows you to resume call recording after you paused it.

*44 Call Recording – Start Allows the user to record an ongoing call or next outgoing
call. The user’s Call Recording service must be set to On
Demand or On Demand with User Initiated Start mode;
otherwise, dialing the code has no effect.

*45 Call Recording – Stop Allows you to stop recording a call. This option is only
available in On Demand with User Initiated Start mode.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 222 OF 314
 Code Name Description

*11 Call Retrieve Retrieves an existing active call from another endpoint.
The user dials the Call Retrieve FAC from the location
where the call is to be retrieved. This feature can be used
from the primary location, from a Shared Call Appearance
alternate location, from a BroadWorks Anywhere location,
or from a Flexible Seating Host to which you are currently
associated.
In addition, a user with the Executive service can retrieve
a call that is connected to an assistant location, and a
user with the Executive-Assistant service can use the Call
Retrieve feature access code via the Executive-Assistant
Initiate Call feature access code to retrieve/pull an
executive’s call to the assistant’s location.

*69 Call Return Allows users to return a call to the phone number of the
last call received. The service can be configured at the
system level to proceed with a two-level procedure that
provides announcements to guide the user.
Users are allowed to return calls only to numbers that are
acceptable according to their Outgoing Calling Plan.

#92# Call Return Number Deletion Allows users to explicitly delete the last incoming number
for the Call Return feature.

*53* Call Waiting Interrogation Allows users to obtain the status of the Call Waiting
service.

*43 Call Waiting Persistent Allows users to turn on Call Waiting for all calls they
Activation place.

#43 Call Waiting Persistent Allows users to turn off Call Waiting for the next and all
Deactivation subsequent calls they place.

*70 Cancel Call Waiting Allows users to turn off Call Waiting for the next call they
place.

*99 Clear Voice Message Allows users to clear the audible (and visible for some
Waiting Indicator devices) message-waiting indicator on their phone.

*33* Communication Barring Allows users to activate the current Communication

User-Control Activation Barring profile selected by the user through the web
portal.

#33* Communication Barring Allows users to deactivate the currently active

User-Control Deactivation Communication Barring profile selected by the user
through the web portal.

*#33# Communication Barring Allows users to find out which Communication Barring
User-Control Query profile is currently active.

*56* Connected Line Allows users to obtain the status of the Connected Line
Identification Restriction Identification Restriction service.
Interrogation

*57 Customer Originated Trace Allows users to place a trace on the last number that
called them.

*97 Directed Call Pickup Allows users to answer a call for another user in the same
pickup group by entering the assigned access code
followed by the extension of the user whose call is to be
picked up.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 223 OF 314
 Code Name Description

*33 Directed Call Pickup with Allows users to barge in on calls to or from another user
Barge-in in the same group by entering the assigned access code
followed by the extension of the user whose call is to be
barged-in on. Barge-in is successful only when the
second user has only that one call. When a user barges
in on an answered call, the call becomes a three-way call
and the user who barged in becomes the controller of the
three-way call. The group administrator configures a tone
that warns users on a call that another user is barging in
on their call. For more information about Barge-in, see
the BroadWorks Application Server Group Web Interface
Administration Guide – Part 2.
Users can prevent having their calls being barged in on by
using the Barge-in Exempt service.

*55 Direct Voice Mail Transfer Allows users to transfer a held call to voice mail, without
using the CommPilot Call Manager. The call can be
transferred to the user’s voice mailbox or to any other
voice mailbox in the group. The Voice Messaging service
or the Third-Party Voice Mail Support service must be
assigned to the user’s group.

*80 Diversion Inhibitor Allows a user to prevent Redirection services from being
activated on the terminating side of an unanswered call.

*78 Do Not Disturb Activation Allows users to activate the Do Not Disturb service.
When Do Not Disturb is active, the user’s phone does not
ring and all calls go directly to a “busy treatment”, such as
Voice Messaging.

*79 Do Not Disturb Deactivation Allows users to turn off the Do Not Disturb service.

#83 Escalate Call Supervision Call Center agents can use this code to escalate calls to a
supervisor. A supervisor who is not on a call and who
does not have the Do Not Disturb service enabled is
considered available and the call is routed to that
supervisor. The caller is put on “hold” by the agent when
the escalation to the supervisor is initiated.
The FAC code is available to agents with Call Center –
Standard or Call Center – Premium service assigned.

#63 Executive-Assistant Call Allows an assistant to push a call to the executive to

Push whom the call is intended. It can be either an incoming
filtered call or a call initiated by the assistant on behalf of
the executive.

#64 Executive-Assistant Initiate Allows an assistant to initiate a call on behalf of an

Call executive.

#65 Executive-Assistant Opt-in Allows an executive assistant to opt in to an executive

pool.

#66 Executive-Assistant Opt-out Allows an executive assistant to opt out of an executive

pool.

#61 Executive Call Filtering Activates executive call filtering.

Activation

#62 Executive Call Filtering Deactivates executive call filtering.

Deactivation

*26 Find-me/Follow-me Call Allows the user to send a call that they received from a
Push Find-me/Follow-me group back to the group to re-alert the
members.
This feature is only available to users who are defined as
BroadWorks users in the Find-me/Follow-me group.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 224 OF 314
 Code Name Description

*22 Flash Call Hold Allows users to put a call on hold on a phone that does
not have a Hold button. On this type of phone, a user
presses the Flash button or presses and releases the
hang-up button on the phone cradle.

#72 Forced Forwarding Allows users to activate forced forwarding for a call center
Activation queue.

#73 Forced Forwarding Allows users to deactivate forced forwarding for a call
Deactivation center queue.

#58 Group Call Park Allows users to park a call. The service hunts for the first
available user in the Call Park group and parks the call
there.
Note that this feature access code cannot be used until
the Call Park service has been assigned.

#51 Hunt Group Busy Activation Allows users to enable the Hunt Group Busy policy for
their hunt group. When the policy is enabled, all calls to
the hunt group receive busy treatment.

#52 Hunt Group Busy Allows users to disable the Hunt Group Busy policy for
Deactivation their hunt group.

#53 Hunt Group Busy Allows users to query the status of the Hunt Group Busy
Interrogation policy for their hunt group.

#82 Initiate Silent Monitoring A supervisor can use this code to silently listen in on a call
handled by an agent that they are monitoring.
This FAC code is available to supervisors with the Call
Center Monitoring service assigned.

*66 Last Number Redial Allows users to dial the number they dialed the most
recently from their extension. Users are only allowed to
redial numbers allowed by their Outgoing Calling Plan.

*96 Legacy Automatic Callback Allows users to camp on a busy called party. When the
Invocation user dials the feature access code after a call to a busy
destination, a callback request is created and the user is
automatically called back when the called party hangs up.

#96 Legacy Automatic Callback Cancels all active Legacy Automatic Callback requests.
Cancellation

*12 Location Control Activation Allows users to activate a location. The user dials the
Location Control Activation feature access code from the
location that needs to be activated. This feature can be
used from a Shared Call Appearance alternate location or
a BroadWorks Anywhere location.

*13 Location Control Allows users to deactivate a location. The user dials the
Deactivation Location Control Deactivation feature access code from
the location that needs to be deactivated. This feature
can be used from a Shared Call Appearance alternate
location or a BroadWorks Anywhere location.

#80 Make Outgoing Call as Call Allows users working as call center agents to make calls
Center using the call center phone number. Users can thus
override the default setting configured by the
administrator.

#81 Make Personal Outgoing Allows users working as call center agents to make calls
Call using their personal phone number. Users can thus
override the default setting configured by the
administrator.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 225 OF 314
 Code Name Description

#23 Mobility Call Anchoring Anchors the mobile phone on BroadWorks for all calls.
Activation This allows the user to use their personal mobile device
as their business phone and use originating and
terminating services available from their office phone.

*23 Mobility Call Anchoring Anchors the current call made from the same mobile
Activation Per Call device from which the FAC is dialed on BroadWorks.
This allows the user to use their personal mobile device to
make a business call. The call is processed as if it were
originated from the user's office phone.

#24 Mobility Call Anchoring Disables call anchoring for all calls to and from the
Deactivation mobile.

*24 Mobility Call Anchoring Disables call anchoring for the current call made from the
Deactivation Per Call same mobile device from which the FAC is dialed. This
allows the user to use their business mobile device to
make a personal call. The call is processed in the mobile
network.

#29 Mobility Calling Line ID Sets the calling line ID phone number to the user's mobile
Activation phone number.

*28 Mobility Calling Line ID Sets the calling line ID phone number of the mobile
Activation Per Call device from which the FAC is dialed to the device's phone
number for the current call.

#28 Mobility Calling Line ID Sets the calling line ID phone number to the user's fixed
Deactivation line calling line ID.

*29 Mobility Calling Line ID Sets the calling line ID phone number of the mobile
Deactivation Per Call device from which the FAC is dialed to the calling line ID
of the user's main line for the current call.

#84 Monitoring Next Call Allows call center supervisors to request Silent Monitoring
for the next call center call.

*60 Music On Hold Per-Call Allows users to deactivate the Music On Hold feature for
Deactivation their current calls.

#70 Night Service Activation Activates the Night Service for a specified call center at
Manual Override the time of activation. Calls incoming to the queue are
provided with the Night Service Manual Override
announcement and transferred to the queue configured
for the regular Night Service. The queue remains in that
state until the Night Service Manual Override service is
deactivated.

#71 Night Service Deactivation Deactivates Night Service Manual Override and the call
Manual Override center returns to its configured behavior.

*610 No Answer Timer Allows users to set the numbers of rings before No-
Answer handling is applied to the Voice Messaging, Third-
Party Voice Mail Support, Call Forwarding No Answer,
Call Forwarding No Answer To Voice Mail, and Sequential
Ringing services.

*84 Number Portability Activates the number portability announcement.

Announcement Activation

*85 Number Portability Deactivates the number portability announcement.

Announcement Deactivation

*71 Per Call Account Code Allows users to provide an account code before
attempting a call, or, during a call, flash and provide an
account code to be applied to all ongoing (currently held)
calls.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 226 OF 314
 Code Name Description

*50 Push To Talk Allows users to activate the Push To Talk (intercom)
service. The next call is automatically answered by its
recipient, subject to the recipient’s Push To Talk access
list.

*51* Selective Call Rejection Allows the user to obtain the status of the Selective Call
Interrogation Rejection service.

*75 Speed Dial 100 Allows users to dial the assigned code, and then dial the
assigned two-digit (00 through 99) speed dial number of
the party they want to call.

*74 Speed Dial 8 Allows users to dial the assigned code, and then the one-
digit (2 through 9) speed dial number of the party they
want to call.

*47 Sustained Authorization Allows users who are required to provide authorization
Code Activation (calls codes for outgoing calls to “unlock” this requirement.
unlocking) Having unlocked code activation, users are no longer
prompted for an authorization code and their calls
proceed without interruption.

*37 Sustained Authorization Allows users who have unlocked their code activation
Code Deactivation (calls requirement, to “lock” this requirement again.
locking)

*86 Voice Mail Retrieval Allows users to retrieve BroadWorks and third-party voice
mail.

*62 Voice Portal Access Allows users to access the group voice portal.

12.6 Group Directory

Use this item on the Group – Utilities menu page to list and display information for phone
numbers in the group.
The Group Directory is not available if your group is part of an enterprise. In its place, you
have access to the Enterprise Directory. For more information, see section 12.7
Enterprise Directory.

12.6.1 List and Display Information for Phone Numbers in Group

Use the Group – Group Directory page to view the list of phone numbers and related
information for each user.

Figure 185 Group – Group Directory

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 227 OF 314
 You can also display a summary of all numbers or a list that provides the details for each
number.

Figure 186 Group – Group Directory Summary

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 228 OF 314
 Figure 187 Group – Group Directory Details

1) On the Group – Utilities menu page, click Group Directory. The Group – Group
Directory page appears.
The Group – Group Directory page is a list page that contains an advanced search.
Depending on the number of pages of data on a list, list pages allow you to present
the data several different ways. You can click the headings of a column to change the
sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the data to specify search
criteria, or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous. The advanced search
lets you define specific search criteria to narrow your search and display a
manageable list. For more information on defining search criteria, see the
BroadWorks Getting Started Web Interface Administration Guide.
2) To display the summary of company phone numbers and related information, click
Group Directory Summary. A printable summary page appears in a separate
browser window.
3) To display the details for each phone number and related information, click Group
Directory Detail. A printable detail page appears in a separate browser window.
4) To display the previous page, click OK.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 229 OF 314
 12.7 Enterprise Directory
Use this item on the Group – Utilities menu page to list and display information for phone
numbers in the group.
The Enterprise Directory is only available if your group is part of an enterprise.

12.7.1 List and Display Information for Phone Numbers in Enterprise

Use the Group – Enterprise Directory page to view the list of phone numbers and related
information for each user in your enterprise.
You can also display a summary of all numbers or a list that provides the details for each
number.

Figure 188 Group – Enterprise Directory

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 230 OF 314
 Figure 189 Group – Enterprise Directory Summary

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 231 OF 314
 Figure 190 Group – Enterprise Directory Details

1) On the Group – Utilities menu page, click Enterprise Directory. The Group –
Enterprise Directory page appears.
The Group – Enterprise Directory page is a list page that contains an advanced
search. Depending on the number of pages of data on a list, list pages allow you to
present the data several different ways. You can click the headings of a column to
change the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the data to
specify search criteria, or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous. The
advanced search lets you define specific search criteria to narrow your search and
display a manageable list. For more information on defining search criteria, see the
BroadWorks Getting Started Web Interface Administration Guide.
2) To display the summary of company phone numbers and related information, click
Enterprise Directory Summary. A printable summary page appears in a separate
browser window.
3) To display the details for each phone number and related information, click
Enterprise Directory Detail. A printable detail page appears in a separate browser
window.
4) To display the previous page, click OK.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 232 OF 314
 12.8 Inventory Report
Use this item on the Group – Utilities menu page to generate an inventory report for the
group.

12.8.1 Generate Inventory Report for Group

Use the Group – Inventory Report page to generate a report that lists an inventory of one
or more of these criteria: users, services, phone numbers, devices, or department. The
report is sent via e-mail in a CSV format.

NOTE: If you select Service as one of the criteria, each service for each user is included on a
separate line, so the report can be quite long.

Figure 191 Group – Inventory Report

Figure 192 Sample Inventory Report (Beginning of Report; All Items Selected Except Service)

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 233 OF 314
 1) On the Group – Utilities menu page, click Inventory Report. The Group – Inventory
Report page appears.
2) Check the boxes for the items you want included in the report.
3) Enter the e-mail address where you want the report to be sent. The e-mail address
must be from 3 through 80 characters in user@domain format. It can contain only
one @ sign, letters, digits, and the following characters: !, #, $, %, &, *, +, -, /, =, _, {, },
|, ~, `, ., ?, ^, or single quotes.
4) To generate the report and display the previous page, click OK. The report is sent to
the specified e-mail address.
5) To display the previous page without generating the report, click Cancel.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 234 OF 314
 12.9 Password Rules
Use this item on the Group – Utilities menu page to list or set password rules for users.

12.9.1 List or Set Password Rules for Users

Use the Group – Password Rules page to edit or view the criteria currently set for user
passwords. If a service provider administrator has set some password rules, you cannot
edit the input boxes for those rules. If the service provider administrator has set all the
rules, this page is read-only.
Users must follow the criteria set on this page when entering, resetting, or changing their
passwords. The criteria that have a checkbox next to them apply.

Figure 193 Group – Password Rules

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 235 OF 314
 Figure 194 Group – Password Rules (Read-only)

1) On the Group – Utilities menu page, click Password Rules. The Group – Password
Rules page appears.
2) Specify the password format:
− Indicate whether a password cannot contain the login ID. A check mark means
the password cannot be the same as the login ID. The default is no check mark.
− Indicate whether a password cannot contain the old password. A check mark
means the password cannot contain the old password. The default is no check
mark.
− Indicate whether a password cannot be the reverse of the old password. A check
mark means the password cannot be the reverse of the old password. The
default is no check mark.
− Indicate whether a password must contain numbers. A check mark means that
the password must contain the selected number of numbers. The default is no
check mark. The number of numbers can be set from 1 through 10.
− Indicate whether a password must contain uppercase alpha characters. A check
mark means that the password must contain the selected number of uppercase
alpha characters. The default is no check mark. The number of uppercase alpha
characters can be set from 1 through 10.
− Indicate whether a password must contain lowercase alpha characters. A check
mark means that the password must contain the selected number of lowercase
alpha characters. The default is no check mark. The number of lowercase alpha
characters can be set from 1 through 10.
− Indicate whether a password must contain non-alphanumeric characters. A
check mark means that the password must contain the selected number of non-
alphanumeric characters. The default is no check mark. The number of non-
alphanumeric characters can be set from 1 through 10.
APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00
©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 236 OF 314
 − Click the minimum length of the password from the drop-down list. The minimum
length is also restricted by previously selected rules. The default is six.
3) Click Never to indicate that passwords do not expire. Otherwise, click After and type
the number of days (from 1 through 199) before passwords expire in the input box.
The default value is Never.
4) Click Never to indicate that login attempts are not disabled. Otherwise, click After and
select the number of login attempts from the drop-down list. The default value is
Never.
5) Select When login is disabled, send e-mail to, and type the e-mail address to send
notification of failed login attempts. The e-mail address can have at most 80
characters, must be in the user@domain format and can contain only one @ symbol
and the following characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, ! # $ % & * + - / = _ { } | ~ ` . ? ^ or single
quotes.
6) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 237 OF 314
 12.10 Passcode Rules
Use this item on the Group – Utilities menu page to list or set portal passcode rules for
users.

12.10.1 List or Set Passcode Rules for Users

Use the Group – Passcode Rules page to edit or view the criteria currently set for user
portal passcodes. You can choose to follow the passcode rules set by the system
provider administrator, by the service provider administrator (if your group was provisioned
by a service provider) or by the enterprise administrator (if your group is part of an
enterprise). You can also define your own passcode rules for use by the members of your
group.
Users must follow the criteria set on this page when entering, resetting, or changing their
portal passcodes.

Figure 195 Group – Portal Passcode Rules

1) On the Group – Utilities menu page, click Passcode Rules. The Group – Passcode
Rules page appears.
2) Use the Portal users use control to determine whether your users’ voice portal
passcodes will follow the rules set by the system provider administrator, by the service
provider or enterprise administrator, or by the group settings on this page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 238 OF 314
 3) Check the following rules to apply to the format of the passcode:
− Indicate whether a passcode cannot be the user’s own extension or phone
number. A check mark means the passcode cannot be the user’s own extension
or phone number. The default is not checked.
− Indicate whether a passcode cannot be the user’s own extension or phone
number reversed. A check mark means the passcode cannot be the user’s own
extension or phone number reversed. The default is not checked.
− Indicate whether a passcode cannot contain a configured number of repeated
digits and select the number from the drop-down list. A check mark means the
passcode cannot contain a configured number of repeated digits. The default is
not checked.
− Indicate whether a passcode cannot contain more than configured numbers of
sequentially ascending or sequentially descending digits and select the numbers
from the drop-down lists. A check mark means the passcode cannot contain
configured numbers of sequentially ascending or sequentially descending digits.
The default is not checked.
− Indicate whether a passcode cannot be repeating patterns, for example,
"514514". A check mark means the password cannot be repeated patterns. The
default is not checked.
− Indicate whether a passcode cannot be any of the configured number of last
passcodes and select the number. For example, if you enter “3”, the passcode
cannot be any of the last three passcodes. The default is not checked.
− Indicate whether a passcode cannot be the reverse of the old passcode. A check
mark means the passcode cannot be the user’s old passcode reversed. The
default is not checked.
− Indicate the minimum and maximum number of characters for passcodes. From
the drop-down lists, select the minimum and the maximum number of characters.
4) Select Never to indicate that passcodes do not expire. Otherwise, select After and
type the number of days before passcodes expire (from 15 through 180) in the input
box. The default value is Never.
5) Select Never to indicate that login attempts are not disabled. Otherwise, select After
and select the number of login attempts from the drop-down list. The default value is
Never.
6) Check When login is disabled, send e-mail to and type the e-mail address to send
notification of failed login attempts. The e-mail address can have at most 80
characters, must be in the user@domain format and can contain only one @ and the
following characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, ! # $ % & * + - / = _ { } | ~ ` . ? ^ or single quotes.

NOTE: The settings on this page reflect the current settings for the group passcode rules. If you
have chosen to use other settings provided by your system provider administrator, enterprise
administrator or service provider administrator, the settings displayed on this page may not
reflect the settings currently in effect within your group.

7) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 239 OF 314
 12.11 Device Configuration
Use this item on the Group – Utilities menu page to:
 List Configurable Devices
 Modify Configuration of Configurable Devices

12.11.1 List Configurable Devices

Use the Group – Device Configuration page to view the configurable devices assigned to
the group. From this page, you can modify the configuration of a listed device.

Figure 196 Group – Device Configuration

1) On the Group – Utilities menu page, click Device Configuration. The Group –
Device Configuration page appears.
This page is a list page. Depending on the number of pages of data in a list, list
pages allow you to search several different ways. You can click the heading of a
column to change the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the
data to specify search criteria, or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous.
For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started
Web Interface Administration Guide.
2) To configure a device, click the Configure link in the row for the device to configure.
3) To display the previous page, click OK.

12.11.2 Modify Configuration of Configurable Devices

Use the Group – Device Configuration Files page to view or modify configuration files of a
device type that supports Enhanced Configuration (some IP phones and Subnetwork
Access Protocol [SNAP] devices).

[Link] Manage Configurable Device Files

Use the Group – Configure Device Files page to view and manage the configurable device
files in the group. From this page, you can test file access and download configuration
files.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 240 OF 314
 Figure 197 Group – Configure Device Files

1) On the Group – Utilities menu page, click Device Configuration. The Group – Device
Configuration page appears.
2) To list or modify device files used by the identity/device profile type in the group, click
Edit in the row of the profile type. The Group – Device Configuration Files page
appears.
3) To rebuild (regenerate and transmit to the server) all the files used by the
identity/device profile type, click the Rebuild the files link. A warning message
appears indicating the impact to the system performance.
4) To force the rebuild (regenerate and transmit the files to the server even if the files
have not changed since the last rebuild), click Rebuild the files (force).
5) To instruct the group phones that use this device profile type and that support a
remote reset display to rebuild their configuration files, click the Reset the phones
link. A warning message appears indicating the impact to the system performance.
6) To test file access, click the link in the Access File column and the row for the file you
want to test. The browser imitates a device access for the file. If the operation is
successful, a new browser window is open displaying the file. If it is not successful,
you are shown an error message.
7) To download a repository file, click the Download link in the Repository File column
and the row for the file to download, and then follow the instructions of your browser.
8) To download a template file, click the Download link in the Template File column and
the row for the file for which you want to download the template file, and then follow
the instructions of your browser.
9) Click OK to return to the previous page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 241 OF 314
 [Link].1 Modify Configurable Device File

Use the Group – Device Configuration File Modify page to modify a file for a configurable
device.

Figure 198 Group – Configure Device File Modify

1) On the Group – Device Configuration page, click Edit in the row of the target device
type. The Group – Device Configuration Files page appears listing all the files for the
device.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the device file. The Group – Device Configuration
File Modify page appears.
3) To test file access, click the link next to Access File. The browser imitates a device
access for the file. If the operation is successful, a new browser window opens
displaying the file. If it is not successful, an error message appears.
4) To download a repository file, click the Download link next to Repository File, and
then follow the instructions of your browser.
5) To download a template file, click the Download link next to Template File, and then
follow the instructions of your browser.
6) To assign or update a file, select from the following:
− Manual specifies that the system does not generate the file for this device profile.
It is manually generated and saved onto the file repository.
− Default specifies that the device does not use a custom template. Instead, the
corresponding file/template defined at the device-profile level is used to build the
resulting file for the device.
− Custom specifies that the device has its own file/template for this file.
7) If you have selected a custom file, click Browse to add the file to the Upload File text
box. The uploaded file remains on your local computer.
APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00
©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 242 OF 314
 8) To rebuild (regenerate and transmit to the server) all the files used by the
identity/device profile type, click the Rebuild the files link. A warning message
appears indicating the impact to the system performance.
9) To force the rebuild (regenerate and transmit the files to the server even if the files
have not changed since the last rebuild), click Rebuild the files (force).
10) For IP phones that support a remote reset display, to instruct the phone to reload its
configuration file, click Reset the phones.
11) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

[Link] Manage Custom Tags

Use the Group – Configure Device Custom Tags page to manage custom device
management tags for your group devices.

Figure 199 Group – Configure Device Custom Tags

1) On the Group – Configure Device Modify page, click the Custom Tags tab. The
Group – Configure Device Custom Tags page appears.
2) To rebuild (regenerate and transmit to the server) all the files used by the
identity/device profile type, click the Rebuild the files link. A warning message
appears indicating the impact to the system performance.
3) To force the rebuild (regenerate and transmit the files to the server even if the files
have not changed since the last rebuild), click Rebuild the files (force).

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 243 OF 314
 4) To instruct the group phones that use this device profile type and that support a
remote reset display to rebuild their configuration files, click the Reset the phones
link. A warning message appears indicating the impact to the system performance.
5) Click OK to return to the previous page.

[Link].1 Add Custom Tag

Use the Group – Configure Device Custom Tag Add page to add a custom tag.

Figure 200 Group – Configure Device Custom Tag Add

1) On the Group – Configure Device Modify page, click the Custom Tags tab. The
Group – Configure Device Custom Tags page appears.
2) Click Add. The Group – Configure Device Custom Tag Add page appears.
3) In the Tag Name text box, enter the name for the tag (a maximum of 64 characters
including the beginning and ending % symbol).

NOTE: The name cannot contain the “%” symbol, except for the beginning and ending “%”
already provided for you; or, start with “BW”, which is reserved for system tags.

4) In the Tag Value text box, enter the value for the tag (from 1 through 256 characters).
5) To save your changes and return to the previous page, click OK.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 244 OF 314
 [Link].2 Modify Custom Tag

Use the Group – Identity/Device Profile Custom Tag Modify page to modify an existing
custom tag. You can also delete a custom tag using this page.

Figure 201 Group – Identity/Device Profile Custom Tag Modify

1) On the Group – Configure Device Modify page, click the Custom Tags tab. The
Group – Configure Device Custom Tags page appears.
2) Click Edit or another item in the row for the tag to edit. The Identity/Device Profile
Custom Tag Modify page appears.
3) To delete the tag, click Delete. The Group – Configure Device Custom Tags page
appears.

WARNING: The Delete function cannot be undone. Once you click Delete, your deletion is
final. You can press Cancel before you click Delete to avoid a deletion.

4) To modify the custom tag, enter the new value for the tag.
5) To save your changes and display the previous page, click OK.
To exit without saving click Cancel or select another page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 245 OF 314
 [Link].3 Delete Custom Tag

Use the Group – Configure Device Custom Tags page to delete a custom tag.

Figure 202 Group – Configure Device Custom Tags (Delete)

1) On the Group – Configure Device Modify page, click the Custom Tags tab. The
Group – Configure Device Custom Tags page appears.
2) Check Delete in the row for the tag to delete.
3) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving and display the previous page, click Cancel.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 246 OF 314
 [Link] Load Default Configuration File

Figure 203 Group – Device Configuration Modify

1) On the Group – Device Configuration page, click Edit in the row of the target legacy
device type. The Group – Device Configuration Modify page appears.
2) To load the configuration file, click Browse to add the file to the Upload File text box.
The uploaded file remains on your local computer.
3) To rebuild (regenerate and transmit to the server) the file, click the Rebuild the files
link. A warning message appears indicating the impact to the system performance.
4) To force the rebuild (regenerate and transmit the file to the server even if the file has
not changed since the last rebuild), click Rebuild the files (force).
5) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving and display the previous page, click Cancel.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 247 OF 314
 12.12 Device Management Event Queues
Use this item on the Group – Utilities menu to view and cancel device management
events generated by users or administrators in your group.
Events can be cancelled before they are completed, that is, while they are waiting in the
event queue to be processed or are being processed.

12.12.1 View or Cancel In Progress and Pending Events

You use the In Progress/Pending tab on the Group – Device Management Event Queues
page to view detailed information on or cancel in progress and pending device
management events triggered by a user or administrator in your group.

Figure 204 Group – Device Management Event Queues – In Progress/Pending

1) On the Group – Utilities menu page, click Device Management Event Queues. The
Group – Device Management Event Queues page appears.
2) The In Progress/Pending tab appears by default listing events that are either being
processed or waiting to be processed, which can be either pending or queued
internally. The events are shown in order of processing, with the first event in the list
being currently processed or next in line to be processed.
This page is a list page. Depending on the number of pages of data in a list, list
pages allow you to search several different ways. You can click the heading of a
column to change the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the
data to specify search criteria, or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous.
For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started
Web Interface Administration Guide.
3) To cancel an event, check the Cancel box in the row of the event.

NOTE: An event that is being processed on another host can only be cancelled on that host.

4) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 248 OF 314
 12.12.2 View Completed Events
You use the Completed tab on the Group – Device Management Event Queues page to
view detailed information on the completed device management events triggered by a
user or administrator in your group.

Figure 205 Group – Device Management Event Queues – Completed

1) On the Group – Utilities menu page, click Device Management Event Queues. The
Group – Device Management Event Queues page appears.
2) Click the Completed tab. This tab lists the events that have completed and are
ordered by completion time. This includes events cancelled while queued internally.
This page is a list page. Depending on the number of pages of data in a list, list
pages allow you to search several different ways. You can click the heading of a
column to change the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the
data to specify search criteria, or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous.
For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started
Web Interface Administration Guide.
3) Click OK to exit the page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 249 OF 314
 12.13 Extension Dialing
Use this item on the Group – Utilities menu to configure extension length.
Extension Dialing allows users in the group to dial only an extension number using the
web interface or a phone to reach other members of the group. Users in the group can be
configured with extensions of varying lengths within the limits (minimum and maximum)
defined for the group on this page. By default, these parameters are equal to those
configured at the system level.
You can decrease the maximum extension length down to the number of digits of the
longest assigned extension and increase the maximum extension length up to the system
maximum.
Modifying the maximum extension length has no impact on the existing extensions.
When you increase the minimum extension length, any assigned extensions are
automatically modified to match the new minimum length. Modifications are based on the
following guidelines:
 If the user’s directory number (DN) is sufficiently long, then DN digits are used to
lengthen the extension.
 If the user has no DN or the length of the DN is shorter than the new minimum, zeros
are added to the beginning of the extension.
If a resulting extension is in conflict with an existing extension, the extension is not
assigned. A counter is incremented and the number of unassigned extensions is
communicated to the administrator at the end of the modification.

12.13.1 Configure Extension Length

Use the Group – Extension Dialing page to modify the extension length for the group.

Figure 206 Group – Extension Dialing

1) On the Group – Utilities menu page, click Extension Dialing. The Group – Extension
Dialing page appears.
2) Configure the maximum number of digits allowed in an extension. From the
Maximum Extension Length drop-down list, select the number of digits.
3) Configure the minimum number of digits of digits allowed in an extension. From the
Minimum Extension Length drop-down list, select the number of digits.
4) Configure the default number of digits in an extension. From the Default Extension
Length drop-down list, select the number of digits.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 250 OF 314
 The default number of digits determines the number of digits from the user’s DN to be
used as extension, when automatically creating extensions.
5) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

12.14 Intercept Group

The Intercept Group service allows your service provider or enterprise administrator to
block calls to all members of your group. When Intercept Group is enabled for your group,
callers for intercepted calls to and from members of your group are provided with
informative announcements and alternate routing options.
Use the Intercept Group item on the Group – Utilities menu to view intercept settings for
your group.

12.14.1 List Intercept Group Settings

Use the Group – Intercept Group page to view the Intercept Group settings configured by
the service provider or enterprise administrator for your group.

Figure 207 Utilities – Intercept Group

1) On the Group – Utilities menu page, click Intercept Group. The Group – Intercept
Group page appears.
2) To display the previous page, click OK.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 251 OF 314
 The following table provides an explanation of each item on the Utilities – Intercept Group
page.
Item Description

Intercept Group When set to On, the Intercept Group service is enabled and calls to and
from the members of the group are treated as specified on this page.

Inbound Call Options

Intercept All Inbound When this option is selected, all inbound calls are intercepted.
Calls

Allow Inbound Calls When this option is selected, inbound calls are intercepted, except for the
from System-Defined calls from specific numbers defined by the system administrator.
Phone Numbers

Allow Inbound Calls If this option is selected, users in your group can receive calls.
(Partial Intercept)

Use Alternate If this option is checked, users hear an outbound blocking announcement
Outbound Blocking when trying to make a call.
Announcement.

Route to Voice Mail When this option is selected, all incoming calls are routed to the user’s
voice mail.

Play new Phone When this option is selected, the callers hear the new phone number that
Number replaces your current phone number.

Transfer on “0” to When this option is selected, the callers are transferred to the specified
Phone Number phone number upon pressing “0”. For example, this can be the number of
the reception.

Outbound Call Options

Block All Outbound When this option is selected, group members cannot make calls. When
Calls users try to make a call, the call is intercepted and they hear an
announcement.

Route to Phone When this option is selected, calls made by group members are routed to
Number the specified phone number.

Allow Outbound Local When this option is selected, group members are allowed to make local
Calls calls.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 252 OF 314
 12.15 LDAP Directory
Use this item on the Group – Utilities menu to select the LDAP directory type and
configure the group LDAP directory.

12.15.1 Configure Group LDAP Directory

Use the Group – LDAP Directory page to select the source of the Lightweight Directory
Access Protocol (LDAP) directory configuration (system-level, service provider or
enterprise-level, or group-level) and to configure a group LDAP directory.
The LDAP Integration service allows users to access an LDAP directory from their
CommPilot Call Manager.

NOTE: This service must also be assigned (Assign Services on Group – Resources menu)
and turned on (LDAP Integration on Group – Services menu) for users to carry out searches on
the directory server.

Figure 208 Group – LDAP Directory

1) On the Group – Utilities menu page, click LDAP Directory. The Group – LDAP
Directory page appears.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 253 OF 314
 2) Use the LDAP Directory for Group Members control to determine the source of your
directory server’s configuration. You can use a directory configured by your system
administrator, your service provider administrator (if your group was provisioned by a
service provider), or your enterprise administrator (if your group is part of an
enterprise). You can also configure a directory server for the users in your group.
3) If you select “System Provider Directory”, “Service Provider Directory”, or “Enterprise
Directory” (note that for a group under an Enterprise, “Service Provider Directory” is
replaced by “Enterprise Directory”), you do not need to supply the rest of the
information on this page. Click OK to save your changes and return to the previous
page.
4) If you select “Group Directory”, type or select data in the Group LDAP Directory
Settings input boxes:
− Directory Address: Enter the address of the LDAP server, which should be an IP
address or a fully qualified domain name. It cannot contain a space or the @
character.
− Directory Port: Enter the port of the LDAP server, which should be an integer
from 1 through 65535. The default is 389.
− Search Base: Enter the search base of the LDAP server. The search base is the
search root suffix, which should reflect the domain name of the site you are
searching.
− If the LDAP server requires connections protected by the Secure Sockets Layer
(SSL) security protocol, check Use SSL. The use of SSL requires the
BroadWorks application server to store a digital certificate from your directory
server. Request your system provider administrator, service provider
administrator, or enterprise administrator to load your directory server’s certificate
for you.
− If the LDAP server requires authentication, check Requires Authentication. Then
specify the Authenticated DN (Distinguished Name in the directory server) and
Authenticated Password. The authenticated DN should be a unique reference to
the authenticated user within the directory tree. The password is the password
for the authenticated user.
− If the LDAP server supports sort control, check Supports Sort Control. (Using this
control speeds up the search.)
− If the LDAP server supports paged results control, check Supports Paged Results
Control. (Using this control speeds up the search.)
− You can specify a search filter to include in all directory server searches in the
Search Filter box. By default, the suggested search filter is
“(telephoneNumber=*)”, which will restrict all directory server searches made
using the CommPilot Call Manager to directory users with the telephoneNumber
attribute specified.
− Check Always Include Search Attribute in Search Filter if you want to force the
current Search Attribute to be included in all directory server searches, even
when the user leaves search parameters blank. By default, a search with blank
parameters will use only the value of the Search Filter box described above, for
example, “(telephoneNumber=*)”. If you check this box, the system will also
include the current search attribute with a wildcard character. For example,
“(telephoneNumber=*)(cn=*)”.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 254 OF 314
 − You can use the table at the bottom of the web page to specify up to four
attributes for the system to return from the directory server and appear in the
CommPilot Call Manager after each successful search. In the Attribute Name
column of the table, specify the attributes you wish to display, and assign a text
label to appear for each attribute in the Web Label column. You must select one
of the attributes listed in this table to be the current search attribute. Click the
button corresponding to your choice in the Search Attribute column.
5) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

12.16 Verify Translation and Routing

Use this item on the Utilities menu page to create Verify Translation and Routing (VTR)
requests and run test calls.

12.16.1 Run Test Calls

Use the Group – Verify Translation and Routing page to create VTR requests and run test
calls to gather information about translation, routing, and services for calls.

Figure 209 Group – Verify Translation and Routing (Parameters)

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 255 OF 314
 Figure 210 Enterprise – Verify Translation and Routing (SIP Message)

1) On the Group – Utilities menu page, click Verify Translation and Routing. The
Group – Verify Translation and Routing page appears.
2) Select the type of request you want to submit. For Select VTR Type, select
Parameters or SIP Message.
3) If you selected Parameters, provide the following information:
− From the Origination Type drop-down list, select the type of origination to use to
trigger the VTR request.
− In the Origination text box, enter the originating address/identification of the
selected type:
− A line or port number must contain the ‘@’ character and can be at most 161
characters.
− A phone number can be at most 23 characters.
− A user ID must be in the form ‘user@domain’ and can be at most 161
characters.
− A URL must contain the ‘@’ character and can be at most 256 characters.
− In the Destination text box, enter the call destination address/identification. It can
be of any type allowed for call originations.
− In the Contact text box, enter the contact URL to use for the test call. The URL
must contain @ character and can be at most 256 characters.
− In the Diversion text box, enter the diversion URL to use for the test call. The
URL must contain @ character and can be at most 256 characters.
4) If you selected SIP message, enter the message in the Enter a SIP message to be
used text box. The SIP message must be longer than 20 characters to be considered
valid.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 256 OF 314
 5) To submit the request, click the Execute VTR request link. The result of the test is
displayed in the VTR Result box.
6) To exit the page, click OK.

12.17 Voice Portal Branding

Use this item on the Utilities menu page to select greetings.

12.17.1 Select Greetings

Use the Group – Voice Portal Branding page to select the sources for the voice portal
greeting and the voice messaging greeting.
The voice portal greeting is played when a caller dials the voice portal number. The voice
messaging greeting is played when users in the group dial their extension to access their
mailbox.
Any voice portal administrator can also record or delete these messages by phone after
they log in to the voice portal.

NOTE: Assign the Voice Messaging Group service before using this page to brand greetings.
The maximum length allowed for the greetings files is five minutes.

Figure 211 Group – Voice Portal Branding

1) On the Group – Utilities menu page, click Voice Portal Branding. The Group –
Voice Portal Branding page appears.
2) For Voice Portal Greeting and Voice Messaging Greeting, select the greeting to use:
− Select Default Greeting to use the system default.
− Select Branded Greeting and select a file with your custom greeting from the
drop-down list to use a custom greeting.
3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 257 OF 314
 DEPARTMENT
ADMINISTRATION

This section contains the following chapters:

 Department Administrator Tasks and Responsibilities
 Profile Menu
 Group Services Menu
 Utilities Menu

NOTE: This section lists all the tasks of a department administrator. However, the section
references only those tasks a department administrator performs for a department as a unit.
Italics identify the tasks that involve individual members of the department, that is, users, for
example, Add, modify, and delete users. For information about the user tasks, refer to the
BroadWorks Application Server Group Web Interface Administration Guide - Part 2.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 258 OF 314
 13 Department Administrator Tasks and Responsibilities

A department administrator, using the CommPilot web interface of the Application Server,
performs these tasks:
 Add, modify, and delete users
 Manage their own password
 Add, modify, and delete these Group Services which are configured as virtual users:
the Auto Attendant (Basic), Meet-Me Conference Bridges (Basic), Call Center
(Advanced), and Hunt Group (Advanced) services.
 Add, modify, and delete these utilities: Common Phone List and Group Directory
A department may be a subdivision of an enterprise, a subdivision of a group within an
enterprise, or a subdivision of a group provisioned by a service provider.
Department administrators perform the same tasks as a group administrator, using the
same pages in the web interface. Therefore, the sections of this document for department
administrators do not also provide these procedures. Instead, references to the
procedures shared by department and group administrators are provided.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 259 OF 314
 14 Profile Menu

This chapter contains sections that correspond to each item on the Group – Profile menu
page for a department administrator.
This menu page is the home page for department administrators and it appears when you
log in. To return to this page at any time, click Home.

Figure 212 Group – Profile Menu

The Group – Profile menu for a department administrator contains this item:
 Basic menu
This menu displays the items that all department administrators can use:
− Users
− Change Password

14.1 Access Group – Profile Menu

Use the Group – Profile menu to add, modify, and delete the users in your department and
change your password.
On your Home page, in the Options list, click Profile. The Group – Profile menu page
appears.

14.2 Access Procedures for Profile Menu Tasks

To perform the department tasks provided by this menu:
 In the online document, click Change Password.
 In the printed document, go to section 4.3.1 Change Your Password.
To perform the user tasks provided by this menu, see the BroadWorks Application
Server Group Web Interface Administration Guide - Part 2.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 260 OF 314
 15 Group Services Menu

This chapter contains sections that correspond to each item on the Group – Group
Services menu page for a department administrator.

Figure 213 Group – Group Services Menu

The Group – Group Services menu for a department administrator contains these items:
 Basic menu
This menu displays the items that all department administrators can use:
− Auto Attendant
− Meet-Me Conference Bridges
− Music/Video On Hold
 Advanced menu
 This menu displays the items that department administrators can use only if such
functions have been assigned to them:
− BroadWorks Anywhere
− Call Center
− Group Paging
− Instant Group Call
− Hunt Group
APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00
©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 261 OF 314
 − Route Point
− Trunk Group

15.1 Access Group – Group Services Menu

Use the Group – Group Profile menu to add, modify, and delete the group services on the
menu page for your department.
On your Home page, in the Options list, click Group Services. The Group – Group
Services menu page appears.

15.2 Access Procedures for Group Services Menu Tasks

To perform the department tasks provided by this menu:
 In the online document, click Music/Video On Hold.
 In the printed document, go to section 6.5 Music/Video On Hold.
To perform the user tasks provided by this menu, see the BroadWorks Application
Server Group Web Interface Administration Guide - Part 2.

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 262 OF 314
 16 Utilities Menu

This chapter contains sections that correspond to each item on the Group – Utilities menu
page for a department administrator.

Figure 214 Group – Utilities Menu

The Group – Utilities menu for a department administrator contains these items:
 Basic menu
This menu displays the items that all department administrators can use:
− Common Phone List
− Group Directory
 Advanced menu
This menu displays the items that department administrators can use only if such
functions have been assigned to them.

16.1 Access Group – Utilities Menu

Use the Group – Utilities menu to add, modify, and delete listings in the Common Phone
List and to display the group directory listings.
On your Home page, in the Options list, click Utilities. The Group – Utilities menu page
appears.

16.2 Access Procedures for Utilities Menu Tasks

Use the Group – Utilities menu to add, modify, and delete listings in the Common Phone
List and to display the group directory listings.
On your Home page, in the Options list, click Utilities. The Group – Utilities menu page
appears.
To perform the tasks provided by this menu:
In the online document, click:
 Common Phone List
 Group Directory
In the printed document, go to the following sections:
 Section 12.3 Common Phone List
 Section 12.6 Group Directory

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 263 OF 314
Acronyms and Abbreviations

This section lists the acronyms and abbreviations found in BroadWorks documents, web
interfaces, and online help. The acronyms and abbreviations are listed in alphabetical
order along with their meanings.

2BCT 2 B-Channel Transfer

3DES Triple Digital Encryption Standard
3GP 3GP (3GPP File Format)
3GPP 3rd Generation Partnership Project
3PCC Third Party Call Control
3PCR Third Party Call Recording
3WC Three-Way Calling
4CIF Four Times the Common Intermediate Format
AA Auto Attendant
AAA Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting
AAC Account/Authorization Code
AAC Advanced Audio Coding
AAL ATM Adaptation Layer
AAST Average Answer Setup Time
ABNF Augmented Backus-Naur Format
AC Active Calls
AC Alarm Count
AC Attendant Console
ACA Accounting Answer
ACB Automatic Callback
ACC Agent Call Control
ACC Advanced Call Control
ACD Automatic Call Distribution
ACFS ASM Cluster File System
ACgPN Additional Calling Party Number
ACI Alternate Call Indicator
ACL Access Control List
ACM Address Complete Message
ACM Audio Compression Manager
ACR Accounting Request
ACR Anonymous Call Rejection
ACS Advanced Communications Server

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 264 OF 314
 ACST Average Call Setup Time
ACW After Call Work
ADDS Active Directory Domain Services
Admin Administrator
ADSL Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line
AE Assistant–Enterprise
AES Advanced Encryption Standard
AGA Admin Group Add
AGC Automatic Gain Control
AGD Admin Group Delete
AH Authentication Header
AHR Automatic Hold Retrieve
AHT Average Handling Time
AHTBCL Average Hold Time Before Call Loss
AJP Apache JServ Protocol
AKA Also Known As
ALaw ITU Standard for Analog to Digital Audio Data Conversion
ALG Application Layer Gateway
ALI Automatic Location Identification
ALI DB Automatic Location Identification Database
ALTC Alternative Connectivity
AMR Adaptive Multi-Rate
AMR-NB Adaptive Multi-Rate Narrowband
AMR-WB Adaptive Multi-Rate Wideband
AMS Access Mediation Server
ANAB Average Number of Agents Busy
ANALO Average Number of Agents Logged Off
ANI Automatic Number Identification
ANLYZD AnalyzedInformation INVOKE Operation
anlyzd AnalyzedInformation RETURN RESULT Component
ANN Announcement
ANR Application Not Responsive
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AoC Advice of Charge
AoCC Advice of Charge – Binding/actual information
AoC-D Advice of Charge – During call

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 265 OF 314
 AoC-E Advice of Charge – End of call
AoCI Advice of Charge – Non-binding/estimation
AoC-S Advice of Charge − Start of communication
AoR Address of Record
AORT Average OCI Response Time
AP Application Patch
API Application Programming Interface
APN Application Processing Node
APPN Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking
ARP Address Resolution Protocol
ARPA Advanced Research Projects Agency
ARPU Average Revenue Per Unit
ARS Automatic bitRate Selection
ART Answer Response Time
AS Application Server
AS TAS Application Server Telephony Application Server
ASA Admin Service Provider Add
ASA Average Speed of Answer
ASCF SIP interface between Application Server and SCF
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASD Admin Service Provider Delete
ASM Automatic Storage Management
ASN Abstract Syntax Notation
ASN.1 Abstract Syntax Notation 1
ASP Application Server Process
ASP AC ASP Active Message
ASPAC Application Service Part Active
ASR Application Server Redundancy
ASR Application Server Registration
ASR Automated Speech Recognition
ASRQD Average SIP Redirection Queue Delay
ATA Analog Telephone Adapters
ATABC Amount of Time Agent Busy With Call
ATALO Amount of Time Each Agent Logged Off
ATALOI Amount of Time Each Agent Logged On and Idle
ATASC Average Time Agents Spends on Call

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 266 OF 314
 ATCF Access Transfer Control Function
ATI Alternate Trunk Identity
ATI Any Time Interrogation
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATQ Average Time in Queue
ATU-STI Access Transfer Update − Session Transfer Identifier
AUA Admin User Add
AUCX Audit Connection
AUD Admin User Delete
AUEP Audit Endpoint
AVC Video Compression (Advanced Video Coding)
AVP Attribute-Value Pair
AVP Audio Visual Profile
B2BUA Back-to-Back User Agent
BA BroadWorks Anywhere
BC Business Communicator
BCCT BroadWorks Common Communication Transport
BCD Binary-Coded Decimal
BCL Basic Call Log
BCO Busy Camp On
BCSM DP Basic Call State Model Detection Point
BE Back End
BE Back End Server
BEP Back End Processor
BER Basic Encoding Rules
BFCP Binary Floor Control Protocol
BGCF Border Gateway Control Function
BHCA Busy Hour Call Attempts
BI Business Intelligence
BICC Bearer Independent Call Control
BLF Busy Lamp Field
BM BroadWorks Mobility
BNF Backus-Naur Format
BOM Byte Order Mark
BOSH Bidirectional-streams Over Synchronous HTTP
BPS Bits Per Second

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 267 OF 314
 BRI Basic Rate Interface
BS Billing System
BSAM Basic Sequential Access Method
BSD Berkeley Software Distribution
BSS Business SIP Services
BW BroadWorks
BWAMS BroadWorks Assistant–Mobile Service
BWAR BroadWorks Application aRchive
BWCCA BroadWorks Call Center Agent
BWCCS BroadWorks Call Center Supervisor
BWECCR BroadWorks Enhanced Call Center Reporting
BWTCSPI BroadWorks Sametime Telephony Control Service Provider
Interface
C2DM Cloud to Device Messaging
CA Certification Authority
CaaS Communications-as-a-Service
CAC Carrier Access Code
CALA Central America/Latin America (Spanish)
CALEA Communication Assistance for the Law Enforcement Act
CALLP Call a Prototyped Procedure or Program
CAMA Centralized Automatic Message Accounting
CAMEL Customized Applications for Mobile Network Enhanced Logic
CAP Client Application Protocol (Note anytime you see CAP and Xsi
described together, CAP will almost always be referring to
Client Application Protocol.)
CAP CAMEL Application Part
CAP Carrierless Amplitude and Phase Modulations
CAP-C Client Application Protocol-Client
CAP-S- Client Application Protocol-Server-Call Center
CallCenter
CAPTCHA Completely Automated Public Turing test to tell Computers and
Humans Apart
CAS Conferencing Application Server or Channel Associated
Signaling
CAT Customized Alerting Tone
CBC Cipher Block Chaining
CBF Communication Barring – Fixed
CB-UC Communication Barring-User Control

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 268 OF 314
 CC Country Code
CC Call Category
CCA Call Center Agent
CCA Call Center Agent License
CCA Credit Control Answer
CC-APDU Call Content Delivery – Application Protocol Data Unit
CCBS Completion of Communications to Busy Subscriber
CCC Call Content Channels
CCC Client Call Control
CCCF Call Continuity Control Function
CCF Charging Collection Function (used for off-line charging)
CCFH Credit-Control-Failure-Handling
CCLID CC Link Identifier
CCLink Call Content Link
CCM CommPilot Call Manager
CCM Call Capacity Management
CCNR Completion of Communications by No Reply
CCPRI Call Center Public Reporting Interface
CCR Call Center Reporting
CCR Credit Control Request
CCRS Call Center Reporting Server
CCS Call Center Supervisor
CCS Call Center Supervisor License
CCSR Call Center Supervisor Reporting License
CCXML Call Control eXtensible Markup Language
CD Call Deflection
CD Compact Disc
CD Conference Duration
CDC Call Data Channel
CDF Charging Data Function
CDIV Communication Diversion
CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
CDP Charge Determination Point
CDR Call Detail Record
CDR Charging Data Record
CD-ROM Compact Disc Read-Only Memory

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 269 OF 314
 CDS Call Detail Server
CEA Capabilities-Exchange-Answer
CER Capabilities-Exchange-Request
CERN Conseil Européen pour la Recherche Nucléaire
CF Collection Function
CF Call Forward
CFA Call Forwarding Always
CFA Charging Function Addresses
CFB Call Forwarding Busy
CFE Customer Furnished Equipment
CFGNA Call Forwarding Group No Answer
CFGNRc Call Forwarding Group Not Reachable
CFNA Call Forwarding No Answer
CFNR Call Forwarding Not Reachable
CFNRc Call Forwarding Not Reachable
CFNRY Call Forwarding No Reply (No Answer)
CFS Call Forwarding Selective
CFUNR Call Forwarding Unreachable
CFW Control Channel Framework
CFW Control Framework
CFWD Call Forward
CGC Collaborate Guest Client
CGF Carrier Grade Framework
CGF Charging Gateway Function
CGI Common Gateway Interface
CGP Charge Generation Point
CgPN Calling Party Number
CHAP Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol
CI Cell Identification or Cell Identity
CI Charge Indicator
CIC Carrier Identification Code
CID Communication Identifier (related to Lawful Intercept Interface)
CID Calling Number Identification
CIDB Calling Line ID Blocking
CIF Common Intermediate Format
CIN Communication Identity Number

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 270 OF 314
 CIS Center for Internet Security
CJK Chinese, Japanese, and Korean
Class Custom Local Area Signaling Service
CLEC Competitive Local Exchange Carrier
CLI Command Line Interface
CLIB Calling Line ID Blocking
CLID Calling Line ID
CLIO Calling Line ID Blocking Override
CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation
CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction
CLNP Connectionless Network Protocol
CLS Congestion Level Subvariable
CM Call Manager
CM Configuration Manager
CM/AC Call Manager/Attendant Console
CMA Congestion Management Applied
CMAS or Client Management Access Server (NOT Application Server)
CM-AS
CMI Client Management Interface
CMPS or Client Management Profile Server
CM-PS
CMR Congestion Management Requested
CMR Codec Mode Request
CMS Conferencing Media Server
CMS Concurrent Mark Sweep (which is a phase of the Java Garbage
collector)
CMS Call Management Servers Call Management Servers
C-MSISDN Correlation Mobile Subscriber ISDN Number
CN Call Notify
CN Core Network
CNAM Caller ID with NAMe
CNAM Caller Name Retrieval Service
CNAP Calling Name Presentation
COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation
COLR Connected Line Identification Restriction
COM Component Object Model
CONF Conference

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 271 OF 314
 COP Capacity Operating Point
CORBA Common Object Request Broker Architecture
CORS Cross Origin Resource Sharing
COS Class of Service
COT Customer Originated Trace
CP Call Pickup
CPC Calling Party Category
CPCF Content Provider Charging Function
CPCM CommPilot Call Manager
CPCS Common Part Convergence Sub-Layer
CPD Call Progress Detection
CPE Customer Premises Equipment
CPE CommPilot Express
CPG Call Progress Message
CPL Call Processing Language
CPP CommPilot Push Protocol
CPR Call Park Retrieve
CPS Calls Per Second
CPSF Call Processing Service Function
CPU Central Processing Unit
CR Call Rate
CR Call Recording
CR Change Request
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CRCX Create Connection
CRLF Carriage Return Line Feed
CRM Customer Relationship Management
CRN Contingency Routing Number
CRS Call Recording Server
CRS Cluster Ready Services
CS Conferencing Server
CS Circuit Switched
CS–AS Conferencing Server–Application Server
CSCF Call Session Control Function
CSEL Carrier Selection
CSeq Command Sequence

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 272 OF 314
 CSI CAMEL Subscription Information
CSI Client Service Interface
CSMA/CD Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection
CS-MGW Circuit-Switched Media GateWay
CS–MS Conferencing Server–Media Server
CSP Concerned Signaling Point
CSR Certificate Signing Request
CSRN Circuit-Switched Domain Routing Number
CSS Cascading Style Sheets
CSS Cluster Synchronization Service
CSS Concerned Subsystem
CSTA Computer Supported Telecommunications Applications
CSV Comma-Separated Value
CT CAC Cut Through
CT Call Transfer
CT Call Type
C-TEP CAP Top End Processor
CTI Computer Telephony Integration
CUG Closed User Group
CW Call Waiting
CW Communication Waiting
CWC City-Wide Center
CWC City-Wide Centrex
CWMP Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) WAN Management
Protocol
CWT Call Waiting Tone
DAS Destination Application Server
DAS Direct-Attached Storage
DB Database
DBA Doing Business As
DBA Database Administrator
dBm The power ratio in decibel (dB) of the measured power
referenced to one milliwatt (mW).
Dbmo The level of a signal as specified in dBm0, is the level of that
signal (in dBm) as measured at the reference point of the
network.
DBMS Database Management System
DBS Database Server

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 273 OF 314
 DbS Database Server
DCE Data Circuit Terminating Equipment
DCE Distributed Computing Environment
DCE Data Communications Equipment
DCLID Dialable Caller ID
DDE Dialed Digit Extraction
DDFH Direct-Debiting-Failure-Handling
DDNS Dynamic Domain Name System
DEN Directory-Enabled Networking
DES Data Encryption Standard
DF Do Not Fragment Bit
DFN Diameter Front Node
DFS Distributed File Service
DGC Distributed Group Call
DGMGRL Data Guard Command Line Interface (software product)
DH Diffie-Hellman
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DI Diversion Inhibitor
DID Direct Inward Dialing
DiffServ Differentiated Services
DIMM Dual In-line Memory Module
DITA Darwin Information Typing Architecture
DITA-OT DITA Open Toolkit
DKS Device Key Synchronization
DLC Data Link Control
DLCI Data Link Connection Identifier
DLCX Delete Connection
DLL Dynamic Link Library
DLSw Data Link Switching
DM Device Management
DME Distributed Management Environment
DMH Dual Mode Handset
DMI Digit Manipulation Index
DMI Desktop Management Interface
DMOB Device Management On BroadWorks
NOTE: Do not use this term; use Device Management instead.
DMR Downward Message Routing
APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00
©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 274 OF 314
 DMS Device Management Service
DMS Device Management System
DMTF Desktop Management Task Force
DMTP3 Distributed MTP3
DMZ Demilitarized Zone
DN Directory Number
DN Distinguished Name
DNC Distributed Network Calls
DND Do Not Disturb
DNH Directory Number Hunting
DNIS Dialed Number Identification Service
DNR Domain Name Resolver
DNS Directory Name Service (This is more generic than Domain
Name System.)
DNS Domain Name System
DOD Direct Outward Dialing
DOI Domain of Interpretation
DOM Document Object Model
DOS Disk Operating System
DoS Denial of Service
DP IF Detection Point Information Flow
DPA Disconnect-Peer-Answer
DPC Destination Point Code
DPR Disconnect-Peer-Request
DPT Dynamic Packet Trunks
DPUBI Directed Call Pickup with Barge-in
DSA Digital Signature Algorithm
DSAP Destination Service Access Point
DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point
DSI Deployment Studio Image
DSL Digital Subscriber Line
DSN Database Store Name
DSO Data Source Object
DSP Digital Signal Processor
DSP Deployment Studio Project
DSR Direct Signal Reporting
DSS Digital Signature Standard

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 275 OF 314
 DST Daylight Savings Time
DST Deployment Studio Template
DT Desktop
DTAF Device Type Archive File
DTD Document Type Definition
DTE Data Terminal Equipment
DTG Destination Trunk Group
DTMF Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency
DTP Data Transfer Process
DTP Deployment Test Plan
DTX Discontinuous Transmission
DUT Device Under Test
DV Digital Video
DWR Device-Watchdog-Request
E 164 An ITU-T recommendation for international telecommunication
numbering
E1 European Equivalent to North America T1
E911 Emergency 911
EA Equal Access
EA External Authentication
EA Ending Announcement
EACD Enhanced Automatic Call Distribution
ECCR Enhanced Call Center Reporting
ECF Event Charging Function (used for online charging)
ECL Enhanced Call Log
ECLPQI Enhanced Call Logs Public Query Interface
E-CLIP External Calling Line ID Delivery
ECMA European Computer Manufacturers Association
ECN Expensive Call Notification
ECN Explicit Congestion Notification
E-CSCF Emergency Call Session Control Function
ECT Explicit Call Transfer
ECT Explicit Communication Transfer
ECUR Event Charging with Unit Reservation
EDCDIC Extended Binary Communication Data Interchange Code
EDT Eastern Daylight Time
EG711 Enhanced G.711

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 276 OF 314
 EGP Exterior Gateway Protocol
EM Emergency
EMEA Europe, Middle East, and Africa
eMLPP Multi-Level Precedence and Pre-Emption
EMS Element Management System
EMSF Element Management Service Function
eMTA Embedded Media Terminal Adapters
EMTA Embedded Multimedia Terminal Adaptors
EN Event Notification
ENUM E.164 Number Mapping
EOCP Enhanced Outgoing Calling Plan
EOL End of Line
EP Emergency Patch
ERDB ESZ Routing Database
ERMES European Radio Messaging System
ERP Enterprise Resource Planning
E-SBC Enterprise Session Border Controller
ESCA Enhanced Shared Call Appearance
ESGW Emergency Service Gateway
ESME External Short Messaging Entity
ESN Emergency Service Number
ESP Encapsulating Security Payload
ESPOSREQ Emergency Positioning Request
ESQK Emergency Services Query Key
ESRN Emergency Services Routing Number
ESZ Emergency Service Zone
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
EULA End-User License Agreement
EV ExtraView
EVRC Enhanced Variable Rate Codec
EVRC0 EVRC-A Header-Free Payload Format
EVRC-A Enhanced Variable Rate Codec A (signifies the initial EVRC
version)
EVRCNW EVRC-NW Interleave/Bundle Payload Format
EVRC-NW Enhanced Variable Rate Codec – Narrowband Wideband
EVRCNW0 EVRC-NW Header-Free Payload Format
EWM Estimated Wait Message
APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00
©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 277 OF 314
 EWS External Web Server
EWT Estimated Wait Time
EWT Expected Wait Time
FA Flexible Alerting
FAC Feature Access Codes
FAN Fast Application Notification
FAQ Frequently Asked Questions
FCAPS Fault, Configuration, Accounting, Performance, and Security
FCC Federal Communications Commission
FCF Fast Connection Failover
FCI Furnish Charging Information
FCOF Forwarding Counter Override feature
FDDI Fiber Distributed Data Interface
FE Front End (server)
FE Functional Element
FEAM Functional Entity Access Manager
FEC Front-End Clipping
FEP Front End Processor
FIFO First In, First Out
FLV Flash Video
FMC Fixed-Mobile Covergence

FMFM Find-me/Follow-me
fmtp fmtp is defined in RFC 4566 and updates the initial definition in
RFC 2327. It is never expanded as it is part of the protocol
rather than an acronym. It is registered with IANA as fmtp.
FP Fixpack
Fps or FPS Frames per Second
FPU Floating Point Unit
FQDN Fully Qualified Domain Name
FR Failure Rate
FR Frame Relay
FR Feature Request
FRA Flash Recover Area
FS Functional Specification
FSK Frequency Shift Keying
FTP File Transfer Protocol
FTTH Fiber to the home

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 278 OF 314
 FX Firefox
FXO Foreign eXchange Office
FXS Foreign eXchange Subscriber
GA Group Administrator
GA Generally Available
GAL Exchange Global Address List
GB Gigabyte
GC Garbage Collection
GC Group Call
GCI Global Cell Identification
GCLID Group Calling Line Identity
GCP Group Call Park
GETS Government Emergency Telecommunications Service
GGP Gateway-to-Gateway Protocol
GGSN GPRS Gateway Support Node
GID Group ID
GIF Graphics Interchange Format
GIN Generate Implicit Numbers
GIPS Global IP Solutions
GMSC Gateway Mobile Switching Center
GMT Greenwich Mean Time
GN Generic Number
GOP Group of Pictures
GP Grace Period
G-PON Gigabit-capable Passive Optical Network
GPRS General Packet Radio Service
GRID Oracle Grid Infrastructure
GRUU Globally Routable User Agent URI
GSM Group Spéciale Mobile
GSM Global System for Mobile Communications
gsmSCF GSM Service Control Function
gsmSRF GSM Specialized Resource Function
gsmSSF GSM Service Switching Function
GSSAPI Generic Security Services Application Program Interface
GT Global Title
GTD Generic Transparency Descriptor

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 279 OF 314
 GTI Global Title Indicator
GTT Global Title Translation
GUI Graphical User Interface
GVP Group Voice Portal
GW Gateway
GWT Google Widget Toolkit
HA High Availability
HCB Hierarchical Communication Barring
HD High Definition
HDD Hard Disk Drive
HDLC High-level Data Link Control
HDPI High-Density Screen
HERFP Heterogeneous Error Response Forking Problem
HEX Hexadecimal
HFC Hold For Enquire
HIPCOM Hosted IP Communications
HLR Home Location Register
HM Health Manager
HMAC Hashed Message Authentication Code
HMC Hosted Messaging and Collaboration
hPBX Hosted Private Branch Exchange
HPLMN Home Public Land Mobile Network
HPR High Performance Routing
HSQL-DB HyperSQL Database
HSS Home Subscriber Server
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol
HTTPD Hypertext Transfer Protocol Daemon
HTTP/S Hypertext Transfer Protocol or Hypertext Transfer Protocol
Secure Sockets
HTTPS Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure Sockets
Hz Hertz
I/O Input/Output
IAB Internet Activities Board
IAC Interpret As Command
IAD Integrated Access Device
IAM Initial Address Message

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 280 OF 314
 IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority
IAP Intercept Access Point
IC Instant Conferencing
ICA Independent Computing Architecture
ICID IMS Charging Identity
I-CLIP Internal Calling Line ID Delivery
ICM Incoming Call Management
ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol
ICP Incoming Calling Plan
ICS IMS Centralized Services
ICSA In-Call Service Activation
I-CSCF Interrogating Call Session Control Function
ICSS Internet Connection Secure Server
ICV Integrity Check Value
IDD International Direct Dial
IDE Integrated Development Environment
IDEA International Data Encryption Algorithm
IDLC Integrated Data Link Control
IDR Instantaneous Decoder Refresh
IDRP Inter-Domain Routing Protocol
IE Information Element
IE Internet Explorer
IEC InterExchange Carrier
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEC Immediate Event Charging
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IESG Internet Engineering Steering Group
IETF Internet Engineering Task Force
IF Interface
iFC initial Filter Criteria
IFC Initial Filter Criteria
I-Frame Intra-Frame
IGC Instant Group Call
IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol
IGP Interior Gateway Protocol
IIOP Internet Inter-ORB Protocol

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 281 OF 314
 IKE Internet Key Exchange
iLBC internet Low Bitrate Codec
ILEC Incumbent Local Exchange Carrier
IM Instant Messaging
IM IP Multimedia
IM&P Instant Messaging and Presence (See note for “IMP” in row that
follows.)
IMAP Internet Message Access Protocol
IMCN IP Multimedia Core Network
IMF Internet Message Format
IMP Instant Messaging and Presence (Note that in 2013, IMP was
used at times, instead of IM&P.) When used as a service,
feature, or item that already exists, use “IM&P”. If it is actually
used for names of items in the system such as containers,
subsystem, and instances, then it is okay to use “IMP”.
IMRN Intermediate Routing Number
IMRN IP Multimedia Routing Number
IMRN IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) Routing Number
IMS Information Management System
IMS IP Multimedia Subsystem
IMS-GWF IP Multimedia Subsystem Gateway Function
IMS-MGW IP Multimedia Subsystem Media Gateway Function
IN International
IN Intelligent Network
INDG Invalid Digit Range
INIT Initiation
InitialDP Initial Detection Point
INSC Intelligent Network Service Control
InterLATA Crossing over and terminating in another Local Access
Transport Area
InterProcess
Communication
IntraLATA Originating and terminating in the same Local Access Transport
Area
IO Input Output
IOI Inter-operator Identifier
IOPS Input/Output Operations Per Second
IOT Interoperability Testing
IP Internet Protocol

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 282 OF 314
 IPA IPA iPhone (or iOS) Application Archive
IPC Interprocess Communication
IPDC Internet Protocol Device Control
IPEI International Portable Equipment Identity
IPNet Internet Protocol Network
IP-PBX Internet Protocol-Private Branch Exchange
IPSec IP Security Architecture
IPSP IP Signaling Point
IPTEL IP Telephony
IPTV Internet Protocol Television
IPv4 Internet Protocol Version 4
IPv6 Internet Protocol Version 6
IPX Internet Packet Exchange
IQ Info/Query Stanza
IRFT Internet Research Task Force
IRI Intercept Related Information
IRS Implicit Registration Set
IS Interim Standard
ISA Industry Standard Architecture
iSAC internet Speech Audio Codec
ISAKMP Internet Security Association and Key Management Protocol
ISC IMS Service Control
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
ISO International Organization for Standardization
ISP Internet Service Provider
ISR Integrated Services Router
IST Immediate Service Termination
ISUP Integrated Services User Part
ISUP IAM ISUP Initial Address Message
ISV Independent Software Vendor
IT Inactive Test
ITMS iTunes Music Store
ITSO International Technical Support Organization
ITU International Telecommunications Union
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union – Telecommunication
Standardization Sector
IVR Interactive Voice Response

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 283 OF 314
 IXC Inter Exchange Carrier
JAR Java Application Resource
JAR Java ARchive
JSON JavaScript Object Notation
JASS JumpStart Architecture and Security Scripts
JDBC Java Database Connection
JDBC Java Database Connectivity
JDK Java Development Kit
JID Jabber Identifier
JIP Jurisdiction Information Parameter
JIT Java Just-in-Time Compiler
JMAPI Java Management API
JNDI Java Naming and Directory Interface
JNLP Java Network Launch Protocol
JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group
JRE Java Runtime Environment
JSON JavaScript Object Notation
JSP JavaServer Pages
JVM Java Virtual Machine
JWS Java Web Start
KB Kilobyte
Kbps Kilobits per Second
KDC Key Distribution Center
kHz Kilohertz
KPI Key Performance Indicator
KTS Key Telephone System
L2F Layer 2 Forwarding
L2TP Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol
LAC Location Area Code
LAES Lawfully Authorized Electronic Surveillance
LAI Location Area Identification
LAN Local Area Network
LAPB Link Access Protocol Balanced
LATA Local Access Transport Area
LCA Local Calling Area
LCD Liquid Crystal Display

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 284 OF 314
 LCP Link Control Protocol
LCR Location-Based Calling Restrictions
LCS Microsoft Live Communications Service - Microsoft Office Live
Communications Server
LD Long Distance
LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
LDAPS Lightweight Directory Access Over SSL
LDCAE Long Duration Call Accounting Events
LDIF LDAP Data Interchange Format
LDIF LDAP Directory Interchange Format
ldpi Low-Density Screen
LEA Law Enforcement Agency
LEA/MD Law Enforcement Agency/Mediation Device
LEC Local Exchange Carrier
LED Light-Emitting Diode
LERG Local Exchange Routing Guide
LGPL Lesser General Public License
LI Lawful Intercept
LIE Location Information Element
LIID Lawful Interception Identifier
LIS Location Information Server
LIS ID Location Information Server Identifier
LK Location Key
LLC Logical Link Layer
LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol
LM License Manager
LMS Learning Management System
LNP Local Number Portability
LNRD Last Number Redial
LO Location Object
LO Local
LOA Letter of Agreement
LOCREQ Location Request INVOKE Operation
locreq Location Request RETURN RESULT Component
LPO Local Processor Outage
LPS Local Premium Service
Lr Loose Route

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 285 OF 314
 LRO Last Routing Option
LRS License Reporting Server
LRU Least Recently Used
LSAP Link Service Access Point
LSSGR LATA Switching Systems Generic Requirements
LTE Long Term Evolution
M3UA Message Transfer Part (MTP) Level 3 User Adaptation
MAC Media Access Control
MAC Message Authentication Code
MAC address Media Access Control address
MACD Move-Add-Change-Delete
MACs Moves, Adds, and Changes
MAP Mobile Application Part
MAPI Messaging Application Programming Interface
MAST Maximum Answer Setup Time
MB Maintenance Build
MB Megabyte
Mb Megabit
MBps Megabytes per Second
Mbps Megabits per Second
MC Message Center
MCA Multiple Call Arrangement
MCC Mobile Country Code
MCD Maximum Conference Duration
MCID Malicious Communication Identification
MCID Malicious Communication Identification
MCST Maximum Call Setup Time
MCT Malicious Call Trace
MCU Multi-point Control Unit
MCU Multipoint Control Unit
MD Mediation Device
MD5 Message Digest 5 Algorithm
MDCX Modify Connection
MDN Mobile DN
mdpi Medium-Density Screen
MEDGACO Media Gateway Control

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 286 OF 314
 MEED Mobile Extension to Extension Dialing
MF Mobile Forwarding
MGC Media Gateway Controller
MGC/F Media Gateway Controller Function
MGCF Media Gateway Control Function
MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol
MHGBWNRc Make Hunt Group Busy When All Available Agents are Not
Reachable
MHTML MIME Hypertext Markup Language
MHz Megahertz
MIB Management Information Base
MIME Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions
MIN Mobile Identification Number
MLD Multicast Listener Discovery
MLHG Multi-Line Hunt Group
MM Mobile Manager
MMC Meet-Me Conference
MMS Multimedia Messaging Service
MMTel Multimedia Telephony
MMTEL- MMTEL-Services
Services
MNC Mobile Network Code
MNO Mobile Network Operator
MO Managed Object
MO Mobile Origination
MOC Microsoft Office Communications
MOH Music On Hold
MOSPF Multicast Open Shortest Path First
MOV QuickTime Multimedia Movie File Format
MP Maintenance Patch
MP Play-Collect Category
MP3 MPEG Audio Layer 3
MPC Multi-Path Channel
MPEG Moving Pictures Experts Group
MPLS Multiprotocol Label Switching
MPM Multi-Processing Modules
MPOA Multiprotocol Over ATM

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 287 OF 314
 MPS Messages Per Second
MPTN Multiprotocol Transport Network
MPTY Multiparty Service
MRCP Media Resource Control Protocol
MRF Media Resource Function
MRFC Multimedia Resource Function Controller
MRFC Media Resource Function Controller
MRFP Multimedia Resource Function Processor
MS Media Server
MS Microsoft
MS Milliseconds
MS Mobile Subscriber
MSAG Master Street Address Guide
MSBG Multi-service Business Gateway
MSC Mobile Service Center
MSC Mobile Switching Center
MS-CHAP v2 Microsoft Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol
version 2
MSCID Mobile Switching Center Identification
MSCML Media Server Control Markup Language
MSDN Mobile Subscriber Directory Number
MSEC Milliseconds
MSFE Media Server Front End
MSGDIR MessageDirective INVOKE Operation
msgdir MessageDirective RETURN RESULT Component
MSI Microsoft Installer
MSISDN Mobile Station ISDN Number
MSISDN Mobile Subscriber ISDN Number
MSN Microsoft Network
MSN Multiple Subscriber Number
MSO Multiple Service Operators
MSO Multi System Operator
MSP Programmable Switch
MSR Multiservice Switch Router
MSRN Mobile Station Roaming Number
MSRN Mobile Subscriber Roaming Number
MSRP Message Session Relay Protocol

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 288 OF 314
 MSRQD Maximum SIP Redirection Queue Delay
MSS Media Server Selection
MSU Message Signaling Unit
MT Mobile Termination
MTA Message Transfer Agent
MTP Message Transfer Part
MTU Maximum Transmission Unit
MUC Multi-User Chat
MVNO Mobile Virtual Network Operators
MVS Multiple Virtual Storage Operating System
MWI Message Waiting Indicator or Indication
MX Mail Exchanger
NADP North American Dial Plan
NAI Nature of Address Indicator
NAI Network Access Identifier
NANP North American Numbering Plan
NAPTR Naming Authority Pointer
NAS Network-Attached Storage
NAT Network Address Translation
NC Non-Call Category
NCF Network Computing Framework
NCNAA Number of Calls Not Answered By Agent
NCOS Network Class of Service
NCP Network Control Protocol
NCR Numeric Character Reference
NCS Network-based Call Signaling
NCS Network Call Signaling
NCSA National Computer Security Association
NDC National Destination Code
NDD National Dialing Digit
NDIS Network Driver Interface Specification
NE Network Element
NEBS Network Equipment Building Standards
NETANN NETwork ANNouncements
NetBIOS Network Basic Input/Output System
NFM Network Function Manager

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 289 OF 314
 NFS Network File System
NGN Next Generation Network
NI Network Indicator
NIC Network Information Center
NIC Network Interface Card
NIO New I/O
NIS Network Information Systems
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology
NMS Network Management System
NNACL NPA-NXX Active Code List
NNTP Network News Transfer Protocol
NOA Nature Of Address
NOC Network Operations Center
NON Nature of Number
NP Numbering Plan
NP Number Portability
NPA Numbering Plan Area
NPDB Number Portability Database
NPI Numbering Plan Indicator
NPLR Number Portability Location Register
NPS Network Policy Server (MS Active Directory)
NRS Network Resource Selection
NS Network Server
NSAP Network Service Access Point
NSF National Science Foundation
NSIS Nullsoft Scriptable Install System
NSOCI Network Server Open Client Interface
NSOSS Network Server Operations Support System
NSPS Network Server Provisioning Server
NSS Name Service Switch
NSSync Network Server Synchronization
NSXS Network Server Execution Server

NTFS NT File System (used with Windows NT)

NTI Network Translation Index
NTLM Windows NT LAN Manager
NTP Network Time Protocol

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 290 OF 314
 NUC Non-upward Compatible
NVP Network Voice Portal
NVT Network Virtual Terminal
NWC N-Way Calling
OA Operator Assisted
OAC Outgoing Access Code
OAC Outside Access Code
OAMP Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning
OAP Operator Assisted Plus
OBCI Optional Backward Call Indicator
OC Office Communicator
OCF Online Charging Function
OCI Open Client Interface
OCI TXNS OCI Transactions
OCI-C Open Client Interface-Call Control
OCI-P Open Client Interface-Provisioning
OCI-R Open Client Interface-Reporting
OCN Original Called Number
OCP Outgoing Calling Plan
OCS Online Charging System
OCS Open Client Server
OCS Office Communications Server (Microsoft)
O-CSI Origination CAMEL Subscription Information
ODB Operator Determined Barring
ODBC Open Database Connectivity
ODI Open Datalink Interface
ODI Original Dialog Identifier
ODM Original Device Manufacturer
ODP Outgoing Digit Plan
OEL Oracle Enterprise Linux (a software product)
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
OID Object Identifier
OIP Originating Identity Presentation
OIR Originating Identity Restriction
OLI Originating Line Information
OMA Open Mobile Alliance

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 291 OF 314
 OMCI ONT Management and Control Interface
ONC Open Network Computing
ONT Optical Network Terminal
OOD Out-of-Dialog
OOTB Out-of-the-Blue
OPC Originating Point Code
OPDP Outgoing Pinhole Digit Plan
OpenGL Open Graphics Library
OR Optimal Routing
ORB Object Request Broker
ORREQ Origination Request INVOKE Operation
orreq Origination Request RETURN RESULT Component
OS Operating System
OSA Open Systems Adapter
OSA Open Service Access
OSF Open Software Foundation
OSI Open Systems Interconnect
OSN Open Solution Network
OSPF Open Shortest Path First
OSPM Operating System-level Performance Measurement
OSS Operations Support System
OSSP OSS Protocol
OT Originating Treatment
OTA Over-The-Air
OTG Originating Trunk Group
OU Organization Unit
OZA Office Zone Announcement
P2P Peer to Peer
PA Provisioning Adapter
PA Provisioning Application
PAC Proxy Auto Configuration
PAD Packet Assembler/Disassembler
PAI P-Asserted-Identity
PAID P-Asserted-Identity
PAM Presence and Availability Management
PAM Pluggable Authentication Modules

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 292 OF 314
 PANI P-Access-Network-Info
PAP Password Authentication Protocol
PAS Premier Access Solution
PB Patch Bundle
PBX Private Branch Exchange
PC Personal Computer
P-CFA P-Charging-Function-Addresses
PCM Pulse Code Modulation
PCMM PacketCable Multimedia
PCMU Pulse Code Modulation mu-law
PCPI P-Called-Party-ID
P-CSCF Proxy Call Session Control Function
PCV P-Charging-Vector
PDA Personal Digital Assistant
PDF Portable Document Format
PDN Pilot Directory Number
PDP Private Dial Plan
PDSN Packet Data Serving Node
PDU Protocol Data Unit
PE Phone Editor
PEM Privacy Enhanced Mail
P-Frame Predicted-Frame
P-Frame Predicted-Frame
PHP Hypertext Preprocessor
PI Protocol Interpreter
PIC Points In Call
PIC Preferred Inter-exchange Carrier
PIC Primary Inter-exchange Carrier
PID Protocol Identifier
PIDF Presence Information Data Format
PIDF LO Presence Information Data Form - Location Object
PIM Personal Information Manager
PIM Protocol Independent Multicast
PINX Private Integrated Services Network eXchanges
PiP Picture in Picture
PISN Private Integrated Services Networks

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 293 OF 314
 PIU Ports in Use
PKC Public Key Certificate
PKCS Public Key Cryptosystem
PKI Public Key Infrastructure
PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
PM Performance Measurement
PM Project Management
PM Product Manager
PM Project Manager
PMT Protocol Monitor Tool
PMTU Path Maximum Transfer Unit
PNA Push-Notification-Answer
PNG Portable Network Graphics
PNNI Private Network-to-Network Interface
PNR Push-Notification-Request
PoC Push To Talk over Cellular (Part of the Instant Group Call
Capabilities)
POP Point Of Presence
POP Post Office Protocol (for example POP3)
POTS Plain Old Telephone Service
PPI P-Preferred-Identity
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
PPPoE Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
Pps Packets Per Second
PPTP Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol
PRACK Provisional Response Acknowledgement
PRC People’s Republic of China
PRC Remote Procedure Call
PRFX Prefixing Digits
PRI Primary Rate Interface
PRI Public Reporting Interface
PS Packet Switch
PS Professional Services
PS Profile Server
PS Provisioning Server
PSAP Public Service Access Point
PSAP Public Safety Answering Point

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 294 OF 314
 PSDN Public Switched Data Network
PSI Preparing SSF Instructions
PSI Public Service Identities
PSM Phone Status Monitoring
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network
PSU Patch Set Update
PSUI P-Served-User-Identity
PTPS Provisioning Transactions Per Second
PTR PTR stands for a particular type of resource record that can be
queried for via DNS (for example, a pointer to another part of the
domain namespace). This explanation has been included in this
table not to put in the documents that are edited, but rather to
record the fact that this has been looked into.
PTT Push To Talk
PUI Public User Identity
PUR Profile Update Request
PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit
PVEC Polycom Video Error Concealment
PVI PriVate user Identity
PVP Provisioning Validation Protocol
PWD Print Working Directory
PX Pixel
PXS Phone Xtension Service
PXT Phone Xtension
QA Quality Assurance
QCIF Quarter Common Intermediate Format
QFS Quick File System
QLLC Qualified Logical Link Control
QML Qt Meta Language
QoP Quality of Protection
QoS Quality of Service
QSIG Q (point of the ISDN model) Signaling
QVGA Quarter Video Graphics Array
RAC Real Application Cluster
RACF Resource Access Control Facility
RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service
RAID Redundant Array of Independent Disks
RAM Random Access Memory

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 295 OF 314
 RARP Reverse Address Resolution Protocol
RAS Registration, Admission, and Status Protocol
RAS Remote Access Service
RBOC Regional Bell Operating Company
RBT Ringback Tone
RC Release Candidate
RC Rate Center
RC Release Complete
RC4 Rivest Cipher 4
RCC Remote Call Control
RCF Registration Confirmation
RCF Remote Call Forward
RCS Rich Communications Suite
RDB Reporting Database
RDBMS Relational Database Management System
RDN Relative Distinguished Names
RDP Remote Desktop Protocol
Regex Regular Expression
REST Representational State Transfer
REXEC Remote Execution Command Protocol
RFC Request for Comments
RFN Rating Function Application
RFP Request for Proposal
RGB Red Green Blue
RHEL Red Hat Enterprise Linux
RIP Routing Information Protocol
RIPE Réseaux IP Européens
RISC Reduced Instruction-Set Computer
RLM Radio Link Management
RLM Restriction Level M
RMAN Oracle Recovery Manager
RMI Remote Method Invocation
RMPS REGISTER Messages Per Second
RN Routing Number
RO Remote Office
RoHS Restriction of Hazardous Substance

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 296 OF 314
 ROI Return on Investment
ROM Read-Only Memory
RP Route Point
RPC Remote Procedure Call
RPID Remote-Party-ID
RPM RPM Package Manager
RPM Revolutions Per Minute
RPO Remote Processor Outage
RPS Registrations Per Second
RQNT Notification Request
RR Retransmission Rate
RR Resource Record
RRQ Read Request
RRQ Registration Request
RS Redirect Server
RS Reporting Service
RSA Rivest Shamir Adleman
RSH Remote Shell
RSIP Realm-specific Internet Protocol
RSLM Remote Subscriber Line Module
RSLM Restriction Sublevel M
RST Residential SIP Telephony
RSVP Resource Reservation Protocol
RTCP Real-Time Control Protocol
RTF Rich Text Format
RTMP Real Time Messaging Protocol
RTO Retransmission Time-out
RTP Real-Time Transport Protocol
RTSP Real-Time Streaming Protocol
RTT Round Trip Delay Time
RTTI Real-time Tariff Information
RTTTL Ring Tone Text Transfer Language
RU Rack Unit
R-URI Request Uniform Resource Identifier
RW Read Write
SA System Administrator

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 297 OF 314
 SA Security Association
SA Service Association
SA Subscriber Agent
SaaS Software as a Service
SAC Service Access Code
SAC Sustained Authorization Codes
SAC Session Admission Control
SACK Selective Acknowledgement
SAG Session Agent Group
SAML Security Assertion Markup Language
SAN Storage Area Network
SAP Service Access Point
SAS Serial Attached SCSI
SAS Source Application Server
SASL Simple Authentication and Security Layer
SAVP Secure Audio Video Profile
SBC Session Border Controller
SCA Selective Call Acceptance
SCA Shared Call Appearance
SCAN Single Client Access Name
SCAP Shared Call Appearance
SCC Service Centralization and Continuity
SCC AS PSI Service Centralization and Continuity Application Server Public
DN Service Identity Directory Number
SCCF Subscriber Content Charging Function
SCCP Signaling Connection Control Part
SCCP Signaling Connection Control Point
SCCP Simple Conference Control Protocol
SCCP Skinny Call Control Protocol
SCE Service Creation Environment
SCF Selective Call Forwarding
SCF Service Control Function
SCF Session Continuity Function
SCIM Service Capability Interaction Manager
SCORM Sharable Content Object Reference Model
SCP Service Control Point
SCP Simple Control Protocol

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 298 OF 314
 SCP Secure Copy
SCP Signaling Control Point
SCR Selective Call Rejection
SCRL Service Center Routing List
S-CSCF Serving – Call Session Control Function
SCSI Small Computer System Interface
SCTP Stream Control Transmission Protocol
SCTP/IP Stream Control Transmission Protocol/Internet Protocol
SCUR Session Charging with Unit Reservation
SD Standard Definition
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SDK Software Development Kit
SDLC Synchronous Data Link Control
SDP Session Definition Protocol
SDP Session Description Protocol
SDR Session Data Replication
SEI Supplemental Enhancement Information
SET Secure Electronic Transaction
SFF Small Form Factor
SFTP Secure File Transfer Protocol
SG Signaling Gateway
SGML Standard Generalized Markup Language
SGP Signaling Gateway Process
SGW Signaling Gateway
Sh The interface between an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS)
Application Server (AS) and an IMS Home Subscriber Server
(HSS)
SHA Secure Hash Algorithm
SHLR Smart Home Location Register
S-HTTP Secure Hypertext Transfer Protocol
SID Silence Indicator
SIGTRAN Signaling Transport Protocol Stack over IP
SIMPLE Session Initiation Messaging and Presence Leveraging
Enhancements
SIO Service Information Octet
SIP Session Initiation Protocol
SIPREC SIP Recording

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 299 OF 314
 SISR Semantic Interpretation for Speech Recognition
SIT Special Information Tone
SIU Signaling Interface Unit
SK Service Key
SKU Stock Keeping Unit
SLA Service-Level Agreement
SLC Single Level Cell
SLF Subscription Locator Functional
SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol
SLP SUPL Location Platform
SLS Signaling Link Selection
SLTM Signaling Link Text Message
SMAP Software Management Application Protocol
SMB Small Medium Business
SMC Short Message Service Short Code
SMC Standard Management Committee
SMDI Simplified Message Desk Interface
SMDPP Short Message Delivery Peer-to-Peer
SMDR Station Management Server
SME Short Message Entity
SME Small to Medium-sized Enterprises
SME System Management Entity
SMF Service Management Facility
SMI Structure of Management Information
S-MIME Secure Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension
SMPP Short Message Peer-to-Peer Protocol
SMS Short Message Service
SMSC Short Message Service Center
SMS-C Short Message Service Center
SMSDPP Short Message Service Delivery Point to Point INVOKE
Operation
smsdpp Short Message Service Delivery Point to Point RETURN
RESULT component
SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
SN Significant Numbers
SN Subscriber Number
SNA System Network Architecture

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 300 OF 314
 SNA Subscribe-Notifications-Answer
SNAP Subnetwork Access Protocol
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SNR Subscribe-Notifications-Request
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol
SOA Start of Authority
SOA Suppression of Announcement
SOAP Simple Object Access Protocol
SOHO Small-Office/Home-Office
SONET Synchronous Optical Network
SORM Russian acronym for Lawful Intercept (LI)
SP Service Provider
SP Server Process
SPAN Services and Protocols for Advanced Networks
SPC Self Point Code
SPC Signaling Point Code
SPE Service Price Enquiry
SPE Service Provider Equipment
SPI Security Parameter Index
SPNP Support of Private Numbering Plan
SQCIF Sub-Quarter Common Interchange Format
SQL Structured Query Language
SR Selective Router
SRF Specialized Resource Function
SRGS Speech Recognition Grammar Specification
SRI Send Routing Information
SRT Setup Response Time
SRTP Secure Real-time Transport Protocol
SRV Service Locator
SRVCC Single Radio Voice Call Continuity
SS Subsystem
SS Supplementary Services
SS7 Signaling System 7
SSAP Source Service Access Point
SS-CSI Supplementary Services Notification CAMEL Subscription
Information
SSD Solid State Drive

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 301 OF 314
 SSF Service Switching Function
SSH Secure Shell
SSHA Salted SHA1
SSID Shared Subscription ID
SSL Secure Sockets Layer
SSN Subsystem Number
SSO Single Sign-On
SSP Switch-to-Switch Protocol
SSP Service Switching Point
SSRC Synchronization Source
SST State Snapshot Transfer
STI Session Transfer Identifier
STN/STN-SR Session Transfer Number/Session Transfer Number for Single
Radio
STNC Station Code
STP Signal Transfer Point
STUN Simple Traversal of UDP through NAT
SUID Set Owner User ID
SUPL Secure User Plane Location
SUT System Under Test
SVC Switched Virtual Circuit
SVG Scalable Vector Graphics
SVP System Voice Portal
SW Software
SWManager Software Manager
T&C Terms and Conditions
T1 Trunk level 1
TAC Technical Assistance Center
T-ADS Terminating Access Domain Selection
TAPI Telephony API
TAS Telephony Application Server
TB Terabyte
TC Total Calls
TC Transactional Capabilities
TCAP Transactional Capabilities Application Part
TCC Trunking Call Capacity
TCP Transmission Control Protocol

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 302 OF 314
 TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
T-CSI Terminating Call State Indication
TCSPI Telephony Control Service Provider Interface
TDM Time Division Multiplexing
TDMA Time Division Multiple Access
TDP Trigger Detection Points
TEP Top End Processor
TF Toll Free
TFP Transfer Prohibited
TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol
TGID Trunk Group ID
TGRP Trunk Group
TIAS Transport Independent Application Specific
TIP Terminating Identity Presentation
TIPHON Telecommunications and Internet Protocol Harmonization Over
Networks
TIR Terminating Identity Restriction
TISPAN Telecommunications and Internet Converged Services and
Protocols for Advanced Networking
TLDN Temporary Local Directory Number
TLDN Temporary Location Directory Number
TLPB Transport-Layer Protocol Boundary
TLS Transport Layer Security
TLV Tag Length Value
TMN Telecommunications Management Network
TN Telephone Number
TO Toll
TON Type of Network Information
TON Type of Number
TOS Type of Service
TP Technology Platform
TPA Telephony Presence Adapter
TPS Transactions Per Second
TPS Toll Premium Services
TPVM Third-Party Voice Mail
TR Terminating Redirection
TRA Transfer Allowed

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 303 OF 314
 TRD Transit Routing Domain
TRMT Treatment
TSD Two-Stage Dialing
TT Termination Treatment
TT TimesTen
TTL Time to Live
TTRep TimesTen Replication
TTS Text-to-Speech
TUI Telephony User Interface
TZ Timezone (I am not sure when this as one word was given to
me, but in general in should be two words (Time Zone).
UA User Agent
UAC User Access Control
UAC User Agent Client
uaCSTA User Agent Computer Supported Telecommunications
Applications
UAS User Agent Server
UC Unified Communications
UCD Uniform Call Distribution
UCS Unified Computing System
UCS Universal Character Set
UDA User-Data-Answer
UDID Unique Device ID
UDP User Datagram Protocol
UDPTL User Datagram Protocol Transport Layer
UDR User-Data-Request
UE Unit Equipment
UE User Equipment
UFS UNIX File System
UG User Get
UI User Interaction
UI User Interface
UID Unique Identifier
Uid Unique Identifier
UIQ User Interface Quartz
uLaw North American Standard for Analog to Digital Audio Data
Conversion

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 304 OF 314
 UM Unified Messaging
UMP User Managed Privacy
UMR Upward Message Routing
UMS Messaging Server (Note that this had been called Collaborate
Messaging Server previously and before that, United Messaging
Server.)
UNDT Undetermined Destination
UO User Originating
UPF Upgrade Policy File
UPN User Principal Name
URI Uniform Resource Identifier
URL Uniform Resource Locator
US User Set
USB Universal Serial Bus
USM User-based Security Model
USS Sharing Server (Note that this had been called Collaborate
Sharing Server previously and before that, United Sharing
Server.)
UT Universal Time
UTC Coordinated Universal Time
UTF UCS Transformation Format
UUI User-to-User Information
UUID Universally Unique Identifier
UUS User-to-User Signaling
UVS Video Server
UX User Experience
V&H Vertical and Horizontal
VACM View-based Access Control Model
VAD Voice Activity Detection
VAIL VoIP Application Interface Layer
VAO Video Add-On
VAR Value-Added Reseller
VBE-BE Video Bridge – Back End
VBE-FE Video Bridge – Front End
VBV Video Buffering Verifier
VC Virtual Circuit
vCard Virtual (business) Card
VCC Voice Call Continuity

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 305 OF 314
 VCC-AS Voice Call Continuity Application Server
VCPU Virtual Central Processing Unit
VDB Validation Database
VDN VCC Domain Transfer Directory Number
VFS Virtual File System
VGA Video Graphics Array
VIP Virtual IP
VLAN Virtual Local Area Network
VLR Visitor Location Register
VLS Virtual Licensing Server
VM Virtual Machine
VM Voice Mail
VM Voice Messaging
VMD Voice Mail Deposit
VMR Voice Mail Retrieval
VMR Violation Monitoring and Removal
VMS Voice Mail System
VMSC Visiting MSC
VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol
VoIP ATA Voice over IP Analog Telephony Adapter
VoLTE Voice over Long Term Evolution
VON Virtual On-Net
VP Voice Portal
VPB Virtual Patch Bundle
VPC Voice Portal Calling
VPC VoIP Positioning Center
VPN Virtual Private Network
VRML Virtual Reality Modeling Language
VRRP Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
VSA Vendor-specific Attributes
VSP Voice over IP Service Provider
VSP Virtual System Partition
Vsub Virtual Subscriber (Vsub should not be used in documentation
such as FDs (which are externalized) as this is a BroadSoft
internal term).
VTAM Virtual Telecommunications Access Method
VT-CSI VMSC Terminating CSI

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 306 OF 314
 VTR Verify Translation and Routing
VTRI Verify Translation and Routing Input
VXML Voice Extensible Markup Language
VZB Verizon Business
W3C World Wide Web Consortium
WAN Wide Area Network
WAP Wireless Application Protocol
WAR Web Application ARchive
WAS Web-based Authentication Server
WAV Waveform Audio File Format (file extension)
Webapp Web Application
WebDAV Web-based Distributed Authoring and Versioning
WebRTC Web Real-Time Communication
WiFi Wireless Fidelity
WIN Wireless Intelligent Network
WIX Windows Installer XML
WLAN Wireless Local Area Network
WLSS WebLogic SIP Server
WMA Windows Media Audio File Format
WPA Warning Prompt Announcement
WPF Warning Prompt Final
WRS WebRTC Server
WS Web Server
WSDL Web Service Description Language
WSP Wireless Session Protocol
WSP Wholesale Protocol
WTS Windows Terminal Services
WWW World Wide Web
X.25 CCITT Packet Switching Standard
X.400 CCITT and ISO Message-handling Service Standard
X.500 ITU and ISO Directory Service Standard
X.509 ITU and ISO Digital Certificate Standard
X11 X Window System Version 11
XA Execution Application
XAS eXternal Database Application Server
XCAP XML Configuration Access Protocol

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 307 OF 314
 Xdp Xtended Developer Program
xDSL External Digital Subscriber Line
XLA Transaction Log API (TimesTen term)
XLS Excel File Format
XML eXtensible Markup Language
XMPP Extensible Messaging and Presence Protocol
XOIP X-Origin-IP
XR Extended Report
XS Execution Server
XSD XML Schema Definition

Xsi Xtended Services Interface

XSL Extensible Stylesheet Language
XSLT Extensible Stylesheet Language Transformation
Xsp Xtended Services Platform
XSS Cross-Site Scripting
XWF Xtended Widget Framework
ZFS Z File System

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 308 OF 314
Index

Access codes, Dial Plan policy Modifying, 44

Adding, 63 Pre-alerting, 133
Deleting, 64 Repository, managing, 42
Modifying, 64 Assigned users, enterprise trunk, 153
Account codes, tracking outside calls Assigning. See also Adding
Adding, 183 Call Recording platform, 76
Deleting, 182 Department numbers, 103
Identifying users, 178 IMRNs, 116
Listing, 182 Numbers to department, 103
Acct/Auth codes. See Account codes or Priorities to trunks in enterprise trunk, 151
authorization codes Resources, 76
Services
Activating numbers, 109
Group, 111
Adding User, 112, 114
Access codes, Dial Plan policy, 63 Trunk groups to enterprise trunk, 150
Account codes, outside calls, 183
Authorization codes
Administrators, 35
Calling plans, 186
Announcements, 43
Adding, 186
Authorization codes
Deleting, 186
Calling plans, 186
Listing, 186
Communication barring, 60
Communication barring, 59
Outside calls, 183
Adding, 60
Common phone numbers, 211
Deleting, 60
Custom contact directories, 214
Listing, 59
Departments, 47
Outside calls
Dial Plan policy access codes, 63
Adding, 183
Dialable caller ID criteria, 72
Deleting, 182
Digit strings, 188
Identifying users, 180
Enterprise trunks, 144, 145
Listing, 182
Feature access codes, 216
Identity/device profiles, 80 Basic services, list, 120
Music/Video On Hold department settings, 126 BroadWorks Mobility
Pinhole digit strings, 191 Numbers, listing, 119
Range, Virtual On-Net users, 68 Settings, viewing, 141
Schedules, 51 Business trunking license units, 106
Series completion groups, 165 Call capacity control
Session admission control groups, 169 Maximum concurrent sessions, 108
Users to enterprise trunks, 152 Trunking license units, 106
Virtual On-Net users, 67 Call Center, 184
Administrators, 34 Call Processing Language. See CPL scripts
Adding, 35
Call Processing Policies, configuring, 56
Department
Home page, 260 Call Recording platform, selecting, 76
Procedures, 260, 262, 263 Calling codes. See Account codes or authorization
Tasks and responsibilities, 259 codes
Group Calling plans, 185
Home page, 29 Codes management, 186
Tasks and responsibilities, 27 Digit strings, 187
Listing, 34 Incoming calls, 194
Modifying and deleting, 37 Outgoing calls, 196
Password, modifying, 33 Digit pattern-based, 200
Policies, configuring, 38 Overriding restrictions, 203
Advanced services, list, 120 Pinhole digit strings, 190
Advice Of Charge, 141 Transfer numbers, 193
Announcements Carriers, preferred, 163
Adding, 43 Changing. See Modifying
Deleting, 45 Clearing, CPL script logs, 177
Listing, 42 Codes management, calling plans, 186
APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00
©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 309 OF 314
Common phone list, 210 Calling plans, 186
Importing, 212 Communication barring, 60
Numbers Outside calls, 182
Adding, 211 Common phone numbers, 210, 211
Deleting, 210, 211 Custom contact directories, 215
Modifying, 211 Departments, 48
Viewing, 210 Dial Plan policy access codes, 64
CommPilot Call Manager, 121 Dialable caller ID criteria, 74
Enterprise directory, configuring, 123 Digit strings, 188, 190
Group directory, configuring, 122 Enterprise trunks, 157
Feature access codes, 216
Communication barring authorization codes, 59
Identity/device profiles, 95
Adding, 60
Music/Video On Hold, department settings, 132
Deleting, 60
Pinhole digit strings, 191, 192
Listing, 59
Series completion groups, 166
Concurrent sessions, configuring maximum, 108 Session admission control groups, 171, 172
Configurable devices. See Devices Users from enterprise trunk, 154
Configuring Virtual On-Net users, 69
Administrator policies, 38 Departments
Call Processing Policies, 56 Adding, 47
Calling plans, 185 Administrator role, 259
Incoming calls, 194 Assigning numbers, 103
Outgoing calls, 196, 200, 203 Authorization codes, calling plans, 186
CommPilot Call Manager Calling plans
Enterprise directory, 123 Incoming calls, 194
Group directory, 122 Outgoing calls, 196, 200, 203
CPL scripts, 175 Listing, 46
Custom ringback, 143 Modifying or deleting, 48
Devices, 240 Music/Video On Hold, configuring, 125
Dialable caller ID, 71 Transfer numbers, 193
Integrated IM&P domain, 124 Devices
LDAP directory, 253 Configurable, listing, 240
Legacy devices, 86 Configuration files
Phone extension length, 250 Listing, 240
Resources, 75 Loading default, 247
Services, 120 Modifying, 242
Utilities, 208 Rebuilding, 240
Voice messaging server, 135 Custom tags
Voice portal, 137 Adding, 244
Greetings, 257 Deleting, 246
Passcode rules, 238 Modifying, 245
Contact directories. See Directories Event queues, 248
CPL scripts, 174 Lines/ports, reordering, 89
Clearing logs, 177 Dial Plan policy
Enabling or disabling, 175 Access codes
Loading, 176 Adding, 63
Custom Deleting, 64
Contact directories, 212 Modifying, 64
Adding, 214 General settings, configuring, 61
Modifying or deleting, 215 Dialable caller ID, 69
Ringback, 142 Configuring, 71
Tags Criteria
Identity/device profile types, 243 Adding, 72
Identity/device profiles, 93 Modifying and deleting, 74
Deactivating numbers, 109 Prioritizing, 71
Deleting Settings, listing, 70
Access codes, Dial Plan policy, 64 Digit strings
Account codes, outside calls, 182 Adding, 188
Administrators, 37 Calling plans, 187
Announcements, 45 Deleting, 188, 190
Authorization codes Listing, 188

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 310 OF 314
 Modifying, 190 Directory
Pinhole, 190 CommPilot Call Manager, configuring, 122
Adding, 191 Listing, 227
Listing, 191 Profile, modifying, 31
Modifying, 192 Resources. See Resources
Using in calling plans, 194, 200, 203 Services. See Services
Directories Group Night Forwarding, 157
Common phone list, 210 Group paging targets capacity, 77
Custom, 212 Groups, series completion, 164
Enterprise, 123, 230
Holiday schedule. See Schedules
Group, 122, 227
Home page
Disabling
Department administrator, 260
CPL scripts, 175
Group administrator, 29
LDAP Integration, 124
Identity/device endpoints, listing, 78
Domains
Integrated IM&P, configuring, 124 Identity/device profiles
Listing, 96 Adding, 80
Users, listing, 97 Custom tags, managing, 93, 243
Deleting, 95
Downloading device configuration files, 242
Files, managing, 90
Enabling Legacy, configuring, 86
CPL scripts, 175 Listing, 78
LDAP Integration, 124 Modifying, 82
Enterprise directory Users, listing, 88
CommPilot Call Manager, configuring, 123 IM&P, 124
Listing, 230
Importing common phone list, 212
Enterprise trunk number ranges, listing, 99
IMRNs, 116
Enterprise trunks, 144 Assigning, 116
Adding, 145 Listing, 116
Assigning users, 153 Unassigning, 117
Deleting, 157
Incoming Calling Plan, 194
Listing, 145
Modifying, 155 Instant Messaging, 124
Routing policies, 144, 152 Integrated IM&P, 124
Trunk groups Intercept Group, viewing settings, 251
Assigning, 150 Intergroup calls, tracking and authorizing, 178
Prioritizing, 151 InterLATA carriers, 163
Users
International carriers, 163
Assigning, 152
Listing, 153 IntraLATA carriers, 163
Unassigning, 154 Inventory report, 233
Event queues, viewing or cancelling, 248 IP Multimedia Routing Numbers. See IMRNs
Exchange Integration, 134 LDAP Integration
Existing users, assigning services, 114 Configuring directory, 253
Enabling or disabling, 124
Extended scope voice portal, 137
Legacy devices, configuring, 86
Extension length, configuring, 250
Lines/ports, modifying order for device, 89
Feature access codes (FACs), 216
Listing
Files, device configuration
Account codes, outside calls, 182
Modifying, 242
Administrators, 34
Rebuilding, 240
Announcements, 42
Greetings, voice portal, 257 Assigned numbers, 101
Group Authorization codes
Administrators, 34 Calling plans, 186
Adding, 35 Communication barring, 59
Home page, 29 Outside calls, 182
Listing, 34 Calling plans
Modifying and deleting, 37 Incoming calls, 194
Password, modifying, 33 Outgoing calls, 196, 200, 203
Policies, configuring, 38 Common phone numbers, 210
Tasks and responsibilities, 27 Configurable devices, 240

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 311 OF 314
 CPL script logs, 177 Administrators, 37
Departments, 46 Announcements, 44
Device configuration files, 240 Common phone numbers, 211
Digit strings, 188 Custom contact directories, 215
Domain users, 97 Departments, 48
Domains, 96 Device configuration files, 242
Enterprise directory, 230 Device lines/ports order, 89
Enterprise trunk number ranges, 99 Dial Plan policy access codes, 64
Enterprise trunk users, 153 Dialable caller ID criteria, 74
Enterprise trunks, 145 Digit strings, 190
Feature access codes, 216 Enterprise trunks, 155
Group directory, 227 Feature access codes, 216
Group paging targets capacity, 77 Group profile, 31
Group services Identity/device profiles, 82
Assigned, 110 Music/Video On Hold settings, 128
Authorized, 105 Password, administrator, 33
Identity/device endpoints, 78 Pinhole digit strings, 192
Identity/device profiles, 78 Schedules, 54
IMRNs, 116 Series completion groups, 166
Intercept Group settings, 251 Session admission control groups, 171
Mobile subscriber directory numbers, 119 Transfer numbers, 193
Music/Video On Hold, settings, 125 Virtual On-Net users, 69
Network classes of service, 98 Music/Video On Hold settings, 125
Numbers, assigned, 101 Department
Office zones, 100 Adding, 126
Pinhole digit strings, 191 Deleting, 132
Preferred carriers, 163 Group/department
Route point external systems, 103, 104 General, 129
Schedule details, 50 Internal calls, 131
Series completion groups, 164 Listing, 125
Service pack details, 106 Modifying, 128
Services, 105 MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint, 158
Session admission control groups, 168 Adding delivery custom template, 159
Transfer numbers, 193 Modifying delivery custom template, 162
Trunking call capacity, 106 Viewing and enabling SMS templates, 159
Users in enterprise trunk, 153
Network classes of service
Voice portal, passcode rules, 238
Listing, 98
Loading CPL scripts, 176 Users, listing, 98
Logs, CPL scripts, 177 New users, assigning services, 112
Managing Numbers
Account/authorization codes, 182 Activating and deactivating, 109
Announcement repository, 42 Departments, assigning, 103
Meet-Me Conferencing, 207 IMRNs, 116
Menus Listing
Department Activation status, 101, 109
Group Services, 261 Assigned, 101
Profile, 260 Mobile, 119
Utilities, 263 Ranges reserved for enterprise trunking, 99
Group Office zones
Acct/Auth Codes, 178 Assigned users, 101
Call Center, 184 Listing, 100
Calling plan, 185 On-Net. See Virtual On-Net
Meet-Me Conferencing, 207
Ordered routing, enterprise trunks, 148
Profile, 29
Resources, 75 Outgoing Calling Plan, 196
Service Scripts, 174 Digit pattern-based rules, 200
Services, 120 Overriding restrictions, 203
Utilities, 208 Outgoing digit plan, 200
Mobile subscriber directory numbers, 119 Outgoing pinhole digit plan, 203
Modifying Outside calls, tracking and authorizing, 178
Access codes, Dial Plan policy, 64 Paging group, maximum size, 77

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 312 OF 314
Passcode rules, 238 Adding, 51
Password Adding events, 52
Administrator, modifying, 33 Listing and deleting, 49
Rules, configuring, 235 Modifying, 54
Viewing details, 50
Phone numbers. See Numbers
Selecting, Call Recording platform, 76
Phone services, Polycom, 163
Series completion groups
Pinhole digit strings, 190
Adding, 165
Adding, 191
Listing, 164
Deleting, 191, 192
Modifying or deleting, 166
Listing, 191
Modifying, 192 Servers, voice messaging, configuring, 135
Policies Service packs
Call Processing, 56 Assigning to users, 112, 114
Dial Plan, configuring, 61 Listing content, 106
Enterprise trunk call routing, 144 Service scripts. See CPL scripts
Group administrator, 38 Services, 120
Polycom Phone Services, 163 Advanced, 120
Portal, passcode rules, 238 Advice Of Charge, 141
Assigning
Pre-alerting Announcement, 133
Group, 111
Preferred carriers, 163 User, 114
Prioritizing Basic, 120
Dialable caller ID criteria, 71 BroadWorks Mobility, 141
Trunk groups in enterprise trunks, 151 CommPilot Call Manager, 121
Profile, group, 31 Custom Ringback Group, 142
Rebuilding device configuration files, 240 Enterprise Trunk, 144
Recording platform, configuring, 76 Exchange Integration, 134
Report, group resources, 233 Group Night Forwarding, 157
Group, assigning, 110
Resources, 75 Incoming Calling Plan, 194
Assigning, 76 Integrated IM&P, 124
Call Recording platform, 76 Intercept Group, 251
Configuring, 75 Inventory Report, 233
Domains, 96 LDAP Integration, 124
Enterprise trunk number ranges, 99 Listing, 105
Existing user services, 114 Music/Video On Hold, 125
Group paging targets capacity, 77 MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint, 158
Identity/device endpoints, 78 Outgoing Calling Plan, 196
Identity/device profiles, 78 Polycom Phone Services, 163
IMRNs, 116 Pre-alerting Announcement, 133
Inventory report, generating, 233 Preferred Carrier Group, 163
Network classes of service, 98 Series Completion, 164
New user services template, 112 Service Scripts Group, 174
Numbers Third-Party Voice Mail Support, 167
Activating, 109 Users
Listing, 101 Assigning, 112, 114
Office zones, 100 Viewing usage, 115
Route point external systems, 103 Voice Messaging, 135
Services Voice Portal, 137
Authorized, listing, 105
Group, assigning, 110 Session admission control
Users, assigning, 112, 114 Capacity, viewing, 108
Groups, 167
Session admission control capacity, 108
Adding, 169
Trunking call capacity, 106
Deleting, 171, 172
Ringback, customizing, 143 Listing, 168
Route point external systems Modifying, 171
Listing, 103 Targets, maximum in paging group, 77
Route points, assigned, 104
Test calls, generating, 255
Running VTR test calls, 255
Third-Party Voice Mail Support, 167
SAC. See Session admission control
Time schedule. See Schedules
Schedules, 49
APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00
©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 313 OF 314
Tracking outside calls, 178 Group, 208
Transfer numbers, calling plans, 193 Verifying translation and routing, 255
Translation and routing, verifying, 255 Video On Hold. See Music/Video On Hold
Trunk groups Viewing. See Listing
Call capacity, 106 Virtual On-Net
Enterprise trunk Enterprise extensions, 65
Assigning, 150 Users
Prioritizing, 151 Adding, 67
Unassigning, IMRNs, 117 Adding range, 68
Users Listing, 66
Account codes, using, 178 Modifying or deleting, 69
Authorization codes, using, 180 Viewing, 66
Enterprise trunk, assigning, 152 Voice mail, third-party, 167
Existing, assigning services, 114 Voice Messaging, 135
Identity/device profile, listing for, 88 Voice portal
In domain, listing, 97 Branding, 257
Network class of service, assigned, 98 Configuring, 137
New, assigning services, 112 Extended scope, 137
Office zone, assigned, 101 Greetings, configuring, 257
Password rules, 235 Passcode rules, configuring, 238
Services VTR test calls, 255
Assigning, 112, 114
Web portal password rules, 235
Viewing usage, 115
Weighted routing, enterprise trunks, 146
Utilities
Department, 263

APPLICATION SERVER GROUP WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE – PART 1 10-BD5010-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 314 OF 314